Quarterlytics / TheWorks.co.uk

TheWorks.co.uk

wrks · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker wrks
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2022 Annual Report · TheWorks.co.uk
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Inspiring 
people to do

Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Our ambition; to become one 
of the most loved retailers in the UK – 
the go-to place for reading, learning, 
creativity and play.

Contents

Strategic report
Highlights 
Our purpose 
Our investment case 
At a glance  
Chair’s statement 
Chief Executive’s review 
Our business model 
Our marketplace 
Our strategy and progress 
How we measure performance 
Financial review 
Our stakeholders  
Section 172 statement 
ESG review  
Risk management and 
principal risks and uncertainties 
Viability statement 

01
02
03
04
06
08
12
14
16
18
19
24
26
28

39
45

Corporate governance
47
Chair’s governance introduction  
 48
Board of Directors 
50
Corporate governance report 
54
Audit Committee report 
58
Nomination Committee report 
60
Directors’ remuneration report 
64
Remuneration policy 
72
Annual report on remuneration 
Directors’ report 
81
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities  84

Financial statements
Independent auditor’s report 
Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income 
Consolidated statement  
of financial position 
Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 
Consolidated cash flow statement 
Notes to the consolidated 
financial statements 
Company statement  
of financial position 
Company statement  
of changes in equity 
Notes to the Company  
financial statements 
Advisers and contacts  

85
92

93

94

95
96

97

126 

127 

128
IBC

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Highlights

Financial highlights

Revenue

£264.6m

FY21: £180.7m

PBT

£10.2m

FY21: (£2.8m)

Like-for-like (LFL) sales growth1

Adjusted PBT

+10.5% 

FY21: +6.0% Stores +120.9% online

£10.1m

FY21: (£3.6m)

Non-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA

Dividend

£16.6m

FY21: £4.3m

2.4p

FY21: nil

Basic EPS

14.0p

FY21: (3.7p)

Adjusted basic EPS

13.9p

FY21: (4.9p)

1    The LFL sales increase has been calculated with reference to the FY20 comparative sales figures, or two-year LFL, because the extended periods of 

enforced store closures during FY21 prevent that period from forming the basis of meaningful comparisons. For the last five weeks of the period, it has 
been necessary to calculate the LFL percentages with reference to the corresponding weeks in FY19, because the equivalent weeks during FY20 were 
also affected by the first period of enforced store closures. Similar comparison periods are also used for the total gross sales growth figures quoted.

Operational highlights
•  Delivered a strong trading performance in FY22, well ahead 

of pre-COVID-19 levels, with total gross sales up 44.7% compared 
with FY21 and 12.7% compared with FY20. 

•  Defined the Group’s new purpose and brand positioning, 

inspiring reading, learning, creativity and play - making lives 
more fulfilled. This provides a common goal to show everybody 
at The Works that they have a role to play in delivering our 
‘better, not just bigger strategy’.

•  Created a more appealing, more customer-focused product 
proposition, aligned to our purpose. This included overhauling 
our book strategy to stock more front-list titles, capitalising on 
the ‘BookTok’ trend and increasing ranges of popular branded 
products in our kids and board games ranges. 

•  Catered for increasingly ‘time poor’ customers, who seek greater 
product availability and faster delivery times, by improving our 
online fulfilment capacity and delivery options. 

• 

Improved the quality of the store estate by opening five new 
stores, closing seven and relocating six. We undertook 16 store 
refits as part of our strategy to refresh the store estate, as well as 
enhancing the in-store experience for customers through better 
space planning, ranging and merchandising.

•  Further strengthened our senior leadership team with the 

appointment of a new Commercial Director and new ‘Heads 
of’ in our Buying, Brand Marketing, Digital Marketing and Profit 
Protection functions. 

•  Maintained our high levels of colleague engagement and 
13th place on the Best Big Companies to work for ranking. 

•  Brought forward a review of the dividend and proposed 
the payment of a final dividend of 2.4 pence per share 
in respect of FY22. 

Visit our website
corporate.theworks.co.uk

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

01

 
 
 
Our purpose

Better, not just bigger.

Our purpose and strategy aim to bring our well-loved brand to life  
and make The Works ‘better, not just bigger’. 

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17.

Our purpose:

To inspire reading, learning, creativity and play - making lives more fulfilled.

Underpinning this purpose:

We believe in the 
importance of FUN AND 
FULFILMENT, taking time out 
to do the things you love.e.

We want reading, learning, 
creativity and play to be 
ACCESSIBLE TO EVERYONE, 
affordable, convenient 
and inclusive.

We want to be the GO-TO 
PLACE to inspire customers 
to embrace their free time. .

Fulfilled by our brand that is:

Fun

Creative

Friendly

Empowering

Confident

Value-led

Brought to life by our family of colleagues who are:

Crafty 

Caring

Can-do

Helping us to fulfil our ambition of becoming one of the most loved retailers  
in the UK - the go-to place for reading, learning, creativity and play.

02

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

  Read more about our culture on page 34.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Our investment case

A differentiated offering with 
significant organic growth 
potential in the value retail sector.

1. 

Clear purpose – to inspire reading, 
learning, creativity and play - 
making lives more fulfilled.

5. 

Cash generative, low capex business model.

2. 

6. 

Unique proposition – cheaper than 
specialists, more choice of products and 
better customer service than discounters.

Simplicity over complexity - strategy 
focused on implementing best retail 
practice, as opposed to costly, 
high-risk concepts.

3.  

7. 

Broad demographic appeal (gender, 
age, ethnicity, income) creates a large 
addressable market.

Previous under-potentialisation creates real 
opportunity for growth (sales and profit).

4. 

8. 

Flexible store estate - small inexpensive 
shop units work well in a variety of 
locations serving local communities, 
and provide touch points not available 
to pure-play online retailers, (e.g. click 
& collect), and short leases allow for 
changes in local market conditions.

Significant headroom to develop online 
sales (to c.20% of total sales in the 
medium-term) supported by extended 
ranges and initiatives to increase customer 
engagement and loyalty.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

03

 
 
 
At a glance

A leading multi-channel 
value retailer. 

At The Works we believe in giving everyone the opportunity to learn, be inspired and have fun. 
Our mission; to become one of the most loved retailers in the UK. Our core foundations of great value, 
fantastic ranges and excellent customer service are at the heart of our 525 stores and website. 
We make reading, learning, creativity and play accessible to everyone.

Store estate

Multi-channel

Colleagues

Our 525 stores can be found 
in a diverse range of locations: 
on high streets, in shopping centres, 
on retail parks, in factory outlets 
and as concessions (typically in 
garden centres).

Our stores play an important role in 
inspiring reading, learning, creativity 
and play in their local communities, 
along with supporting local 
fundraising activity.

We are one of the few value retailers 
with a full-featured online store 
that helps our customers to shop 
how they want, when they want, 
seven days a week.

Our website complements our stores, 
offering many exclusive products that 
are not available in store, and our 
popular click & collect service offers 
further convenience  
to customers.

525 

stores in the UK and Ireland

1,000+

web exclusive products

41.5 million  

website visits during FY22

Our loyal, dedicated and highly 
engaged colleagues are key to 
the success of our business.

Ranked

13th 

Best Big Company to Work for 
the second consecutive year

c.3,800

colleagues

  Read more about our 
colleagues on page 34.

04

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

We have a wide product offering, which is designed to appeal to our broad customer base. 
This includes our own brand products, which support our value offering and enable us to provide 
our customers with products that are exclusive to The Works. We also offer the most in-demand 
branded products across our categories and new books on their release date.

Our brands and products

c.6,000 products available in store c.400 ‘core’ lines permanently in stock

Books
We have refined our book ranges, becoming a 
destination for kids books, growing brands in each age 
range, with a brilliantly priced, curated range of the 
very latest trending non-fiction adult books. 

Our own brands

Arts, crafts and hobbies
Our Arts, Crafts and Hobbies Zone comprises a wide 
selection of paints, brushes, art sets, paper, canvas 
and craft kits that cater for the needs of beginners 
to experts, alongside a complementary book offer to 
further inspire our artistic and crafty customers. Our 
buying expertise allows us to offer fantastic value for 
money across the whole range and is further supported 
by a well curated range extension online.

Stationery
Our stationery selection includes our own- brand Paper 
Place high-quality fashion notebooks, writing sets, 
storage boxes and address books. These sit alongside 
our big brands offer including Bic, Helix, Xerox and Pukka. 
Our Scribblicious range includes trendy pens, pencils, 
pencil cases, and storage solutions suitable for all ages. 

Our own brands

Toys & games
Toys & games covers both kids and family games. It is 
a ‘one-stop shop’ for a range of kids’ favourites, from 
the latest crazes to a wide range of toys, jigsaws and 
big brand games. This zone also features our important 
education range supporting children’s development.

Our own brands

Seasonal
We offer customers everything they may need to 
make family occasions and seasonal events really 
special including ‘back to school’, summer fun, 
Easter and Christmas.

Our own brands

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

05

 
 
 
Chair’s statement

Over the course of the last year 
I have seen The Works become 
an increasingly modern and 
efficient business.

brand, how it is managing to maintain its position as one of the 
leading retailers in the value sector and how it has sustained a 
well-earned reputation for being an incredibly supportive workplace 
for colleagues. 

A standout feature of The Works is its truly unique culture. It is 
one of the greatest strengths of the business and has developed 
as a result of strong leadership, a positive work environment 
and a shared passion for delighting customers. Clarifying the 
Group’s purpose – to inspire reading, learning,creativity and play 
- making lives more fulfilled. – has already had a positive effect on 
colleagues across the business by helping them to understand the 
role they can play in inspiring our customers and supporting our 
communities. Given the current external environment, our purpose 
has never been more relevant. It is vital that we help our customers 
to be resourceful, show them how to get creative and that having 
fun doesn’t need to be costly or excessively consumptive. 

This has all been spearheaded by a strengthened leadership 
team, led by Gavin, and supported by a team of passionate and 
committed colleagues. On behalf of the Board I would like to thank 
colleagues for all they have done, and continue to do, for our 
business and stakeholders, and for constantly going above and 
beyond to care for one other.

Performance
All retailers have faced difficult external conditions over the past 
year, particularly the increased costs and disruption caused by 
the global supply chain challenges post COVID-19. The Works 
was also subject to a cyber-security incident in March which 
required swift and extensive action to be taken to protect the 
business and minimise the impact on trading. Each of these factors 
in isolation would be enough to test any retailer, let alone both 
in one year. However, despite the adverse impacts from these 
events, due to the groundwork that Gavin and colleagues laid 
before the pandemic, an improved customer proposition and 
effective execution of our strategy, the business was able to deliver 
a strong trading performance in FY22, which was well ahead 
of pre-pandemic levels. Revenue increased to £264.6m (FY21: 
£180.7m), profit before tax increased to £10.2m (FY21: loss before 
tax of £2.8m) and the business delivered another record Christmas, 
demonstrating its resilience in very challenging circumstances.

Introduction
I have greatly enjoyed my first year as Chair of The Works and feel 
very proud to be part of a business that seeks to enrich the lives 
of its customers and their families, friends and communities. I have 
spent a lot of my time getting to know the business, meeting the 
teams and celebrating too, having joined during The Works’ 40th 
anniversary year.

I have been impressed by the resilience of the business and its 
ability to adapt to challenging external conditions, whilst also 
delivering good strategic and financial progress. Over the course 
of the last year I have also seen The Works become an increasingly 
modern and efficient business that is being run, for the long-term 
and in a more professional and structured way by Gavin Peck 
and his strengthened leadership team. I have seen time and time 
again exactly why its customers have such a strong affinity to the 

06

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Strategy
The last year has also demonstrated that the refocused ‘better, 
not just bigger’ strategy, which is already delivering tangible results, 
is the right strategic direction for the business. If we continue making 
progress against each of our four strategic pillars the Board and I are 
confident that we will see more new customers choose The Works 
as their primary destination for products to read, learn, create and 
play and that we will earn increased customer loyalty from existing 
customers. We will also be very well positioned to deliver sustainable 
sales and profit growth in the medium-term and to create value for 
all our stakeholders.

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG)
The Works has been increasingly focused on its ESG agenda in 
recent years and has developed three pillars to provide greater 
clarity and structure, as well as a steering group to drive progress 
in these areas (see page 28). The business has now laid the 
foundations for a more ambitious and systematic approach 
to ESG and made some good early progress, but more work 
needs to be done. In particular we need to develop a detailed 
programme of activities and agree metrics to measure progress 
and targets to reduce our environmental impact. We must also 
implement the necessary changes to ensure that our reporting 
is consistent with the recommendations of the Task Force on 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures. The Works’ governance 
structure is effective and the business has a good track record in 
protecting its people and supporting its communities; however, 
there are plenty of opportunities to enhance these areas further, 
for example by promoting greater diversity and inclusion across the 
business. Our colleagues have shown a desire to engage more in 
our ESG position and already play a role in supporting their local 
communities, fundraising for our charity partners and protecting 
the environment, for example through recycling and donating old 
stock to schools and charities. They are by nature enthusiastic, 
crafty and resourceful, so will play an important part in driving 
progress against our ESG pillars. 

Dividend 
As part of some prudent measures to strengthen the balance sheet 
and manage the cost base and cash flows during the COVID-19 
pandemic, dividends were suspended in FY20 and FY21. Reflecting 
the Group’s strong performance in FY22, and its future potential, the 
Board has brought forward its review of the dividend and is proposing 
the payment of a final dividend of 2.4 pence per share in respect 
of FY22, subject to shareholder approval at our AGM on 27 October 
2022, and will look to maintain the cadence of twice yearly dividend 
payments thereafter. Whilst the consumer market remains especially 
volatile, we will review future payment levels based on prevailing 
conditions, but intend to resume a progressive dividend policy in due 
course once conditions stabilise.

Outlook 
Our success this year reflects the ongoing appeal of our 
proposition and the resilience of our business and was achieved 
despite some significant external challenges. In the current 
economic environment, characterised by ongoing inflationary 
pressure and subdued consumer sentiment, our value proposition 
is more relevant than ever. We are confident that the Group will 
continue to make good strategic progress in the year ahead and 
will deliver growth in the medium term, albeit that the underlying 
Adjusted EBITDA result for FY23 will be lower than in FY22. 

Carolyn Bradley
Chair
23 September 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Q&A with Carolyn

You have now been in your role for a 
year. What are the key things that have 
stood out?
Having spent many years working in retail and 
consumer businesses, I have experienced a 
variety of cultures and The Works truly is one of a 
kind. I have had the opportunity to visit a number 
of our stores and meet our colleagues. They are 
passionate about what they do and committed 
to serving our customers. We also have a clear 
set of values that are helping to nurture a culture 
which was already strong. And within the UK 
retail sector, we have a unique, affordable and 
accessible product offering, which given the 
current cost of living crisis I am confident will 
be more important than ever before.

Is the strategy likely to change?
No. We have a clear plan built around four 
key priorities that will support value creation 
for all stakeholders and enhance our business. 
This strategy is being effectively executed by 
our leadership team and it is already starting 
to deliver in a number of areas, particularly 
in improving our customer proposition. 

What are your priorities for the 
coming year?
As we monitor the Group’s strategic progress, 
my fellow Board members and I will continue to 
focus on ensuring that The Works remains the 
destination for great value products to inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play. We have 
an unrivalled customer loyalty programme and 
I have seen first hand how effectively these 
schemes can drive growth. We must capitalise 
on our Together Loyalty Rewards programme, 
which already truly engages and delights our 
customers. More generally we must increase 
our focus on our ESG agenda, particularly our 
environmental strategy. We recognise that 
we have a role to play in the transition to net 
zero and, from a commercial perspective, 
we need to be able to respond to increasing 
customer demand for more sustainable products 
and packaging.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

07

 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s review

Despite facing significant 
external challenges through 
the year we delivered a strong 
financial performance and 
made good strategic progress 
in FY22.

Our purpose
The Works’ proposition, which resonated particularly well with 
customers during the pandemic, really strengthened over the 
course of FY22. To underpin the evolution of our brand, we felt the 
time was right to redefine our purpose. This purpose is ‘to inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play – making lives more fulfilled’. 
This will help focus our colleagues on a common goal and show 
everybody at The Works that they have a role to play as part of 
our strategy to make our business better, not just bigger. Having 
now succinctly articulated why we exist the next step is to fully 
embed this purpose across the business. We believe it will have 
a truly transformational effect on our performance over the next 
three years.

Trading performance and financial results 
The Works delivered a strong trading performance in FY22, well 
ahead of pre-COVID-19 levels, demonstrating the strong execution 
of our strategy. Our first half performance was ahead of our 
expectations and in H2 FY22 we delivered a record Christmas 
despite uncertainty over the impact of the Omicron variant and the 
ongoing supply chain challenges faced by the sector. Trading in 
the second half remained positive, although, as expected, the rate 
of growth began to slow in the latter months of the period, primarily 
reflecting the impact of an increasingly challenging consumer 
environment, and also a cyber security incident towards the end 
of FY22. Overall, total gross sales for the period were £298.4m, 
an increase of 44.7% compared with FY21 and 12.7% compared with 
FY201. Two-year LFL sales increased by 10.5%, with growth online 
and in stores.

This positive trading performance was driven by our ‘better, not just 
bigger’ strategy. This included a greater focus on products that 
inspire and delight our customers such as front-list books, branded 
products and extended online product ranges, which engaged 
existing customers and attracted new ones to shop with us, both 
in store and online. Our flexible business model also enabled us 
to capitalise on trends like the ‘summer of staycations’, Fidget 
Frenzy and BookTok, which boosted sales of the most in-demand 
products during the year. 

1 

 See separate footnote (1 and 2) of the LFL table in the Financial Review on 
page 20 which describe the basis for calculating 2-year sales comparisons.

Introduction
Our financial year started shortly after we emerged from a lengthy 
period of COVID-19 lockdowns, with stores having just re-opened. 
Our customers were delighted to be able to shop with us in store 
again, and it was a real boost to see colleagues back doing the 
job they love and the retail sector starting to recover from a period 
beset by disruptions. I am pleased to report that despite the 
significant challenges arising from global supply chain disruption 
and a cyber security incident towards the end of the financial 
year, we delivered a strong financial performance and made good 
strategic progress in FY22. This was due to our colleagues, who 
were ready to serve our customers on their return and continued to 
show incredible resilience, team spirit and passion for the work they 
do. On behalf of the leadership team I would like to thank them for 
all their ongoing support. This year has demonstrated the resilience 
of the business; I am proud of all that we have achieved and remain 
confident about the future prospects for The Works.

08

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Retail is a sector in which challenges arise constantly but two 
notable ones arose during the year, which we would not expect to 
recur and are therefore worth highlighting:

1. 

2. 

 Supply chain disruption and ongoing uncertainty surrounding 
possible COVID-19 related restrictions saw some Christmas 
trade brought forward into September and October. Our 
proactive management of the supply chain ensured that we 
had adequate stock overall, despite some of it arriving later 
than planned, which meant that, although the sales pattern 
pre-Christmas was different than in previous years, and sub-
optimal compared to our plans, we were still able to deliver a 
record Christmas performance. 

 We also experienced a cyber-security incident at the end of 
March 2022, which for a short time impacted our till systems, 
replenishment deliveries to stores and delayed the fulfilment 
of online orders. We took swift action to protect the business, 
which dealt with the immediate threat and enabled us to 
continue trading online and from more than 95% of our stores. 
Although the initial impact on trading was minimal, our 
operational recovery, which also included making significant 
improvements to security arrangements, took longer than 
expected, and resulted in a residual impact on sales into the 
early part of FY23.

Profit performance improved significantly, with FY22 EBITDA 
increasing to £16.6m (FY21: £4.3m). Our improved sales performance 
and the operational and propositional improvements we have 
made throughout the year helped to offset the cost impact of 
the external headwinds highlighted above, which were partially 
offset by £5.8m of COVID-19 business rates relief. On a statutory 
basis, profit before tax increased to £10.2m (FY21: loss before tax 
of £2.8m).

Strategy
At the FY21 Preliminary Results we announced an evolution of 
our strategy, to be a ‘better, not just bigger’ version of ourselves. 
Since then we have made good strategic progress, both behind the 
scenes to improve our operations, and efficiency, as well as more 
visible changes to sharpen the proposition, improve our stores, our 
product ranges and how we interact with our customers. We have 
also strengthened the management team and senior leadership 
across the business to support the successful execution of our strategy. 

Each change made, when considered in isolation, will have 
a relatively limited impact on our future performance but 
collectively the changes we have made across the entire business 
will, we believe, be truly game changing for The Works. These 
improvements have already helped to drive top and bottom-line 
growth in FY22 and we believe that if we continue to make good 
progress against this strategy it will significantly increase sales and 
will generate much more sustainable returns in the long-term. 

Our strategic pillars

Develop our 
brand and 
increase customer 
engagement

Enhance our  
online proposition

Optimise our  
store estate

Drive operational 
improvements

  Read more about 
our strategy 
on pages 16 and 17.

Strategy in action 
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhancing our product offering
Our affordable and accessible product offering 
continues to grow. To complement our own 
product range we have introduced over 100 new 
top brand and licensed toys and games including 
Crayola, Orchard Toys, Peppa Pig and Paw 
Patrol. We are also expanding our front-list book 
ranges (new books that are available on their 
release date). This development has enabled us 
to capitalise on the ‘BookTok’ phenomenon, draw 
attention to previously best-selling books and 
prompt renewed customer interest in them.

  Read more about our strategy 
on pages 16 and 17.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Outlined below is an overview of each of the four pillars of our 
strategy, progress made against them during FY22, and our 
priorities for the year ahead. 

Develop our brand and increase our customer engagement
In line with our purpose, we are improving our customer proposition 
to help build deeper relationships with our existing customers, drive 
increased brand loyalty and inspire and attract new customers. 

In FY22 we:

•  clarified our purpose to better reflect what we do every day. 
Articulating why we exist has helped give all colleagues the 
same ‘north star’ and is ensuring that everything we do is 
focused on The Works customers; 

•  evolved our brand to create a new, more modern look and 
began to focus our communications on inspiring customers;

•  recruited a new Commercial Director to drive forward our customer 

proposition and further strengthen the Commercial function;

•  recruited a new Head of Brand to improve our brand marketing 
and customer communications, engagement and loyalty; and
•  made significant progress in improving our offer by taking a more 
strategic and customer-focused approach to range selection. 
Our great value proposition is already well recognised and 
as a result of the action we have taken this year we are now 
becoming customers’ go-to destination for reading, learning, 
creativity and play. We have achieved this by: 

•  overhauling our book strategy, stocking many more front-list 
titles such as David Walliams’ Gangsta Granny Strikes Again 
and Richard Osman’s The Man Who Died Twice. This is helping 
to increase our market share in the book category, improve 
our credibility as a bookseller and also drive sales of, great 
value, back-list titles which can still represent significant 
sales opportunities; 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

09

 
 
 
Chief Executive’s review continued

Develop our brand and increase our customer 
engagement continued

•  capitalising on the BookTok trend. Our flexible business model 
and strengthened relationships with publishers enable us to 
respond to trending books highlighted on TikTok and provide 
customers with the most in-demand books at great value; 

• 

increasing our ranges of popular branded products in our 
Kids Zone, such as Peppa Pig, Paw Patrol and Cocomelon, 
and board games including Scrabble, Articulate and Elf Monopoly.

In FY23 we will focus on:

•  developing our marketing strategy, deploying our evolved 

brand and refreshed look to inspire and engage with customers 
more effectively;

•  ensuring our products and ranges align with our purpose - to 
inspire reading, learning, creativity and play – making lives 
more fulfilled;

•  further developing our product offering, including extending our 
range of Children’s books (including front-list authors such as 
Julia Donaldson being introduced) and refreshing our own-brand 
Art, Craft and Stationery ranges;

•  using data and insight more effectively so that we develop 

a better understanding of our customers and their 
preferences; and

•  relaunching our Together loyalty programme, which has enormous 
untapped potential, given the relatively low levels of penetration 
of the scheme (c13% of transactions in FY22).

Enhance our online proposition
We strive to become customers’ go-to destination for reading, 
learning, creativity and play. We believe that our online channel 
will be an important part of achieving this ambition given the role 
it can play in providing inspiring content and convenient shopping. 
We invested in a new web platform in July 2020 which provided the 
foundation for us to subsequently invest significantly in our online 
fulfilment capacity and in shortening delivery times. Our online 
capability is now more efficient and better able to meet increasing 
customer demand.

In FY22 we:

• 

improved our fulfilment capacity and delivery capabilities for 
increasingly ‘time poor’ customers, who seek greater product 
availability and faster delivery times. We extended our next day 
delivery cut-off from 8pm to 11pm and reduced our standard 
delivery window from three to five days to a guaranteed three days; 

•  further enhanced our complementary online ranges, focusing 
particularly on expanding online ranges of larger items in our 
Out2Play range, which performed well during the ‘summer of 
staycations’ in 2021, as well as offering a greater selection of 
front-list books, branded toys and games;

•  started to optimise our new platform. For example, we have 
improved the navigation across key product and category 
pages to help customers find product matches and introduced 
browse attributes to reduce clicks required to purchase; and
•  recruited a Head of Digital Marketing to develop and implement 
campaigns across new channels, improve efficiency, help attract 
more people to our website and improve our CRM.

In FY23 we will focus on:

•  further enhancing the online customer experience, including 

undertaking a usability study to better understand the customer 
journey and key friction points. Alongside the outputs of this 
review we will improve the merchandising of products on the 
site and navigation through the site, supported by better 
analytics and the introduction of new tooling, including multi-
variate testing;

• 

launching more targeted online range extensions, building on 
improvements made in our front-list book, branded toys and 
games offers in store;

10

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

• 

Introducing Parcelshop as an alternative delivery option, adding 
c11,000 additional pick-up points, improving convenience for our 
customers;

•  Engaging and retaining more customers through our digital 

marketing, including building a team to strengthen our 
in-house capabilities; and

• 

Improving the customer experience between stores and online 
by making it possible for customers to order from the website 
when shopping in store and performing an end-to-end review 
of our click and collect journey. 

Optimise our store estate
We already have a strong footprint across the UK and Ireland, 
with stores conveniently located on high streets, in retail parks, 
and concessions within garden centres. The broad appeal of 
our proposition and low-cost model of our stores, which tend to 
be smaller than those of our competitors, allows us to operate in 
such locations which often do not suit more specialist retailers. 
As a result, in these locations, there is often very little direct high 
street competition. 

Our main priority is to optimise our stores to create an environment 
that inspires our customers, reflects the communities we serve and 
encourages more shoppers to consider The Works as their primary 
destination for the products we offer. 

In FY22 we:

•  further improved the quality of the store estate, opening five new 
stores, closing seven and relocating six. Our opening in Bluewater, 
one of the UK’s most high-profile shopping centres, was a 
particular highlight. As of 1 May 2022 we traded from 525 stores;
•  undertook 16 store refits as part of our strategy to refresh the 
store estate and bring all stores up to an ‘ideal’ standard 
over the next three years. These refits will improve customer 
experience by modernising the store shopping environment and 
improving the store layout, whilst also making the stores easier 
to run operationally; and

•  enhanced the in-store experience through better space 
planning, ranging and merchandising. We also improved 
customer experience and made our stores easier to shop, for 
example through better navigation and ensuring that all stock 
is at an easily accessible height.

In FY23 we will focus on:

•  continuing to grow our brand awareness with selective new store 
openings, focused on the top 100 locations that we are not yet 
represented in;

•  optimising our existing stores through relocations and refits, 

with 40 stores expected to benefit from this activity;
•  further improving our use of space in store to enhance 
the customer experience and drive improved sales 
densities, supported by the introduction of new space and 
merchandising software;

• 

increasing our focus on offering excellent customer service in-
store, through improved training and continuing to simplify the 
way we operate our stores to reduce other tasks.

Drive operational improvements
Improving our ways of working to become a more productive and 
modern retailer is a core part of our ‘better, not just bigger’ strategy. 
We want to ensure we operate efficiently and in a cost-effective 
way, as well as providing better product choice and availability for 
our customers. The progress we have made means that ‘behind the 
scenes’ we are already operating more effectively, which we believe 
will help to generate more sustainable returns in the future. 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

In FY22 we: 

• 

invested in our supply chain team and systems, making 
improvements in our end-to-end stock management processes, 
including successfully piloting a new stock allocation system that 
will significantly improve on-shelf availability and drive improved 
stock turn;

•  renewed our e-commerce logistics contract with iForce. The 
renewed contract includes additional investment to fund the 
introduction of automated picking robots and an automated 
packing machine. This is expected to drive productivity, help 
to offset the National Living Wage cost headwind in our online 
fulfilment operation, whilst also reducing our waste packaging;

• 

launched a trial to pick delivery orders directly from 29 
stores, which was subsequently expanded to cover 60 stores, 
significantly reducing the lead time from picking to delivery 
and helping to improve on-shelf availability. This will be rolled 
out to more stores in FY23 although most stores will continue to 
receive deliveries via a third party network;

•  established a Profit Protection function with an initial focus on 

reducing store stock loss (e.g. through identifying and reducing 
high levels of theft);

•  selected a new electronic point of sale (EPOS) solution for 

stores and began development of this new system ahead of 
deployment later in FY23. This system replaces the outdated 
system and provides a platform for introducing additional 
functionality, for example self-service checkout and ordering 
from our website whilst in store; and

•  accelerated the implementation of our existing plans to 

strengthen IT security measures following the cyber-security 
incident in March 2022.

In FY23 we will focus on:

•  rolling out our new stock allocation system across our entire 

store estate; 

•  extending our scheme to pick delivery orders directly from more 

stores across the estate; 

•  deploying the new EPOS solution across the store estate, 
including the functionality to order online whilst in-store;
•  reducing store stock loss through the execution of our profit 
protection plans, including driving a colleague awareness 
programme, better utilising data to identify stores with high 
stock losses and targeting increased activity on these higher risk 
stores; and

•  adopting a continuous improvement approach in relation to all 

operational processes across the business.

Colleagues 
In a challenging and competitive retail environment, our colleagues 
are fundamental to the delivery of great customer service. Many 
retail businesses makes this claim, but we believe that The Works is 
unique and fortunate to have a team of colleagues who truly believe 
in our purpose and are passionate about the job they do. Attracting, 
developing, retaining, and engaging good people are key to our 
success and I was very pleased that we have maintained our 
position on the Best Big Companies to Work for National List, ranking 
13th place. 

During the year we have strengthened the leadership team 
through the creation of a number of new roles. Nina Findley, our new 
Commercial Director, joined the Operational Board in June 2021. 
Nina has over 20 years’ buying experience in highly relevant markets, 
having spent her early career with Woolworths and Superdrug and 
more recently holding a variety of senior roles at Homebase. During 
the period we also strengthened our senior leadership team with 
the appointment of new ‘Heads of’ in our Brand Marketing, Digital 
Marketing, Buying and Profit Protection functions. 

We remain focused on further enhancing the engagement and 
development of our colleagues with further exciting initiatives 
planned for FY23, including introducing a new Communication 
and Rewards platform (‘MyWorks’) and a new learning and 
development system (our ‘Can Do Academy’).

Strategy in action 
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Building brand loyalty
In the retail value sector our Together Rewards 
loyalty programme sets us apart. Currently over 
1 million active members receive five points for 
every pound they spend, which are converted 
into redeemable sales vouchers at one pence 
per point. Recent research has shown that 
programme members spend up to 33% more than 
non-members, visit more often and recognise 
and appreciate the benefits of the programme.

  Read more about our strategy 
on pages 16 and 17.

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG)
Having reviewed our approach last year and, as a first step, formed 
a new ESG steering group we are increasing our focus on ESG 
issues and defining our ESG commitments. Working to reduce our 
impact on the planet and supporting our people and communities 
is not only the right thing to do, it is a key issue for our stakeholders 
and will also ensure that we stay relevant as customer demand for 
more sustainable products continues to grow.

We are currently developing our sustainability strategy to ensure 
that it addresses environmental issues whilst supporting our 
growth. We are also engaged in a programme of work to ensure 
our compliance with the recommendations of the Task Force on 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures. 

The Works has always been a business that gives back and 
I am very proud of the fundraising efforts of our colleagues and 
grateful for the generosity of our customers. Our commercial and 
fundraising partnership with Cancer Research UK continues and 
last year we were delighted to enter into a nationwide partnership 
with MIND, SAMH and Inspire - three leading charities that do 
incredible work to support people’s mental health.

Outlook
Overall, we are pleased with the performance delivered in FY22. 
However, we are not immune from the current inflationary pressures, 
which have increased business costs and we anticipate may weigh 
on consumer spending levels over a much more sustained period 
than initially expected. In this environment, our value proposition 
is more relevant than ever, and we are confident that the Group 
will continue to make good strategic progress in the year ahead 
and will deliver growth in the medium term, albeit the underlying 
Adjusted EBITDA result for FY23 will be lower than in FY22.

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
23 September 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

11

 
 
 
Our business model

Our core strengths and competitive 
advantage create a compelling 
proposition capable of delivering 
long-term value for all stakeholders. 

Key inputs

Our proposition and how we create value

Colleagues
•  Approximately 3,800 colleagues who are key 

to the success of our business.

•  Loyal and dedicated.
•  Highly engaged.

Brand value
•  Own brands developed in house.
•  Clear purpose, focused on inspiring reading, 

learning, creativity and play.

Suppliers
•  Over 500 supplier relationships.
•  The UK, Europe and Asia.
•  Close collaboration.

Infrastructure
•  Store network.
•  Online store.
•  Centrally located Support and 

Distribution Centres.

• 

IT infrastructure – investing to ensure scale, 
efficiency and security.

  Read more about our 
colleagues on page 34.

Our competitive advantage
Value-led
Family friendly
Convenience
Loyalty
Multi-channel 
Inspiring

Design and innovate
• 

 Identify and bring desirable and  
on-trend products to the UK market.

• 

 Unique own-brand products developed  
by in-house design studio in conjunction 
with suppliers.

•  New product lines launched  

on a weekly basis.

•  Five clear product zones: Books; Arts 
& crafts; Stationery; Toys & games; 
and Seasonal.

15

own brands

10,000

new product lines  
introduced each year

Underpinned by our strategy

Focused on evolution and growth, making our business 
‘better, not just bigger’

Develop our brand 
and increase customer 
engagement

Enhance our online 
proposition

12

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Our proposition and how we create value

c.500

suppliers

157,000

sq ft warehousing and 
distribution facility

Source and distribute
• 

 Experienced buying team sources 
and curates product ranges, including 
popular brands to complement own-
brand offer.

•  Relationships with over 500 suppliers.
•  Work closely with suppliers to ensure 
product safety and quality control.
•  Warehousing and store distribution 

undertaken from 157,000 sq ft facility  
in Coleshill, Birmingham.

•  Online orders fulfilled by third party  

or picked in store.

•  Leading customer delivery proposition.

Sell to customers through convenient channels
•  525 stores across the UK and Ireland.
•  Website – 24/7 trading and exclusive  

and extended ranges.

 Marketplaces (e.g. Amazon, eBay).

• 
•  Click & collect – linking  

stores and online.

Underpinned by our strategy

525

stores

Together loyalty scheme 
increases customer 
engagement and provides 
valuable customer insights.

  Read more about 
our strategy 
on pages 16 and 17.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

The value we create

Our people

Employment for 

c.3,800 

colleagues 

13th Best Big Company to work for

Our customers
Offer affordable, accessible, good quality 
products to inspire reading, learning, 
creativity and play.

Our suppliers
Indirectly support employment across  
our extensive supplier network.

Our community

£200k  

fundraising in FY22 for Cancer Research UK, 
Mind, SAMH and Inspire, and many other 
local charities supported at store level

Our shareholders

£1.5m 

final dividend proposed for the year 
ended 1 May 2022

Optimise our store estate

Drive operational 
improvements

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

13

 
 
 
Our marketplace

We are uniquely positioned  
in the value retail sector.

Our purpose, which is centred on inspiring our customers to read, learn, create and play, 
sets us apart. We offer lower prices than the specialists and more choice and better 
customer service than the discounters.

e
c
i
r
p

l
l

u
f
/
m
u
m
e
r
P

i

l

e
u
a
v
/
t
n
u
o
c
s
i
D

Books

Crafts

Stationery

Toys

Generals/variety

Specialist

A number of market trends are affecting our business and shaping 
our business model and strategy including:

Evolving shopping habits
While the surge in online retail seen during the pandemic is now 
normalising, demand for convenient and enjoyable shopping 
experiences continues to grow. In response our strategy is focused 
on making the overall shopping experience as straightforward as 
possible for customers shopping online and in store. 

During the year we began optimising our new web platform to 
improve navigation and shopability and generally enhance the 
customer experience. We are also offering more targeted online 
range extensions (e.g. larger outdoor toys that are difficult to 
stock in our stores). We are also continuing to improve our in-
store experience by introducing better space planning, making 
our stores easier to shop (e.g. by reducing the number of fixtures 
and amount of stock on the shop floor) and enhancing our click 
& collect channel.

The shift to more localised shopping that emerged during the 
pandemic has continued and post-pandemic shopping in 
locations such as city centre and high street stores has recovered 
more strongly than expected. Our stores, which are located on 
the high street, and in shopping centres, retail parks and garden 
centres, are well positioned to benefit from this trend. They also 
have a noticeable presence and are often heavily involved in 
community activities including local charity fundraising.

Increased interest in hobbies and crafting activities 
During the pandemic many people took up new hobbies or 
revisited activities they had previously enjoyed. While demand for 
some of these products (e.g. jigsaws) has naturally fallen from the 
unusually high levels seen in the pandemic as consumers adapt 
to a more normalised post-COVID-19 environment, it remains 
well above pre-pandemic levels and by inspiring our customers 
and focusing on providing them with the products they love at 
an affordable price, we are confident we will retain our leading 
market position.

Spending trends 
In the current economic environment consumers are spending less 
and they are seeking out good value quality products. Our price 
proposition and overall offering positions us well and our strategy 
is focused on fulfilling our ambition to become customers’ go-to 
destination for inspiring, fun and affordable toys, books, stationery, 
arts and crafts.

Responsible consumption 
Consumers are becoming more aware of the environmental 
impact of the things they buy and are seeking out more sustainable 
options. While the extent to which consumers are willing to pay 
higher prices to reduce their environmental footprint is less clear, 
as a business we have a responsibility to reduce our environmental 
impact. Information about the steps we are taking to do this is 
included on pages 29 to 33.

14

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

 
Capitalising on 
market trends.

The changing dynamics in our market are creating 
growth opportunities. Our strategy ensures that 
we effectively capitalise on these opportunities. 

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Strategy in action  
Enhance our online proposition

Capitalising on significant online 
growth opportunities 
During COVID we saw a step-change in our 
online sales as customers discovered our site 
during lockdowns. Although the market has 
recently experienced a slowing in the rate of 
growth in online shopping, our sales remain well 
ahead of pre-COVID-19 levels. The Works online 
channel is not fully potentialised and therefore 
continues to represent an opportunity for growth; 
as a result we will continue to enhance our 
digital offering and drive improved customer 
experience. During the year we expanded our 
online product range to include paddling pools, 
helium canisters and die cutting machines, all 
of which, because of their size, are easier for 
customers to buy online rather than in store. 
We also invested to improve our click & collect 
service and increase our fulfilment capacity.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

15

 
 
 
Our strategy and progress

We are improving 
and developing the 
business to be better, 
not just bigger.

Our strategic pillars

Develop our brand 
and increase customer 
engagement 
Through our brand and customer offer 
we want to reach more customers and 
improve the external view of The Works.

Enhance our online 
proposition 
We want to increase awareness of 
our website and make it an inspiring 
destination for customers by improving 
our customer journey and making it 
easy to use, inspiring and engaging.

Optimise our store estate 
Our aim is to create a store environment 
that can inspire our customers and 
reflects the communities we serve.

Drive operational 
improvements 
We aspire to improve our ways of 
working to become a better and more 
modern retailer. We want to ensure 
we operate efficiently and in a cost 
effective way.

16

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Progress to date and priorities for FY23

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhance our online proposition

Progress
•  Clarified our purpose to better reflect what we do every day. 
•  Evolved our brand to create a new, more modern look and began 

to focus our communications on inspiring customers.
•  Recruited a new Commercial Director to drive forward 
our customer proposition and further strengthen the 
Commercial function.

•  Recruited a new Head of Brand to improve our brand marketing 

Progress
• 

Improved our fulfilment capacity and delivery capabilities. We 
extended our next day delivery cut-off from 8pm to 11pm and 
reduced our standard delivery window to a guaranteed three days. 

•  Further enhanced our complementary online ranges.
•  Recruited a Head of Digital Marketing to develop and implement 
campaigns across new channels, attract more people to our 
website and improve our CRM.

and customer communications, engagement and loyalty. 

•  Started to optimise our new platform. For example, we have 

•  Made significant progress in improving our offer by taking a more 
strategic and customer-focused approach to range selection.

improved the navigation across key product and category pages 
to help customers find product matches and introduced browse 
attributes to reduce clicks required to purchase.

Priorities for FY23
•  Developing our marketing strategy, deploying our evolved 

brand and refreshed look to inspire and engage with 
customers more effectively.

•  Ensuring our products and ranges align with our purpose – to inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play – making lives more fulfilled.

Priorities for FY23
•  Further enhancing the online customer experience.
•  Launching more targeted online range extensions.
• 
•  Engaging and retaining more customers through our 

Introducing ‘Parcelshop’ as an alternative delivery option.

•  Further developing our product offering, including extending 

digital marketing.

our range of Children’s books and refreshing our own-brand Art, 
Craft and Stationery ranges. 

• 

•  Relaunching our Together loyalty reward programme, which has 
enormous untapped potential, given the relatively low levels 
of penetration of the scheme (c13% of transactions in FY22).

Improving the customer experience between stores and online by 
making it possible for customers to order from the website when 
shopping in-store.

Link to KPIs

A

B

Link to Risks

1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10

5

11

6

12

Link to KPIs

A

B

Link to Risks

1

9

2

10

3

11

4

12

7

8

Optimise our store estate

Drive operational improvements

Progress
•  Further improved the quality of the store estate, opening five 

new stores, closing seven and relocating six. 

•  Undertook 16 store refits as part of our strategy to refresh the 
store estate and bring all stores up to an ‘ideal’ standard over 
the next three years. 

•  Enhanced the in-store experience through better space 

planning, ranging and merchandising. 

Priorities for FY23
•  Continuing to grow our brand awareness with selective new 

store openings.

•  Optimising our existing stores through relocations and refits.
•  Further improving our use of space in store to enhance the 
customer experience and drive improved sales densities.

• 

Increasing our focus on offering excellent customer service in-
store, through improved training and continuing to simplify the 
way we operate our stores to reduce other tasks.

Progress
• 

Invested in our supply chain team and systems, making 
improvements in our end-to-end stock management processes. 

•  Renewed our e-commerce logistics contract with iForce. 
•  Established a Profit Protection function.
•  Selected a new electronic point of sale (EPOS) solution for 
stores and began development of this new system ahead 
of deployment later in FY23. 

•  Accelerated the implementation of our existing plans to 

strengthen IT security measures following the cyber-security 
incident in March 2022.

Priorities for FY23
•  Rolling out our new stock allocation system across our entire 

store estate. 

•  Extending our scheme to deliver directly to stores.
•  Deploying the new EPOS solution across the store estate.
•  Adopting a continuous improvement approach in relation 

to all operational processes across the business.

•  Reducing store stock loss through the execution of our profit 

protection plans.

Link to KPIs

C

D

E

Link to Risks

Link to KPIs

Link to Risks

1

2

8

9

11

12

C

D

E

1

8

9

10

11

12

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

17

 
 
 
How we measure performance

We use five KPIs to monitor  
the Group’s performance  
and our strategic progress.

These KPIs, together with our performance against them, are detailed below. All of the non-GAAP 
financial measures detailed can be calculated from the GAAP measures included in the financial 
statements, as outlined in the notes to the financial statements. Commentary on these KPIs is 
included in the Financial review.

A  Revenue growth 

B  Like-for-like sales growth

C  Adjusted profit/(loss) before tax 

46.5%

FY22

FY21

FY20

10.5%

£10.1m

£180.7m

£264.6m

FY22

FY21

+10.5%

FY22

£10.1m

Stores +6.0%

 Online +120.9%

FY21

(£3.6m)

£225m

FY20

+0.7%

FY20

£2.4m

Definition
The percentage year-on-year change in Group 
total sales.

D  Pre-IFRS 16 adjusted EBITDA 

£16.6m

FY22

FY21

£4.3m

£16.6m

FY20

£10.8m

Definition
Represents profit for the period before IFRS 16, 
net finance costs, taxation, depreciation and 
amortisation, loss on disposals of property, 
plant and equipment and Adjusting items. 
Adjusting items are gains or losses incurred in 
a period which are not expected to be recurring.

Definition
Like-for-like (LFL) sales are normally defined by 
the Group as the year-on-year growth in gross 
sales from stores which have been opened for 
a full 63 weeks (but excluding sales from stores 
closed for all or part of the relevant period or 
prior year comparable period), and from the 
Company’s online store, calculated on a calendar 
week basis. The FY22 LFL sales increase has 
been calculated with reference to the FY20 
comparative sales figures, or two-year LFL, 
because the extended periods of enforced store 
closures during FY21 prevent that period from 
forming the basis of meaningful comparisons. 
In FY21 the Group reported separate LFL figures 
for stores and online because the extended 
periods of enforced store closures during that 
year prevented the calculation of a meaningful 
combined store and online LFL sales figure. The 
FY21 figures are not stated on a basis that is 
directly comparable with the combined figures 
for prior years.

Definition
Represents profit for the period before taxation 
and Adjusting items. Adjusting items are gains 
or losses incurred in a period which are not 
expected to be recurring.

E  Adjusted diluted earnings per share

13.7p

FY22

FY21

(4.9p)

FY20

3.0p

13.7p

Definition
Calculated by dividing the Adjusted profit for the 
period attributable to ordinary shareholders by 
the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
in issue during the period (including dilutive share 
options). Adjusted profit is before the impact of 
Adjusting items, which are gains or losses incurred 
in a period which are not expected to be recurring. 

18

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Financial review

The FY22 accounting period relates to the 52 weeks ended 
1 May 2022 (also referred to as the period) and the comparative 
FY21 accounting period relates to the 53 weeks ended 2 May 2021.

As is described in the financial statements, the Group tracks a 
number of alternative performance measures (APMs), as it believes 
that these provide management and other stakeholders with 
additional helpful information. APMs used in this report include 
EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and like-for-like (“LFL”) sales.

The Group made a profit before tax of £10.2m (FY21: loss before 
tax of £2.8m). Adjusting items in FY22 were insignificant and the 
adjusted profit before tax was £10.1m (FY21: adjusted loss before 
tax of £3.6m). The Adjusting items related to net impairment reversals. 

The pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA was £16.6m (FY21: £4.3m). 

Overview
The Group delivered a strong performance in FY22, the first year 
under the leadership of the new management team that was 
relatively unaffected by COVID-19 disruption. FY22’s performance 
was characterised by the following factors:

•  Strong underlying sales throughout the year driven by solid 

progress against the Group’s strategic objectives beginning 
to leverage the inherent strength of the proposition.

•  Significant disruption to global freight operations in the autumn 
of 2021 resulted in much higher freight costs and a less than 
ideal flow of stock into the business, despite which, the Group 
achieved a record Christmas trading period.

•  A cyber security incident occurred at the end of March 2022. 
Operations in the last month of the financial year (and the 
beginning of FY23) were intentionally restricted to allow 
the deployment of strengthened system security measures 
alongside a carefully staged system recovery plan.

•  As the effects of COVID-19 reduced, the level of Government 
financial support reduced correspondingly, although the 
Group received £5.8m of business rates relief during FY22.
•  The effects of inflation began to have an impact, particularly 

in the form of higher freight costs and an increase in the 
National Living Wage. 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

EBITDA bridge between FY21 and FY22

FY21 Adjusted EBITDA (pre-IFRS 16)

Increased gross margin due to year-on-year 
increase in sales 

Lower gross product margin % (including impact of 
freight costs)

Government furlough relief received in FY211

Lower level of COVID-19 business rates relief 
received in FY22

COVID-19 business grants received in FY211

Resumption of normal operating costs and inflation 

FY22 Adjusted EBITDA (pre-IFRS 16)

£m

4.3 

51.9 

(6.6)

(15.4)

(8.3)

(1.8)

(7.5)

16.6 

1  Nil in FY22.

The strong financial performance resulted in another year of 
healthy cash generation, even allowing for favourable working 
capital timing differences which slightly flattered the comparison; 
the closing net cash balance was £16.3m, which compares well with 
the £0.8m balance at the end of FY21 (and, for reference, £7.1m of 
net debt at the end of FY20).

Despite the healthy cash position and our confidence in the 
inherent ability of the Group to generate strong positive cash flow, 
with the increasingly bleak tone of external predictions about the 
near-term economic outlook, we considered it prudent to buttress 
the Group’s financial position by refinancing the Group’s bank 
facilities. This was formally completed shortly after the year end 
and increases the size of the facility to £30.0m and extends the 
expiration date to the end of November 2025. 

As a further indication of the Board’s confidence in the prospects of 
The Works, dividends will be reinstated, assuming that shareholders 
at the AGM approve the Board’s recommendation of a 2.4 pence 
per share dividend in respect of FY22.

Due to rounding, numbers presented throughout this document 
may not add up precisely to the totals provided and percentages 
may not precisely reflect the absolute figures.

Revenue analysis
Total revenue increased by 46.5% to £264.6m (FY21: £180.7m). 

The enforced closure of stores during certain periods in FY21 
prevents meaningful comparisons of FY22’s sales performance 
with that year, so FY20 is used as a comparison period for 
trading performance. Total gross sales1 in FY22 increased by 12.7% 
compared to FY20 and two-year LFL sales2 increased by 10.5%, with 
positive growth continuing both online and in stores.

1 

 ‘Total sales’ referred to in this document includes VAT and is stated prior 
to deducting the cost of loyalty points which are adjusted out of the sales 
figure in the calculation of statutory revenue. The 52-week comparison 
period used for the LFL and total sales growth calculations uses a literal 
mapping of calendar weeks between FY22 and the corresponding 52 
weeks two/three years prior. Due to the inclusion of a 53rd week in FY21, 
the FY20/FY19 statutory accounting periods are one week offset from the 
52-week period used in the LFL and total sales comparisons. 

2   The LFL sales increase has been calculated with reference to the FY20 
comparative sales figures, or two-year LFL, because the extended 
periods of enforced store closures during FY21 prevent that period from 
forming the basis of meaningful comparisons. For the last five weeks of 
the period, the LFL percentages are calculated using the corresponding 
weeks in FY19, because the equivalent weeks during FY20 were also 
affected by the first period of enforced store closures. Similar comparison 
periods are also used for the total sales growth figures quoted.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

19

 
 
 
Financial review continued

Strategy in action  
Optimise our store estate

Enhancing the customer experience
We have continued to optimise our store estate. 
During the year we opened five new stores, 
including a store in Bluewater, one of the UK’s most 
high-profile shopping centres. We also closed 
seven stores and relocated six others. To improve 
our instore customer experience and drive higher 
sales, we have also refitted 16 stores.

Photo: Our Bluewater store which opened in 
November 2021.

Revenue analysis continued

Two-year LFL sales growth

Q1

Q2

H1

Q3

Q4

H2

Full year

Q1 highlights

Stores

5.7%

8.6%

7.3%

(0.3%)

3.2%

0.9%

3.7%

Online

96.8%

71.0%

80.6%

70.0%

42.5%

62.1%

69.7%

The Omicron COVID-19 variant may have reduced sales from 
consumers who were being more cautious about going out.
•  The January sale event was smaller than planned because 
terminal stock levels were low and we had not bought stock 
specifically for the sale period.

Q4 highlights

•  Developments to the product proposition, with front-list books 
and branded toys and games being highlights, sold well as 
we emerged from the January sale.

•  A cyber security incident at the end of March caused limited 
immediate/direct interruption to trading, but the cautious 
approach taken to the recovery affected sales in April (and into 
the beginning of FY23).

The table below shows the reconciliation of LFL sales used for year-
on-year comparisons, with statutory revenue. 

Total LFL sales 
for period

Sales from new/
closed stores

Total gross sales

VAT

Loyalty points 
redeemed

Revenue (per 
statutory accounts)

FY22
£m

FY21
£m

Variance
£m

Variance
£%

261.1

191.0

70.1

36.7 

37.3 

298.4

(33.5)

15.2 

206.2

(24.3)

22.0 

92.1

(9.2)

145.2 

44.7 

38.0 

(0.3)

(1.2)

0.9 

(77.0) 

264.6

180.7

83.8

46.4 

The number of stores trading reduced by two during the period, 
from 527 to 525. Despite this small change in the net number of 
stores at the year end, the sales from new/closed stores in the 
previous table shows a significant increase compared with the prior 
year, due to the relative timing of store openings/closures as well 
as the effect of the periods of enforced store closures in FY21. The 
one-year LFL percentage growth is relatively low by comparison, 
because a significant one-year LFL decline in online sales partially 
offset a high store LFL (also due to the periods of closure in FY21). 

Most of the capital cost of opening the new stores continued 
to be funded via capital contributions from landlords, reducing 
the impact on the Group’s cash flow. The new stores are trading 
successfully with sales levels above their financial appraisal targets. 

Total

13.4%

15.5%

14.5%

7.9%

6.8%

7.5%

10.5%

•  Pent-up demand following the recent re-opening of stores (in 

April 2021) was supported by a sale which was larger than usual 
as it included stock we were unable to sell in January/February 
2021 when we would normally have held a post-Christmas sale.
•  During summer 2021, ‘fidget frenzy’ stock became very popular, 
at the end of Q1, which then combined with a strong back to 
school performance in August to create a positive start to Q2.

Q2 highlights

•  Sales during September and October were stronger than 

expected, likely to have been helped by Christmas demand 
beginning early. We hypothesise that customers sought to 
minimise risks of not being able to shop before Christmas and/or 
of stock being scarce due to widely reported issues with supplies 
due to the global freight/supply chain challenges.

Q3 highlights

•  Record Christmas despite the overall stock mix and its 

distribution to stores not being as well executed as we had 
planned due to the supply chain disruption, for example, 
Christmas accessories did not arrive until early in December. 

20

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Store numbers

Opening store numbers

Stores at the beginning of the period

Closed in the period

Relocated (excluded from opened/
closed above, NIL net effect on store 
numbers)

Stores at the end of the period

FY22

527

5

(7)

6

525

FY21

534

4

(11)

2

527

The cost of loyalty points redeemed during the year increased 
as expected, in line with the sales increase, but the reported cost 
reduced due to the write back of points previously issued and 
accounted for which have subsequently expired, and can no longer 
be redeemed.

We have noted that books sold well during FY22, increasing their 
participation of total sales. As they are zero rated for VAT, this 
benefited the effective VAT rate which was 11.2% compared with 
11.8% in FY21.

 
I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Store payroll

43.6 

16.5 

37.7 

20.8 

5.9 

15.7 

43.7 

16.5 

36.7 

20.3 

7.0 

19.1 

Distribution costs

FY22

% of
£m revenue

264.6 

107.7 

FY21
(Restated1)

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
£%
£m

180.7 

84.0 

46.5 

69.0 

38.7 

56.1 

157.0 

59.3 

111.7 

61.8 

45.3 

40.5 

Other operating income/expense
The other operating expense was £0.1m (FY21: other operating 
income of £17.1m). In FY21 the income related to the Government 
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme and the COVID-19 Retail, 
Hospitality and Leisure Grant Fund (the COVID-19 rates relief 
received is netted off rates costs within statutory cost of sales, 
as described in the previous section).

FY22

FY21

Other operating
income

% of
£m  revenue

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
%
£m

Gross profit

Revenue

Less: cost of 
goods sold 

Product gross 
margin

Other costs 
included in 
statutory cost 
of sales

Store property 
and establishment 
costs

Store PoS & 
transaction fees

Store 
depreciation

Online variable 
costs 

IFRS 16 impact 

Adjusting items

Total non-product 
related cost of 
sales

Gross profit per 
financial 
statements

2.1 

0.8 

1.4 

0.8 

0.7 

47.7 

5.0 

1.9 

5.2 

2.9 

(0.2)

(4.0)

18.7 

(4.7)

—

7.1 

(1.8)

—

24.5 

13.6 

(4.2)

(1.0)

(2.3)

(0.5)

(5.8)

(0.5)

(23.8)

11.1 

0.9 

(97.0)

108.4 

41.0 

100.4 

55.6 

8.0 

8.0

48.5 

18.3 

11.3 

6.3 

37.2  328.8 

1  See Note 7 of the financial statements.

The product gross margin decreased by 250bps to 59.3% 
(FY21: 61.8%). 

•  The gross margin was affected by much higher freight costs 

than normal, particularly in H2 FY22 (these have remained high 
into FY23 but we expect them to abate in FY24, offsetting the 
adverse effect of a weaker pound).

•  The FY21 comparative included unusually low discounting, particularly 

online, when the stores were closed due to restrictions. 

•  The product mix included a greater proportion of front-list books 
and branded games and toys, which sell at a lower percentage 
margin, although contribute positively to the cash margin.

Store payroll costs increased due to the National Living Wage 
increase, which was partially mitigated by operational efficiencies 
and reduced tasking in the stores. Also, in FY21, when colleagues 
were furloughed, only 80 % of the normal wage rate was paid. 

Store property and establishment costs increased due to a year-
on-year reduction in the value of COVID-19 business rates relief 
received (£5.8m was received in FY22) and higher energy costs, 
which were partially offset by further rent savings (energy costs 
have also increased significantly in FY23, although this is factored 
into our forecast).

The increase in store point of sale (PoS) and transaction fees, 
which are volume related costs, was broadly in line with the 
increase in sales.

Although on a two year LFL basis, online sales grew by 69.7%, on 
a one year LFL basis, compared to the exceptionally high sales 
levels in FY21 when stores were closed, online sales declined, 
with a corresponding decrease in volume related costs including 
marketing and fulfilment costs.

Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme 
grants

COVID-19 retail 
business grant

(0.1)

—

(0.1)

—

—

—

15.3

8.5

(15.4)

(100.7)

1.8

1.0

(1.8)

(100.0)

17.1 

9.4 

(17.2)

(100.7)

FY22

% of
£m  revenue

FY21
(Restated1)

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
%
£m

 9.0 

 0.1 

 —

3.4

—

—

 6.4 

 0.1 

—

3.5

0.1

—

2.7

42.5

— (16.0)

— (91.0)

9.1 

3.4 

6.4 

3.6 

2.7 

41.8 

Adjusted 
distribution costs

Depreciation

IFRS 16 impact 

Distribution costs 
per statutory 
accounts

1  See Note 7 of the financial statements. 

Retail distribution costs were higher during the period as the 
stores were trading throughout, in contrast to the prior year, and 
therefore volume driven labour and pallet delivery costs increased. 
In addition, the increase in the National Living Wage rate increased 
staff costs although some of the inflationary increase was 
mitigated by operating/efficiency improvements.

Administration costs

FY22

% of
£m  revenue

FY21
(Restated1)

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
%
£m

Pre-IFRS 16, 
Adjusted 
administration 
costs 

Depreciation

23.2 

1.2 

8.8 

0.5 

IFRS 16 impact 

 (0.4)

(0.1)

Adjusting items

—

—

 17.8 

 1.7 

(0.4)

0.2 

9.9 

0.9 

(0.2)

0.1 

5.4 

30.1

(0.5)

(28.2)

0.0 

(6.9)

(0.2)

(100.0)

Administration 
costs per 
statutory 
accounts

24.0 

9.1 

19.3 

10.7 

4.7 

24.5 

1  See Note 7 of the financial statements. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

21

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial review continued

Administration costs continued
The increase in administrative costs reflects investments made to 
strengthen the senior leadership team and key functions including 
supply chain and IT, and an accrual for FY22 bonus (there was no 
bonus cost in respect of FY21). There were also higher software 
maintenance/licence costs and the cost of resuming normal activities 
such as travel which were suppressed for periods during FY21.

Earnings per share
The basic EPS for the year was 14.0 pence (FY21: loss per share of 
3.7 pence) and the diluted EPS was 13.7 pence (FY21: diluted loss per 
share of 3.7 pence). 

Capital expenditure

IFRS 16 Leases
The Group continues to include information to enable stakeholders 
to see the effect of IFRS 16. The net impact of IFRS 16 was to increase 
the profit before tax in FY22 by £0.9m (FY21: £0.7m increase).

New stores and 
relocations

Store refits and 
maintenance

FY22

£m

9.3

10.2

0.9

FY21
(Restated1)
£m

(3.5)

(2.8)

0.7

IT hardware and software

Online development 
expenditure

Other

Total capital expenditure 

FY22
£m

 0.5 

0.9 

1.2 

0.2 

0.2 

3.0 

FY21
£m

Variance
£m

0.6 

0.7 

0.6 

0.5 

0.1 

2.4 

(0.1) 

0.2 

0.6 

(0.3) 

0.1 

0.6 

Profit/(loss) before tax before IFRS 16 

Profit/(loss) before tax post IFRS 16

Net impact on profit/(loss)

1  See Note 5 of the financial statements. 

Net financing expense
Net financing costs in the period were £5.2m (FY21: £5.5m), mostly 
relating to notional IFRS 16 lease interest. 

Actual interest payable was £0.7m, in relation to the Group’s bank 
facilities (FY21: £0.6m), and comprised facility availability charges 
and the amortisation of the initial costs of establishing the bank 
facility in August 2020 (the cost of the new facility will be amortised 
from FY23).

Bank interest payable (including 
non-utilisation costs)

Other interest payable (amortisation 
of facility set-up costs)

IFRS 16 notional interest on lease 
liabilities

Total finance expense

Tax

Current tax expense

Deferred tax credit

Total tax expense/(credit)

FY22
£m

0.4 

0.3 

4.5 

5.2 

FY22
£m

2.1 

(0.6)

1.4 

FY21
£m

0.3 

0.3 

4.9 

5.5 

FY21
£m

0.0 

(0.5)

(0.5)

The UK corporation tax rate for FY22 and FY21 was 19.0%. The UK 
corporation rate is due to increase from 19% to 25% on 1 April 2023, 
although we understand that this decision is now under review.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised based on the 
corporation tax rate applicable when they are anticipated to unwind. 
Therefore, the deferred tax assets and liabilities have been largely 
recognised at a rate of 25.0% (FY21: 19.0%), which creates a deferred 
tax credit that reduced the Group’s effective tax rate for FY22.

The total tax expense was £1.4m (FY21: credit of £0.5m). The 
effective tax rate was 14.1% (FY21: 17.9% on the loss before tax).

22

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Capital expenditure in the period was £3.0m (FY21: £2.4m) 
and comprised: 

•  the cost of opening five new stores and relocating six others 
to new sites. Most of the new store capex was funded by 
landlord contributions;

•  store maintenance including 16 refits; 
• 

increased IT development expenditure, reflecting the 
implementation of the Group’s strategy to improve its systems.

FY23 capex is expected to be approximately £7.5m.

Inventory
Stock levels were £29.4m at the end of FY22 (FY20: 29.1m), 
an increase of 1.0%. 

Provisions as % of 
gross stock

FY22
£m

FY21
£m

Variance Variance
%

£m

FY22
%

FY21
%

29.8 

31.0 

(1.2)

(3.9%)

(1.9)

(2.6)

0.7  (26.9%)

6.4% 

8.4% 

(1.3)

(3.2)

(1.8)

(4.4)

0.5  (27.8%)

4.4% 

5.8% 

1.2  (27.3%) 10.7%  14.2% 

Gross stock

Shrinkage 
provision

Obsolescence 
provision

Total provisions

Net stock on hand 26.6 

26.7 

Stock in transit

2.8 

2.5 

0.1 

0.4% 

0.3  13.9% 

Stock per balance 
sheet

29.4 

29.1 

0.3 

1.0% 

Stock levels at the end of FY22 were as planned and were not 
affected as they had been at the previous two year ends by issues 
related to COVID-19. The level of stock provisions has reduced 
significantly since the end of FY21:

•  The provision for unrecognised stock loss (shrinkage) is lower 
as, unlike in FY21, it was possible to complete store stock 
counts during the year which enabled stock adjustments to 
be made during the year to recognise losses, requiring a lower 
unrecognised loss provision at the end of the year.

•  The obsolescence provision is lower because a significant 

quantity of terminal stock was sold or written off during FY22 
which resulted in a lower level stock requiring a provision at the 
end of the year.

 
I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Bank facilities and financial position
The financial position of the Group continued to improve during 
the period, at the end of which, there were no borrowings. 

At the period end, the Group held net cash (excluding lease 
liabilities) of £16.3m (FY21: £0.8m) resulting in headroom of 
approximately £35.0m within its previous bank facility limit. 

The Group’s bank facilities were renewed shortly after the period 
end and now comprise a larger revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) of 
£30.0m which expires on 30 November 2025. The facility includes 
standard financial covenants in relation to leverage and fixed 
charge cover. 

Dividend
In light of the strong performance in FY22, the robust balance 
sheet, and its confidence in the future prospects of the business 
despite the short-term concerns as regards the external economic 
environment, the Board will be recommending a 2.4 pence per 
share dividend in respect of FY22, which will be subject to shareholder 
approval at our AGM on 27 October 2022. If approved by shareholders, 
the dividend will be paid on 24 November 2022 to shareholders on 
the register on the record date of 4 November 2022. 

We hope to maintain the cadence of twice yearly dividend 
payments thereafter; whilst the consumer market remains 
especially volatile, we will review future payment levels based on 
conditions at the time, but intend to resume a progressive dividend 
policy in due course once conditions stabilise.

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer
23 September 2022

Cash flow
The table shows a summarised non-IFRS 16 presentation cash flow; 
the financial statements include a statutory consolidated cash flow 
statement. The net cash inflow for the year was £15.5m (FY21: £7.9m). 

Cash flow pre-working 
capital

Net movement in working 
capital

Capex

Tax paid

Interest and financing 
costs

Dividends

Cash flow before loan 
movements

Drawdown/(repayment) 
of CLBILS loan

Drawdown/(repayment) 
of RCF

Exchange rate 
movements

Net increase in cash and 
cash equivalents

Opening net cash 
balance excluding IAS 17 
leases

Closing net cash balance 
excluding IAS 17 leases

FY22
£m

19.3 

7.4

(3.0) 

(0.2) 

(0.3) 

— 

23.2 

(7.5) 

— 

(0.1) 

15.5 

0.8 

16.3 

FY21
£m

14.8 

(1.2)

(2.4) 

— 

(0.9) 

— 

10.3 

7.5 

Variance
£m

4.5 

8.6

(0.6) 

(0.2) 

0.6 

— 

12.9 

(15.0) 

(10.0) 

10.0 

(0.3) 

7.7 

0.2 

7.9 

(7.1) 

0.8 

•  The cash flow pre working capital shown in the table deducts 

IFRS 16 notional lease and interest payments from the statutory 
operating cash flow before changes in working capital, and adds 
back the £7.5m CLBILS loan repayment.

•  The tax paid in FY22 was lower than we would expect to 

pay in relation to normal years, due to previous low levels of 
taxable profits. 

•  During the year the Group repaid its £7.5m CLBILS term loan

The year end cash balance was higher than expected as it 
included favourable working capital timing differences, most of 
which have unwound in FY23. The cash position provides the Group 
with a high degree of available liquidity and comfortably allows 
for the payment of the final dividend the Board will recommend 
at the AGM.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

23

 
 
 
 
Our stakeholders

To succeed it is essential 
that we engage with 
our stakeholders.

Our stakeholders and how 
we engage with them are 
detailed on this and the 
adjacent page. To succeed 
it is essential that we 
understand what matters 
to them and consider this 
information as part of our 
decision-making process.

Examples of how stakeholder 
issues and the matters set 
out in Section 172(1) (a) to 
(f) of the Companies Act 
were considered in the 
Board’s decision making 
during the year are set out 
over the page.

Our suppliers

Communities 

Shareholders

Impacted by our activities.

Seek returns on their investment.

•  Employment opportunities.

•  Positive social impact.

•  Sustainable operations.

•  Competent execution of strategy.

•  Good governance.

•  Sustainable and growing returns.

•  Regular clear and understandable 

communications and transparency.

•  ESG performance.

Our people

Enable us to fulfil our purpose 
and deliver our strategy.

What matters to them

Our customers

Buy our products.

•  Safe, healthy and good working environment.
•  Fair rewards.
•  Enjoyable work.
•  Being part of a company that has a clear 

purpose and values that resonate.

•  Wide variety of great products.
•  Good value and quality.
•  Customer experience.
•  Reliable and convenient service.

Support our sourcing and 

distribution activities.

•  Long-term relationships.

•  Fair treatment.

•  Payment in accordance with 

contractual terms.

•  Responsible business practices.

•  Engagement and support.
•  Development opportunities.

Group-wide engagement

• 

Interaction encouraged in many ways 
including regular briefings, videos and 
The Works Facebook Family group.

•  Annual engagement survey to give us an 

independent view of what we are doing well 
and where we must improve.

•  Local-level engagement including team 

video calls and briefings.

Board-level engagement

•  Active social media engagement.
• 
‘Together’ loyalty programme.
•  Customer surveys.
•  Day-to-day interactions between 
customers and store colleagues.

•  Regular commercial dialogue.

• 

‘Giving Something Back’ programme 

•  Easily accessible investor information, 

•  When it is safe to do so, in-person 

(see page 37).

meetings with suppliers, factory visits 

•  Local community initiatives (see page 37).

including announcements, results 

and presentations, is available on the 

Company’s website.

and attendance at trade fairs. 

•  Our quality assurance team works 

closely with suppliers to ensure product 

safety and quality control. 

•  Regular Director store visits and meetings with 
senior management and store colleagues.
•  Presentation to the Board by the People 

Director covering people and talent strategy 
and its linkage to the Group’s purpose, culture 
and strategy.

•  Regular Director store visits including 
direct engagement with customers.
•  Commercial Director, Retail Director, 
Digital Director, and Head of Brand 
regularly provide customer feedback 
to the Board.

•  People Director regularly provides updates 

at Board, and Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee meetings.

Outcomes

•  Commercial Director provides regular 

•  Board oversees development of ESG 

•  Annual General Meeting.

updates to the Board on supplier 

strategy and monitors progress.

matters and relationships. 

•  ESG steering group regularly updates 

•  The Chair and Committee Chairs are 

available to shareholders to discuss 

•  The Board and Audit Committee review 

the Board on relevant ESG matters.

specific matters as they arise.

the Group’s payment practices. 

•  Board in-depth review of the Group’s 

•  CEO and CFO participate in meetings 

community engagement activities.

and calls with investors and analysts 

and provide regular Board updates 

following such engagement.

•  Awarded two-star rating in the 2021 Best 

Companies survey and ranked as 13th Best 
Big Company to work for (see page 34).

• 

In recognition of hard work during the 
pandemic and to say thank you, bonuses 
were paid to all colleagues.

•  Keeping our understanding of what 
customers want from us up to date.
•  Create products that meet customers 

wants and needs.

•  Continued growth in LFL sales.
• 
Increased loyalty membership.

•  Board review of payment practices 

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given growing 

•  Reinstatement of dividend in FY22, 

ensures that suppliers are treated fairly.

importance to stakeholders.

•  Promote fair and ethical business 

•  Over £125k raised in partnership with CRUK 

practices through supply chain 

management (see page 38).

during FY22 (see page 37).

•  Over £75k raised in partnership with Mind/

•  Many long-term supplier relationships.

SAMH/Inspire during FY22 (see page 37).

subject to shareholder approval, and 

progressive dividend policy.

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given 

growing importance to stakeholders.

• 

Increasing collaboration with key 

publishers.

24

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

 Read more on page 34.

 Read more on pages 14 and 15.

 Read more on page 38.

 Read more on pages 34 to 37.

 Read more on page 3.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Our suppliers

Communities 

Shareholders

Support our sourcing and 
distribution activities.

•  Long-term relationships.
•  Fair treatment.
•  Payment in accordance with 

contractual terms.

•  Responsible business practices.

•  Regular commercial dialogue.
•  When it is safe to do so, in-person 

meetings with suppliers, factory visits 
and attendance at trade fairs. 
•  Our quality assurance team works 

closely with suppliers to ensure product 
safety and quality control. 

Impacted by our activities.

Seek returns on their investment.

•  Employment opportunities.
•  Positive social impact.
•  Sustainable operations.

•  Competent execution of strategy.
•  Good governance.
•  Sustainable and growing returns.
•  Regular clear and understandable 
communications and transparency.

•  ESG performance.

• 

‘Giving Something Back’ programme 
(see page 37).

•  Local community initiatives (see page 37).

•  Easily accessible investor information, 
including announcements, results 
and presentations, is available on the 
Company’s website.

•  Regular Director store visits and meetings with 

•  Regular Director store visits including 

senior management and store colleagues.

direct engagement with customers.

•  Presentation to the Board by the People 

•  Commercial Director, Retail Director, 

Director covering people and talent strategy 

Digital Director, and Head of Brand 

and its linkage to the Group’s purpose, culture 

regularly provide customer feedback 

and strategy.

to the Board.

•  Commercial Director provides regular 
updates to the Board on supplier 
matters and relationships. 

•  The Board and Audit Committee review 

the Group’s payment practices. 

•  Board oversees development of ESG 

strategy and monitors progress.

•  ESG steering group regularly updates 
the Board on relevant ESG matters.
•  Board in-depth review of the Group’s 
community engagement activities.

•  Annual General Meeting.
•  The Chair and Committee Chairs are 
available to shareholders to discuss 
specific matters as they arise.

•  CEO and CFO participate in meetings 
and calls with investors and analysts 
and provide regular Board updates 
following such engagement.

•  Board review of payment practices 

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given growing 

•  Reinstatement of dividend in FY22, 

ensures that suppliers are treated fairly.

importance to stakeholders.

•  Promote fair and ethical business 
practices through supply chain 
management (see page 38).

•  Many long-term supplier relationships.
• 

Increasing collaboration with key 
publishers.

•  Over £125k raised in partnership with CRUK 

during FY22 (see page 37).

•  Over £75k raised in partnership with Mind/
SAMH/Inspire during FY22 (see page 37).

subject to shareholder approval, and 
progressive dividend policy.

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given 

growing importance to stakeholders.

 Read more on page 34.

 Read more on pages 14 and 15.

 Read more on page 38.

 Read more on pages 34 to 37.

 Read more on page 3.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

25

Our people

Enable us to fulfil our purpose 

and deliver our strategy.

What matters to them

Our customers

Buy our products.

•  Safe, healthy and good working environment.

•  Wide variety of great products.

•  Fair rewards.

•  Enjoyable work.

•  Good value and quality.

•  Customer experience.

•  Being part of a company that has a clear 

•  Reliable and convenient service.

purpose and values that resonate.

•  Engagement and support.

•  Development opportunities.

Group-wide engagement

including regular briefings, videos and 

The Works Facebook Family group.

•  Annual engagement survey to give us an 

independent view of what we are doing well 

and where we must improve.

•  Local-level engagement including team 

video calls and briefings.

Board-level engagement

• 

Interaction encouraged in many ways 

•  Active social media engagement.

• 

‘Together’ loyalty programme.

•  Customer surveys.

•  Day-to-day interactions between 

customers and store colleagues.

•  People Director regularly provides updates 

at Board, and Nomination and Remuneration 

Committee meetings.

Outcomes

•  Awarded two-star rating in the 2021 Best 

•  Keeping our understanding of what 

Companies survey and ranked as 13th Best 

customers want from us up to date.

Big Company to work for (see page 34).

•  Create products that meet customers 

• 

In recognition of hard work during the 

wants and needs.

pandemic and to say thank you, bonuses 

were paid to all colleagues.

•  Continued growth in LFL sales.

• 

Increased loyalty membership.

 
 
 
Section 172 statement

How the Directors have had regard 
to the matters set out in Section 
172(1)(a) to (f) of the Companies Act.

This disclosure forms the Directors’ statement under Section 414CZA 
of the Companies Act 2006. 

Both individually and collectively, the Directors believe that they 
have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of 
its members as a whole (having regard to the stakeholders and 
matters set out in Section 172(1)(a) to (f) of the Companies Act 2006) 
in all decisions taken by the Board during the 52-week period 
ended 1 May 2022 (FY22). 

Examples of principal decisions made by the Board, and the 
Board’s regard during its decision-making process for the Section 
172 matters described on this page, are detailed below.

Under Section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, a director of a 
company must act in the way he or she considers, in good faith, 
would be most likely to promote the success of the company for 
the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have regard 
(amongst other matters) to:

•  the likely consequence of any decision in the long term;
•  the interests of the company’s employees;
•  the need to foster the company’s business relationships with 

suppliers, customers and others;

•  the impact of the company’s operations on the community 

and the environment;

•  the desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for 

high standards of business conduct; and

•  the need to act fairly as between members of the company.

Decision

Stakeholder considerations

Branding  
and purpose 

In October 2021, the Board agreed to invest in a brand evolution programme including the development of 
a more articulate expression of the Group’s purpose and mission and development of new brand values. The 
brand programme was informed by extensive research facilitated by external consultants and takes account 
of feedback provided by customers, suppliers and colleagues. 

Investment in new 
iForce e-commerce 
logistics contract 

Reinstatement 
of dividend

Cyber-security 
incident response

Electronic Point 
of Sale (EPOS) 
replacement

In January 2022, the Board agreed to renew the Group’s e-commerce logistics contract with iForce following 
a competitive tender exercise. Key elements of the new contract included additional investment by the supplier 
to fund the introduction of automated picking robots and an automated packing machine. As part of the 
new contract’s approval process, the Board considered the operational efficiencies the new contract would 
deliver and the resulting long-term financial benefits. The Board also considered the positive impact of the new 
arrangements on iForce’s manpower requirements, particularly during peak periods, and the environmental 
benefits arising from reduced packaging. 

One of the measures taken to preserve cash during the pandemic was to suspend dividend payments in respect 
of FY20 and FY21. In May 2022 the Board considered the Group’s performance and outlook and concluded that 
it was appropriate to recommend a final year dividend of 2.4 pence per share in respect of FY22. As part of 
the decision-making process the Directors considered stakeholders’ interests over the medium and long-term, 
including the interests of the Group’s shareholders. The Board also considered the Group’s employees. In making 
this decision, given the uncertain external environment, the Board satisfied itself about the Group’s ability to 
continue to make investments to implement its strategy and generate value for all stakeholders, including 
customers and suppliers, over the medium and long term. 

The Board met several times at the end of March and beginning of April 2022 to consider the response to a 
cyber-security incident involving unauthorised access to the Group’s computer systems. The Board received 
reports from management on the steps taken to stop the attack and assess its impact on trading and the 
business’ operations. The Board considered the potential compromise to customer and colleague data arising 
from the attack and the ability of customers to continue to shop safely. It also considered the welfare of the IT 
and management teams during the intense period of activity following the incident to implement immediate 
measures to strengthen security. The Board endorsed a decision to install IT system upgrades through an 
accelerated programme designed to provide more secure protection of colleague and customer data in future.

In September 2022, the Board approved a project (including capital expenditure) to replace on a phased basis 
the existing EPOS solution. In making this decision, it was recognised that the existing system and hardware 
was not capable of supporting required capabilities in retail and multichannel offerings. Key considerations in 
approving the new system included: (a) the fact that back office functionality would be moved to the till, reducing 
the need for store staff to leave the shop floor; (b) improved customer experience (e.g. the ability to place online 
orders in store); and (c) the long-term benefits of a more modern system which could be further developed to 
meet the changing needs of a multi-channel retail business.

26

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Evolving our brand.

Our brand evolution programme reflects stakeholders’ 
feedback and supports our strategic objective to build 
deeper customer relationships and drive brand loyalty.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Strategy in action 
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Becoming the go-to place 
for reading, learning, 
creativity and play.
Our brand evolution programme supports our 
ambition to become one of the most loved 
retailers in the UK - the go-to place for reading, 
learning, creativity and play. By evolving our 
brand and enhancing of our offering we aim to 
reach more customers, increase their shopping 
frequency and, more generally, improve external 
perceptions of our brand.

  Read more about our strategy  
on pages 16 and 17.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

27

 
 
 
ESG review

Creating a sustainable economy and transitioning to 
net zero is the challenge of our times. The responsibility 
rests collectively with governments, businesses, and 
the general public. As a retail business we recognise 
our role in this effort, as well as our responsibility to 
be socially conscious and maintain high standards 
of governance.

Our approach
In June 2021 we launched our ESG steering group. Its role is to 
ensure we operate responsibly in line with our purpose and values, 
and to monitor our ESG agenda. It is chaired by our CEO and meets 
on a quarterly basis. 

While we are continuing to evolve our overall sustainability 
strategy, the ESG steering group has identified a number of core 
sustainability pillars (which are outlined below) and set up sub-
group committees to progress specific projects in these areas. 

To help develop our sustainability strategy and ensure we 
achieve full compliance with the recommendations of the Task 
Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), we have 
appointed a specialist ESG consultancy to work with us (see 
page 31). A number of activities are already underway, including 
the collection of data and insights to help us fully understand our 
impact on the environment. This information will help us develop 
a sustainability strategy that addresses stakeholder issues and 
supports the growth of our business. It will also enable us to 
establish targets against which we will monitor progress. 

Our sustainability pillars

Environment
•  Products and packaging
•  Waste recycling
•  Energy consumption

 Read more on pages 29 to 33.

Social
•  Our people
•  Health, safety and wellbeing
•  Diversity and inclusion
•  Giving something back

  Read more  
on pages 34 to 37.

Governance
•  Operating responsibly
•  Supply chain management

 Read more on page 38.

28

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Environment

Reducing our 
environmental impact.

Our objective is to reduce our impact on the environment, including 
energy consumption, material sourcing and product and packaging 
disposal. We are committed to year-on-year improvements in our 
operational energy efficiency.

Products and packaging
We are committed to reducing our usage of polybags and other 
single-use packaging and we are implementing a range of 
initiatives to reduce and/or replace these materials including: 

•  We have stopped buying single-use carrier bags. We now offer 
reusable, affordable bags made from 95% recycled materials 
and we will shortly be introducing cotton and jute options. This 
has reduced the amount of plastic we purchase annually by 
28 tonnes and removed 2.7m bags from the waste stream. 
•  We have moved our new Christmas Crafting range to 30% 
recycled polybags, and use FSC accredited sources for our 
cardboard packaging where possible. As we roll out our new 
branding, we will be extending this to our wider Craft range, 
thereby removing single-use plastic from these products. 

•  We are also reducing the size of our Christmas kits to make the 
packaging more appropriate to the contents and optimising 
space to increase efficiency during transportation. 

•  We are using cardboard packaging in more creative ways to 
reduce unnecessary packaging while still securing items in 
transit and presenting products attractively to customers. 
•  Our publishing partners are all committed to using responsibly 

managed timber for all paper. 

Waste recycling
We are committed to reducing the level of waste our business 
generates and to maximising the proportion that is recycled. Our 
colleagues share this commitment. Their feedback from our recent 
engagement survey (see page 34) highlighted demand for more 
in-store recycling facilities. 

Key elements of our waste reduction and recycling 
programme include:

•  We continue to educate our teams to maximise the level 

of waste that can be recycled and minimise the number of 
collections required to reduce the associated carbon footprint 
of waste collection and movement and to minimise store waste 
sent to landfill.

•  We operate recycling facilities at all store locations capable 

of recycling mixed papers, cardboard (which constitutes a very 
large proportion of store waste) and mixed plastics including 
HDPE, PET and PP. Our Support and Distribution Centres in 
Coleshill, Birmingham, also operate a recycling programme 
to ensure all mixed film plastics and cardboard materials are 
baled onsite and removed for recycling.

•  We are working on landing recycling schemes for helium balloons 

to minimise waste.

‘ReWorking’ our product offering
As far as possible we ‘reWork’ our product packaging 
to make it more environmentally friendly. For example we 
removed all plastic acetate lids across our Christmas card 
range. Based on the 800,000 Christmas cards we sold 
during FY22, this equates to eight tonnes of plastic. We 
have also made our 500 and 1,000 piece jigsaw boxes 
smaller and removed their shrink wrap.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

29

 
 
 
ESG review continued

Environment continued

Consumption (kWh) and greenhouse gas emissions 
(tCO2e) totals
The following figures show the consumption and associated 
emissions for this reporting year for our operations, with figures 
from the previous reporting period included for comparison.

Scope 1 consumption and emissions relate to direct combustion of 
natural gas, and fuels utilised for transportation operations, such 
as company vehicle fleets. 

Scope 2 consumption and emissions relate to indirect emissions 
relating to the consumption of purchased electricity in day-to-day 
business operations.

Scope 3 consumption and emissions relate to emissions resulting 
from sources not directly owned by us. These relate to grey fleet 
(business travel undertaken in employee-owned vehicles) only.

Totals
The total consumption (kWh) figures for reportable energy supplies 
are as follows. FY21 was an atypical year with stores closed for 
many weeks, as such emissions have increased in FY22.

Utility and scope

FY22
 consumption
 (kWh)

FY21 Restated
 consumption

 (kWh) 1 

Grid-supplied electricity (Scope 2)

13,513,022

8,883,385

Intensity metric
tCO2e/£m revenue 

2021/22 
intensity metric

Restated
2020/21 
intensity metric 1

11.75

13.24

1 

 As a result of a recalculation of FY21 energy and carbon figures, kWh 
and emissions for grid-supplied electricity and natural gas have been 
restated. The metric reported in FY21 was 28.2. 

Energy efficiency improvements
We are committed to year-on-year improvements in our 
operational energy efficiency. As such, a register of energy 
efficiency measures available to us has been compiled, with 
a view to implementing these measures in the next five years.

Measures ongoing and undertaken through FY22
We have undertaken a range of energy-saving initiatives including:

• 

installing LED lighting and energy efficient equipment in all new 
stores and retrofitting a number of stores with these technologies 
to help further reduce our in-store consumption;

•  regular electrical audits to ensure the equipment we use or 

inherit is energy efficient; and

•  educating our store colleagues about reducing energy consumption 

and wastage and the impact both have on the environment.

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1)

Transportation (Scope 1)

Transportation (Scope 3)

185,387

798,916

81,962

194,888

—

Measures prioritised for implementation in FY23
We are planning further efficiency improvements for our 
estate including:

Total

14,579,287

9,078,273

1 

 Utility specific kWh consumption values were not available for prior year 
reporting; therefore, only the total kWh consumption disclosed is included 
within this table. 

The total emission (tCO2e) figures for reportable energy supplies are 
as follows. 

Utility and Scope

Grid-supplied 
electricity (Scope 2)

FY22
 consumption
 (tCO2e) 

Restated
FY21
 consumption
 (tCO2e)1

FY21
 consumption
 (tCO2e)1

2,869.22

2,071.07

4,783.07

Natural gas (Scope 1)

33.96

35.83

44.21

Transportation 
(Scope 1)

Transportation 
(Scope 3)

Refrigerants2 (Scope 1)

185.25

270.43

270.43

19.01

—

—

14.56

—

14.56

Total

3,107.44

2,391.89

5,112.27

1 

 As a result of a recalculation of FY21 energy and carbon figures, kWh and 
emissions for grid-supplied electricity and natural gas have been restated. 

2  No fugitive emissions were recorded for FY22.

Intensity metric
An intensity metric of tCO2e per £m has been applied for our annual 
total emissions. The methodology of the intensity metric calculations 
is detailed below, and results of this analysis is as follows:

30

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

•  continuing to refit our existing estate with LED lighting and 

energy efficient technology;

•  reducing our environmental impact primarily through waste 

recycling and packaging and seeking to minimise energy use;

Reporting methodology
Scope 1, 2 and 3 consumption and CO2e emissions data has 
been calculated in line with the 2019 UK Government environmental 
reporting guidance. Emissions Factor Database 2021 version 1 has 
been used, utilising the published kWh gross calorific value (CV) and 
kgCO2e emissions factors relevant for reporting period 3 May 2021 to 
1 May 2022. 

All consumption data was complete for the reporting year, and 
as such no estimations were required.

Electricity and natural gas data has been restated for FY21. Transport 
and fugitive emissions data has not been restated due to a review of 
emission reporting methodology for continuity with FY22 reporting.

Intensity metrics have been calculated using total tCO2e figures 
and total turnover used for the performance indicator for FY22 
was £264.6m (FY21: £180.7m).

3,107.44

Total emissions

11.75

Emissions intensity

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

TCFD statement

We support the recommendations of the TCFD and are committed to 
providing information about climate-related risks and opportunities that 
are relevant to our business and to evolving our strategy and governance 
framework to take account of such risks and opportunities.

Overview
Our business activities cover the sourcing and sale of a wide 
range of books, toys, arts and crafts and stationery products. 
The environmental impact of these activities is explained on page 
30 and relate in the main to product packaging, waste recycling 
and energy consumption. While risks associated with these issues 
do not pose a significant threat to our business, we recognise 
the obligation we have to reduce our impact on the environment. 
We are also aware of growing consumer demand for sustainable 
products and the commercial risks and opportunities this is 
creating. In addition, currently, a substantial part of the Group’s 
profit is generated during the short Christmas peak sales period. 
Extreme weather events during this time could disrupt our flow of 
stock, deliveries to store and fulfilment of online orders. In response 
to these risks and opportunities we are evolving our sustainability 
strategy and embedding appropriate risk management processes 
across our operations.

TCFD compliance statement
Our TCFD compliance statement is set out below. In line with 
the requirements of LR 9.8.6(8)R, we are reporting on a ‘comply or 
explain’ basis against the 11 recommended TCFD disclosures. The 
table below sets out our compliance status in relation to each of the 
recommendations and, where relevant, the actions we are taking to 
achieve compliance.

As at 1 May 2022, our disclosures were not consistent with nine of 
the 11 recommended disclosures. In the main this is because our ESG 
steering group, which was established last year, has been focused 
on developing an appropriate sustainability strategy. To help in this 
process, we have appointed a specialist ESG consultancy to advise 
and work with us. A detailed programme of work has been agreed, 
including work streams to:

• 

• 

improve our reporting;

integrate the assessment and management of climate-related 
matters into everyday business processes; and

•  set science-based emission reduction targets to enable us 

to monitor and measure progress. 

A key focus for the ESG steering group in the coming year will 
be to effectively monitor and review the implementation of this 
programme to ensure that our reporting will be compliant with all 11 
TCFD recommendations.

Theme

Governance

TCFD disclosure 
recommendation and 
compliance status as at 
1 May 2022

Describe the Board’s 
oversight of climate 
related risks and 
opportunities.

Compliant

Activities to date and actions to achieve compliance

The Board has overall accountability for ESG, including climate-related matters, and 
has delegated a number of activities to our ESG steering group (see page 28). The 
Board reviews the Group’s most significant risks at least twice a year. In January 2022, 
the Audit Committee and the Board considered the updated consolidated risk register 
(see below), which recognised climate change risk for the first time. This updated 
register takes account of our new strategy, internal discussions and the current and 
emerging external environment. The Audit Committee and the Board deliberated and 
discussed the updated register, including allocating ratings for each risk on the primary 
register, and reviewed and updated the Group’s principal risks and mitigation actions 
(see page 39). As part of these discussions and review the Board considered the threat 
of climate change and initiated discussions on addressing its impact.

Planned actions
The Board will receive quarterly updates from the ESG steering group, including 
progress reports in relation to the programme of work to achieve compliance with 
the TCFD recommendations.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

31

 
 
 
ESG review continued

TCFD statement continued

TCFD compliance statement continued

Theme

Governance 
continued

TCFD disclosure 
recommendation and 
compliance status as at 
1 May 2022

Describe 
management’s role 
in assessing and 
managing climate 
related risks and 
opportunities.

Non-compliant

Strategy 

Describe the climate-
related risks and 
opportunities identified 
over the short, medium 
and long term.

Non-compliant

Describe the impact of 
climate-related risks 
and opportunities on 
businesses, strategy 
and financial planning.

Non-compliant

Describe the resilience 
of strategy, taking into 
consideration different 
climate-related 
scenarios, including a 
2°C or lower scenario.

Non-compliant

Activities to date and actions to achieve compliance

In June 2021, we launched our ESG steering group which is chaired by our CEO and 
includes two members of our Operations Board. Since May 2022, climate-related 
matters are a standing agenda item at the Group’s quarterly meetings. 

During October and November 2021, our Head of Finance undertook a detailed 
operational risk review. The review included individual meetings with each Operations 
Board member covering current and emerging risks affecting their respective areas of 
responsibility and broader corporate risks in other parts of the business. During the course 
of this review process environmental (including climate change) risk was highlighted 
and, following the conclusion of the review, was included in the updated risk register. 

To support management in its assessment of climate-related risks we have engaged 
a specialist ESG consultancy. 

Planned actions
We will integrate climate governance into our risk management framework and 
assign specific responsibilities to senior managers to ensure that climate-related 
risks and opportunities are properly assessed and effectively managed. We will 
also recruit a Sustainability Manager to champion our ESG strategy and coordinate 
its implementation, including the implementation of new processes to ensure our 
compliance with the TCFD recommendations.

The review process undertaken to update our risk register identified a number of 
climate-related risks and opportunities. These include risks that could impact our 
supply chain and potential risks and opportunities in relation to growing consumer 
demand for more sustainable products. 

Planned actions
During H1 FY23, in conjunction with the specialist ESG consultancy, we undertook 
a climate scenario analysis of the transition and physical risks and opportunities 
that could impact our business. The findings were presented to and discussed with 
Operations Board members during a climate-related risk workshop. The workshop 
assessed how climate change may impact the business and how the risk may vary 
over a short, medium and long-term period. A key focus of this assessment was to 
agree on risk and opportunity classifications for the identified climate-related issues, 
based on our existing risk classification process. Later in FY23, actions to mitigate 
climate-related risks will be agreed and climate-related opportunities identified. 
Thereafter this process will be undertaken on an annual basis.

Planned actions
Following the workshop highlighted above which assisted in the identification of 
climate-related risks and opportunities we will assess and model their potential impact 
on all aspects of our business including our financial performance. This assessment and 
modelling and the review of their outcomes will be undertaken by senior management 
and relevant Operational Board members. We also intend to develop a net-zero 
strategy to inform emission reduction efforts as a part of our business strategy. 

We are committed to developing a strategy that considers climate-related issues. We 
will seek to identify the areas where we can reduce our impact on the climate, and site 
surveys and energy efficiency improvements are already underway across the business.

Planned actions
As highlighted above, in conjunction with the specialist ESG consultancy, we will 
undertake a climate scenario analysis. Three scenarios will be considered, a below 
2°C, a 2-3°C and an above 3°C scenario. The scenarios range from a warming pathway 
where a smooth transition to a low carbon economy occurs to a warming pathway 
where little climate action is taken. This range of scenarios allows us to review our 
corporate strategy across a range of potential futures and build resilience accordingly. 

32

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Theme

Risk management

TCFD disclosure 
recommendation and 
compliance status as at 
1 May 2022

Describe the processes 
for identifying and 
assessing climate-
related risks.

Non-compliant

Activities to date and actions to achieve compliance

We have a process for identifying and assessing the risks that could impact our 
business and implementing effective risk mitigation actions. See page 39.

Planned actions
As highlighted above we will integrate climate governance into our risk 
management framework and assign specific responsibilities to senior managers 
to ensure that climate-related risks and opportunities are properly assessed and 
effectively managed. 

Metrics & targets

Describe the processes 
for managing climate-
related risks.

Non-compliant

Planned actions
As explained on page 32 climate-related risk was included in our updated risk register 
for the first time this year. We maintain a more detailed secondary register to support 
the day-to-day management of risks. In the coming year this secondary register will be 
expanded to ensure effective management of our climate-related risks.

Describe how processes 
for identifying, assessing, 
and managing climate-
related risks are 
integrated into overall 
risk management.

Non-compliant

Planned actions
As highlighted above we will integrate climate governance into our risk management 
framework and assign specific responsibilities to senior managers to ensure that 
climate-related risks and opportunities are properly assessed and effectively managed. 
To test strategic resilience and to ensure that our risk framework continues to be 
effective, on an annual basis, we will undertake a climate scenario analysis. The Board 
and Audit Committee will continue to review the business’ principal risks, including 
climate change risk, twice per year. 

Planned actions
Emissions reduction will be our prime metric. We will develop appropriate 
measures to assess and monitor our progress in line with our strategy and risk 
management processes.

We have disclosed our Scope 1 and 2 emissions since 2019. During FY22 we introduced 
a number of energy efficiency improvements (see page 30) to reduce our emissions 
footprint. Understanding and monitoring our Scope 1 and 2 emissions means we are 
better equipped to set realistic reduction targets and make a significant difference 
in our communities. 

Planned actions
In FY23 we will expand our emissions disclosure to include our Scope 3 emissions 
and highlight material emissions categories. Calculations will be consistent with 
the Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG Protocol) Corporate Value Chain standards.

Planned actions
In FY23 we will calculate our emissions footprint, and, from this baseline, will formulate 
emissions reduction targets and pathways. In future years we will report annual progress 
against these targets to track progress.

Describe the metrics 
used to assess climate-
related risks and 
opportunities in line with 
the strategy and risk 
management process.

Non-compliant

Disclose Scope 1, Scope 
2, and, if appropriate, 
Scope 3 GHG emissions, 
and related risks.

Partially compliant

Describe the targets 
used to manage 
climate-related risks 
and opportunities 
and performance 
against targets.

Non-compliant

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

33

 
 
 
ESG review continued

Social

Making a positive 
social contribution.

Our objective is to make a positive contribution  
to our people, our customers and the communities  
where we operate. 

People
At the end of FY22 we employed over 3,800 permanent colleagues. 
During our 2021 Christmas peak trading period we took on nearly 
300 temporary seasonal colleagues. 

In a challenging and competitive retail environment, our colleagues 
are fundamental to the delivery of great customer service. They are 
what makes The Works so special. In order to succeed we need to 
attract and retain good people and our culture is key to that. 

Culture and values 
Our values, together with our purpose, shape and bring our culture 
to life. Following clarification of our purpose, our strategy refresh 
and evolution of our brand, we have reaffirmed our values to ensure 
the culture we seek to foster is aligned with our updated purpose 
and strategic priorities. To bring our values to life we have also 
developed example behaviours which will be rolled out across 
the Group in the coming year.

The sense of family that comes from working in our business and 
the variety and fun that a career in retail can provide are what our 
culture is based on. We believe more than ever that we are creating 
something special that our colleagues (and future colleagues) want 
to be part of, despite being in a competitive and ever challenging 
environment. We stand out, for all the right reasons.

We continuously listen to colleagues across the Group and 
encourage a two-way conversation around how best we can 
improve and support them. The various channels we use are 
described on page 24. 

On an annual basis we invite our colleagues to participate in the 
Best Companies ‘Make A Difference’ engagement survey. This well-
recognised third-party survey covers a number of areas including 
Leadership, My Manager, Personal Growth, Wellbeing, Fair Deal and 
Giving Something Back. Colleagues also have the opportunity to leave 
open comments on what is great about working at The Works and 
what could be better. 79% of our team completed the 2021 full survey 
and we were awarded a two-star rating (with three stars being the 
highest rating) in recognition of outstanding workplace engagement.

The survey provided us with valuable insights about our culture 
and the issues that matter to our colleagues. Key findings from 
the survey this year included:

•  Our scores in Leadership and Giving Something Back increased 
and My Team and My Manager factors continued to generate 
the highest scores. Compared to last year’s results, the lowest 
scoring was in relation to Pay and Benefits, an area that had the 
largest decline year on year, and the score in relation to Personal 
Growth also declined slightly during the pandemic.

34

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

•  Our colleagues love their peers, our products and our focus on 
giving back to the community through our product proposition. 
•  Our health and wellbeing initiatives and our charitable partnerships 

(see pages 35 and 37) continue to be relevant and popular. 
•  Our improved communications, especially from leadership,  

were also highlighted as a positive. 

To continue the momentum and address areas where 
improvements are required we have launched a new learning 
and development system (see page 36). We are also:

•  creating a new internal communications strategy, including the 

launch of a new communications, rewards and benefits platform 
that will help enhance internal communications and offer 
colleagues discounts with a wide range of retailers to help them 
save money on essential and everyday purchases; 

• 

introducing Wellbeing Warriors to increase our focus on 
colleagues’ health and wellbeing (see pages 35 and 36);

•  embedding our new partnership with the Retail Trust 

(see page 35);

• 

introducing hybrid working and providing relevant training  
to our support teams to enable continued flexibility  
in working arrangements.

Our values

Being Can-do means focusing on 
what matters and getting it done. 
Whatever the situation, we rise to it 
because of the Can-do spirit and 
resilience we all share. 

We care about each other as one 
team. We care about our customers 
and communities, our products 
and every penny we spend. Caring 
about the things we do is at the 
heart of our work ethic. 

Crafty: for us, it’s about our ability 
to be creative and agile; we are 
able to adapt to change and be 
smart about what we do, with the 
resources we have. It’s what makes 
us unique. 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

We deploy a number of H&S policies including our main Health 
and Safety Policy, and H&S processes are embedded in our 
day-to-day operations. As part of their induction, all colleagues 
participate in H&S training appropriate to their role and all retail 
colleagues receive refresher H&S training on an annual basis. 
In the coming year, our training programme will be expanded 
and annual refresher H&S training will become mandatory for all 
employees. Our H&S Manager and People team liaise with line 
managers in all parts of the business to ensure compliance with 
policies and procedures and ensure that all colleagues receive 
appropriate training.

We operate a dedicated H&S Committee which meets on a 
quarterly basis. Its members include representatives from all parts 
of our operations and our H&S Manager. The overriding objective 
of decisions taken at these meetings is to make our stores and 
all our operations safe places to work and visit. Material issues 
arising from the H&S Committee’s discussions are escalated to 
senior management and the Board receives regular reports on 
H&S matters.

During FY22 there were no fatalities (FY21: nil,) and 13 reportable 
accidents (FY21: 1). 11 of these accidents occurred in our stores 
and two occurred in our Distribution Centre. All accidents were 
thoroughly investigated.

We take a proactive approach in relation to all H&S matters and 
our aim is to continuously improve our H&S performance. To drive 
this continuous improvement, during FY22 we launched a new 
web-based portal and online reporting system which allows all 
stores to immediately record accidents, incidents and near misses. 
This real-time data and visibility across our entire store estate will 
help us better understand risks and identify the most effective 
mitigation. During the year, we also introduced a more streamlined 
H&S checklist to be used by store managers. It focuses on things 
they need to monitor daily during regular floor walks, including 
identifying potential hazards and ensuring fire escape routes 
are always kept clear. 

Wellbeing
Supporting our colleagues is a key focus. Introduced in March 2020, 
during the first national lockdown, The Works Family Facebook 
page connects our colleagues in our ‘virtual home’ and serves as a 
platform on which we regularly share health and wellbeing content 
from specialist sources including the NHS, Mind, Retail Trust and 
Get Self Help.

We also provide an Employee Assistance Programme for all 
colleagues and in September 2021 we entered into a new 
partnership with Retail Trust (www.retailtrust.org.uk), a long-
established charity, whose mission is ‘to create hope, health 
and happiness’ for everyone in the retail sector. To date with the 
support of Retail Trust: 

•  over 50 of our senior leaders have participated in training in 

relation to mental health and wellbeing management. During 
FY23 this training programme will be available via our e-learning 
platform, making it accessible to all managers; 

•  our e-learning modules have been expanded to include 20 short 

courses and resources on wellbeing and mental health and 
during the year over 3,000 colleagues completed online training 
in this area.

In FY23 we plan to introduce 50 Wellbeing Warriors. This network 
of colleagues will be specifically trained to support the mental 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

35

40 years of fun
In September 2021 we marked our 40th anniversary 
with a ’40 Years of Fun’ programme that 
celebrated our people, and customers and the 
communities where we operate. Activities included 
80’s themed fancy dress events and competitions 
and all colleagues received anniversary gifts. For 
a time, staff discounts were increased to 40% and 
a 40% discount was also offered to customers on 
over 100 products. 

Photo: Gavin Peck with Mike Crossley, one of The 
Works’ founders.

Health and safety 
The health and safety (H&S) of all our colleagues and everyone who 
visits our stores or any of our operations is of paramount importance.

During the year we continued to deploy additional safety measures 
to manage COVID-19 risks. In line with Government guidance, 
we provided personal protective equipment to all colleagues 
working in our stores and at our Distribution and Support Centres. 
Protective screens remained in place at all store till points and 
two-metre distance signage was retained across all operations. 
We have continued to undertake enhanced cleaning regimes and 
flexible home-working arrangements are in place for colleagues 
who can work from home. Until July 2021, in partnership with 
Warwickshire Council, we arranged twice weekly COVID-19 
testing for all colleagues at our Distribution Centre. Specific 
risk assessments for each home nation based on Government 
guidance were regularly undertaken and updated as and when 
Government guidance changed. 

 
 
 
ESG review continued

Social continued

Wellbeing continued
wellbeing of their peers. They will act as an impartial, confidential, 
listening ear and provide unbiased support to colleagues. In 
particular, as required, they will help colleagues build confidence 
to seek advice from professionals and provide information about 
how to find relevant specialist support.

Diversity and inclusion (D&I)
It is important that we create an inclusive environment for all of our 
colleagues regardless of gender, ethnicity, orientation, disability, 
social mobility or age.

We are committed to creating an inclusive organisation, where 
diversity is embraced and communities come together and where 
we appreciate how important it is to belong. Our commitment is to 
ensure everyone has equal opportunities to reach their potential 
with us no matter who they are.

The gender diversity profile across the Group as at 1 May 2022 is 
detailed below.

Board1

Operational Board2

Direct reports3

Senior leadership4

Other employees5

Male

3/60%

7/67%

23/59%

12/55%

Female

2/40%

2/33%

16/41%

10/45%

1,040/27%

2,787/73%

1 

 The Board (see pages 48 and 49) includes three Non-Executive Directors 
and two Executive Directors. 

2   Information about the members of the Operations Board, 
which includes the two Executive Directors, is available at 
https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership. 

3   Direct reports to senior management (the Operational Board)

To improve D&I across the Group our D&I strategy aims to:

4  Senior leadership includes heads of department or equivalent.

•  gain more insight and data covering age, gender, ethnicity, 

5   Other employees includes all other colleagues who are 

LGBTQ+, disability and social mobility via surveys, questionnaires 
and discussion forums;

• 

introduce D&I colleague representatives who will help guide 
this workstream;

•  review all relevant policies, procedures and practices, updating 

and relaunching where required;

•  explore and utilise external partners to enhance learning and 

support initiatives; and

• 

introduce new D&I training across all levels within the organisation.

We are a signatory to the British Retail Consortium Better Jobs 
Diversity and Inclusion Charter that aims to improve D&I across 
the retail industry and help drive change. In line with the Charter’s 
commitments and to support our own D&I strategy, we are currently 
undertaking research and gathering baseline data to better 
understand how diverse and inclusive the retail sector is and, 
more importantly, how diverse and inclusive our colleagues believe 
our business to be. The findings of this research project will be 
available during summer 2022 and this information will assist us in 
further developing our D&I strategy and ensuring its effectiveness. 

During the year members of the Operational Board participated 
in inclusive leadership and unconscious bias training and in the 
coming year we will continue to roll out and support a range 
of D&I initiatives across the Group. 

Our 2022 Gender Pay Gap Report is available at https://corporate.
theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/corporate-governance/our-policies. 
As at 5 April 2021, when measured as a median average, there is 
no difference in the hourly rate of pay for our male and female 
colleagues. However, measured as a mean average the hourly 
rate of pay for male colleagues was 11.5% higher than female 
colleagues. The reason for this is because we have more men than 
women in senior leadership roles. Through implementation of our 
D&I strategy we are working to address this.

permanent employees. 

Development and retention
Our colleagues are the heart of our business and we must retain 
them and provide development opportunities.

We launched a new learning and development system during 
summer 2022. This new system allows us to provide better 
training to all colleagues. The new platform has also enabled 
us to expand the scope of our training programme to include 
modules focused on personal growth and development.

Our retail developmental programme ‘I can be..’ enables 
colleagues to discuss their career aspirations with their line 
manager and train accordingly, making good on our promise 
to upskill colleagues ready for the next step in their career. The 
programme also helps us create and maintain a strong talent 
pipeline. Over 100 colleagues have joined the programme this 
year and as we roll out the new learning system we expect this 
number to double over the course of the next 12 months. We 
are also launching a version of the programme across specific 
departments within our Support Centre. 

In June 2022 we introduced a new performance review 
framework structured around clear objectives to ensure that 
all colleagues are aligned with our purpose and our strategy. 
The new framework also enhances our ability to support our 
colleagues’ personal growth and development. In addition 
to the formal review cycle, the new process includes informal 
conversations in relation to performance, career development 
and health and wellbeing. These regular ‘check-ins’ are intended 
to promote more open, regular dialogue between managers and 
colleagues and encourage colleagues to request discussions 
about their development as and when required.

36

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Giving something back
Making a difference to society is not only a part of our ESG 
responsibilities, but also part of our culture. Through our ‘Giving 
Something Back’ programme we support charities, local causes 
and the communities where we operate, including:

•  Cancer Research UK (CRUK): Our commercial and fundraising 
partnership with CRUK began in August 2016 and since then 
we have introduced a series of CRUK products, sold CRUK 
materials on behalf of the charity, and participated in a range of 
fundraising activities. By FY21 our fundraising in partnership with 
CRUK totalled £1m, a significant achievement. During the year 
momentum has continued and in FY22 we raised over £125k. Our 
CRUK partnership is ongoing and we will continue to participate 
in fundraising events and expand our CRUK product range in the 
year ahead.

•  Mind/SAMH/Inspire partnership: In May 2021, at a time when 
mental health concerns were very prevalent, we launched our 
UK-wide partnership with Mind, the Scottish Association for Mental 
Health and the Inspire Mental Health Consortium. Since launch, 
our colleagues have undertaken a range of fundraising initiatives, 
using nationally recognised events to help spread awareness and 
raise money. Despite a challenging fundraising environment, in 
FY22 over £75k had been raised. In the coming year fundraising 
activities will continue, including the development of a ‘Be You’ 
range of products to raise further funds for Mind.

•  Payroll giving: We offer two schemes that enable colleagues to 
make monthly charitable donations from their net pay. Through 
Payroll Giving in Action colleagues can donate any amount to 
any charity, while the Pennies from Heaven scheme enables 
colleagues to donate the pennies from their payslips to our 
charity partners. 

•  Local support: Many of our stores are part of their local 

community and often take part in community fundraisers or 
support causes that their team and customers feel passionately 
about. We love to see our caring colleagues make a difference 
and encourage participation in local community activity, 
supporting as best we can.

Giving something back
“ We are so grateful to The Works for supporting 
Mind as we help those of us affected by a 
mental health problem. So far, the partnership 
has raised an amazing £75k for Mind, SAMH and 
Inspire, through in-store fundraising and events 
organised by The Works’ staff. The money raised 
will help support our services, like the Mind 
Infoline, and the campaigning we do to ensure 
that the one in four of us who experiences a 
mental health problem each year does not face it 
alone. We are excited to see how the partnership 
will continue to grow next year, and achieve 
great things.” 

Juliana Oliver
Account Manager of The Works partnership at Mind

Our development 
programme in action
“ I joined The Works in September 2016 on an 
eight-week work experience placement. I was 
then taken on as a temporary sales assistant 
for the Christmas period and then applied for a 
supervisor’s role at a new store that was opening 
near me. My application was successful and 
during the last five years I have worked my way up 
from supervisor, to assistant manager, and then 
into my current role as store manager. 

I have learnt so much along the way and had 
some incredible opportunities to grow and develop 
within the business. Most recently I was selected 
to become a Wellbeing Warrior and I have just 
finished my training for this role which launches 
later in the year. Being part of The Works means 
you are part of a huge family. It is fast paced, fun, 
and exciting and no two days are the same.”

Charli Carlin
Store manager at The Works.

Photo: Charli, one of our store managers. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

37

 
 
 
ESG review continued

Governance

Operating in a 
responsible way.

We must maintain high standards of governance and operate 
in a responsible way. It is the right thing to do. It is also essential 
to maintain our reputation and protect our brand.

We are fully committed to conducting business fairly, ethically 
and with respect to fundamental human rights. This includes the 
prevention of all forms of slavery, forced labour or servitude, child 
labour and human trafficking, both in our business and supply 
chains. Our Modern Slavery Statement is available at https://
corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/corporate-governance/
our-policies.

Supply chain management 
We have developed an Ethical Trading Code of Conduct (Code 
of Conduct) for our partners, manufacturers and suppliers, to 
ensure that when our customers buy from us, they can be satisfied 
that the goods have been produced without exploitation and 
in acceptable and sustainable working conditions.

Our Code of Conduct clearly outlines our social and ethical 
requirements, which include but are not limited to: child labour, 
forced labour, safety standards, health and hygiene, associations, 
environmental impact, discrimination and coercion, working hours 
and wages and other fundamental human rights.

In order to ensure that our suppliers meet the social and ethical 
standards we expect, we implement the following arrangements:

•  We require all suppliers to sign our Terms and Conditions of 
Purchase which state the supplier has read and understood 
and conforms to our Code of Conduct. These Terms and 
Conditions of Purchase must be signed before we will 
place orders.

•  We share our supplier manual with our suppliers to educate 
them about our operating requirements. We also give clear 
points of contact to ensure queries reach the appropriate 
person and are dealt with quickly and effectively, with support 
from relevant functions including merchandising, technical 
and buying.

• 

In partnership with TUV Rheinland, an independent specialist 
in social responsibility auditing, we have developed a 
bespoke supplier factory audit programme. Incorporated 
within this programme are questions covering the prevention 
of modern slavery, forced labour and child labour and other 
fundamental human rights, which are detailed within our 
Code of Conduct. Suppliers are encouraged to declare their 
business relationships with individual factories that produce 
for us, which provides us with a view of how sustainable our 
supply chain is. Our audit programme (which also incorporates 
a section on supplier capability and their QA functions) also 
provides ethical visibility of suppliers and an understanding 
of their production capabilities. During FY22 the scope of 
the audit programme has been further developed to include 
new assessment procedures that evaluate product safety 
and provide suppliers with a clearer compliance route when 
developing products for us.

•  We also conduct independent product testing as part of our 

product surveillance test programme.

• 

If a factory fails to have reached an acceptable standard 
or there is any evidence of child labour or forced labour as 
described in the Modern Slavery legislation, the factory will 
be delisted and all orders will be cancelled.

38

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties

Effective risk management  
helps us identify, evaluate  
and manage the risks which  
could impact the business,

Our risk management framework
The Board is responsible for ensuring that appropriate risk 
management processes and controls are in place. The Board 
has delegated responsibility for overseeing risk management 
processes and controls to the Audit Committee. Day-to-day 
risk management is the responsibility of the senior management 
team. Further details of the governance structure are set out in the 
Corporate governance report on page 50. 

Risks are identified and assessed using a bottom-up review 
process. Senior management determines the potential risks that 
could affect their areas of responsibility and the likelihood and 
impact. This information is used to create the Group’s primary 
risk register and capture principal risks which are subsequently 
considered by the Audit Committee and the Board. 

Risk appetite
The Board determines the Group’s risk appetite. Where a conflict 
exists between risk management and strategic ambitions, the 
Board seeks to achieve a balance which facilitates the long-term 
success of the Group.

Principal and emerging risks and changes in 
principal risks
The Board conducts a robust assessment of the principal risks 
facing the Group and emerging risks, including those that could 
threaten the operation of its business, future performance or 
solvency. The Board formally reviews the Group’s principal risks at 
least twice a year. 

A detailed operational risk review was undertaken by the Head of 
Finance during October and November 2021. This review included 
discussions with each Operations Board member covering current, 
principal and emerging risks affecting their respective areas of 
responsibility and broader corporate risks. Following this review, the 
Group’s primary risk register and its principal risks and mitigation 
plans were updated, and considered by the Audit Committee and 
the Board in January 2022 and July 2022. 

The principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group as at the 
date of this Annual Report are set out in order of priority on pages 
39 to 44, together with details of how these are currently mitigated. 
The adjacent heatmap illustrates the Board’s assessment of the 
likelihood of the principal risks occurring and the resulting impact, 
after taking into account mitigating actions.

During the year the main changes to the principal risks were as follows:

•  Removal of store expansion risk: Store expansion activity and 
specifically new store openings no longer represent a risk. The 
Group’s strategy is now focused on optimising its store estate 
and new store openings are no longer a strategic priority. 

•  Addition of environmental (including climate change) risk: 

Following the operational risk review described above this risk 
is now considered to be a principal risk. 

•  COVID-19: Reduced likelihood and impact of risks associated 

with COVID-19. 

•  As a result of experiencing a cyber-security incident in March 2022 
we have significantly increased our cyber-security capabilities. As 
a result, the risks of a similar event in the future causing significant 
damage or disruption, have reduced. We continue to monitor our 
systems diligently and implement appropriate mitigation measures.

The Group may be exposed to other risks and uncertainties not 
presently known to management, or currently deemed less material, 
that may subsequently have an adverse effect on the business. 
Further, the exposure to each risk will evolve as mitigating actions 
are taken or as new risks emerge or the nature of risks change.

Risk heatmap

h
g
H

i

t
c
a
p
m

I

w
o
L

12

11

10 *

9

8

5

1

3

7

2

4

6

Low

Likelihood

High

Change from prior year

Increased 

  Decreased 

  Unchanged

Principal risks
1 
Economy
2  Market
3 
4 
5  Brand and reputation
6 
7 

 Regulation and compliance
Seasonality of sales

 IT systems and cyber-security
Supply chain

People

8 
9  Business continuity
 Environmental  
10 
(including climate change)*
Liquidity

11 
12  COVID-19

*  New risk

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

39

 
 
 
 
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

1. Economy
A deterioration in economic conditions or a reduction in consumer 
confidence could impact customer spending and have an adverse 
effect on the Group’s revenue and profitability. 

Change from prior year
Increased risk level. COVID-19 trading restrictions were lifted at the start 
of FY22, and the direct economic risks connected with the pandemic 
are now lower. However inflation and the current cost of living challenge 
could impact consumer spending and as a result the Group’s sales. 
The current economic environment, including the following issues, is 
also driving increased costs which could impact profitability should 
sales decline:

•  supply chain costs described below.;
•  raw materials and energy costs;
• 

increases in National Living and Minimum Wages given most of the 
Group’s colleagues are paid the National Minimum or Living Wage;

•  the war in Ukraine; and
•  FX rates.

Link to strategy

2. Market 
The Group generates its revenue from the sale of books, toys, arts 
and crafts and stationery products.

Although it has a track record of understanding customers’ needs 
within these categories, the market is competitive. Customers’ 
tastes and shopping habits can change quickly. Failure to effectively 
predict or respond to changes could affect the Group’s sales and 
financial performance.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  The Group’s proposition as an alternative to full price 

specialist retailers positions it well for customers looking 
to trade down in times of economic uncertainty.

•  Monitor sales on a daily basis and ongoing review of pricing 

and margins.

•  Review sales trends data at weekly trading meetings attended 
by experienced senior management and, if required, agree 
and implement mitigating actions to drive sales and/
or reduce costs. Take account of expected impact in the 
Group’s strategic planning process, budgets and forecasts. 
•  Continue to focus on cost control across the business while 
making carefully considered investments in certain areas 
to support the Group’s growth strategy.

• 

Increase the use of direct sourcing as part of a three-year 
plan to improve the margin on key products purchased. This 
has been delayed by the ongoing effects of COVID-19 in 
China, the Group’s key supply source.

•  FX hedging policy in place to smooth the short-term 

effects of exposure to foreign exchange rate fluctuations 
(substantially all FY23 USD requirements hedged) and 
continue to hedge energy costs as appropriate. 

•  Operate store estate on flexible short-term property leases 
to ensure the Group benefits from reductions in rental costs 
through the rolling renegotiation of its leases and can flex its 
store estate relatively quickly in the event of material local 
changes in demand.

•  Focus on development of our brand and increasing customer 
engagement is designed to further differentiate the Group 
from competitors.

•  Emerging trends monitored by a recently strengthened 

trading team that has a proven track record of responding 
to changing consumer tastes.

•  Closely monitor competitors’ propositions and discuss key 

developments at weekly trading meetings and at Board level 
on a regular basis.

•  Monitor and review customer feedback.
•  Use sales data and online feedback channels to inform 

purchasing and marketing decisions.

•  Flexible lease terms allow the Group to adapt its store 

portfolio (which continues to be highly relevant to customers) 
to react to changes in local market conditions.

•  Ongoing investment in the Group’s online capability will 
ensure that it remains relevant as customers shopping 
behaviours increasingly involve online engagement prior 
to store purchases as well as those made directly via 
the website.

40

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhance our  
online proposition

Drive operational  
improvements

Optimise our  
store estate

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

3. IT systems and cyber-security
The Group relies on its IT systems for many aspects of its operation. 
Failure to develop and maintain these systems, or any prolonged 
system performance problems or cyber-attack, could affect the 
Group’s ability to trade and/or could lead to significant fines and 
reputational damage.

Change from prior year
The Group experienced a cyber-security incident at the end of March 
2022, which temporarily affected till systems and replenishment 
deliveries to stores and delayed the fulfilment of online orders. Action 
was taken swiftly to protect the business, which reduced the immediate 
threat and enabled trade to continue online and in the majority of 
stores. As part of the operational recovery plan we have embedded 
significantly increased security capabilities across the business, which 
has taken more time than merely reinstating the previous arrangements 
after scanning for residual security issues. While this lengthened 
process has created a degree of short-term operational difficulty, it has 
resulted in a significant reduction in the risk of the business suffering 
major loss or disruption in the event of a future cyber-security incident.

Link to strategy

•  Systems and data are key to the execution of the strategy. 

Ensuring systems and processes are fit for purpose will deliver 
efficiency and capability improvements.

•  Significantly enhanced IT security across all operations 
including upgraded malware detection and response 
capability to detect, defend and isolate any attack, 
introduced extensive network segmentation to limit the 
progress of any attack and established a new Security 
Operations Centre to monitor and respond to any unusual 
activities in our systems or networks.

•  Refreshed mandatory training for colleagues to raise 

awareness of cyber-security issues.

•  Enhanced working from home capabilities established 
in response to the pandemic have reduced the level of 
dependence on a single site head office.

•  Regular IT investment strategy review undertaken by the 
Operating Board including security and infrastructure 
investment programmes.

•  Further strengthened in-house IT capabilities during FY22.
•  Diligent monitoring of systems on an ongoing basis.

4. Supply chain
The Group uses third parties, including many in Asia, for the supply of 
products. This creates a number of potential areas of risk, including the 
potential for supplier failures, risks associated with manufacturing and 
importing goods from overseas, potential disruption at various stages 
of the supply chain and suppliers failing to act or operate ethically. 

•  Buying and supply chain teams strengthened progressively 

since mid-2020.

•  Ongoing review of supplier base and diversification and 

change implemented as appropriate to provide flexibility 
and reduce reliance on individual suppliers.

Supply chain disruption has been heightened due to COVID-19 resulting 
in uneven demand and supply patterns. During FY22, the main supply 
chain impact was a very significant increase in ocean freight rates and 
difficulty importing stock due to problems in the ocean freight system. 

• 

Independent monitoring of suppliers undertaken by 
third-party auditors with local country knowledge and 
an understanding of social and ethical requirements 
(see page 38). 

Due to the Group’s low level of exposure to sales outside the UK, risks 
connected with Brexit are low, albeit there still remains a higher level of 
complexity than previously in exporting goods to the Group’s ten stores 
in Ireland.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Developed a series of product technical requirements that 

provide guidance for our buyers and suppliers during product 
sourcing, development and manufacture.

• 

• 

In-house product quality assurance team undertakes 
product testing as part of a product surveillance test 
programme.

Implement policies that reinforce the Group’s values and 
its commitment to conduct business fairly, ethically and 
with respect to human rights which suppliers are required 
to adhere to (see page 38).

•  Proactive management of supply chain to ensure stock levels 

are appropriate.

•  Continue to review freight costs (including measures to 
mitigate such costs) and monitor alternative sourcing 
arrangements where practicable.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

41

 
 
 
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

5. Brand and reputation
Protecting and enhancing the reputation of the Group’s key brand 
asset – ‘TheWorks.co.uk’ – is vital to the Group’s success. Failure to 
protect the brand, in particular product quality and safety, could 
result in the Group’s reputation, sales and future prospects being 
adversely affected.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

6. Regulation and compliance
The Group is exposed to a growing number of legal and regulatory 
compliance requirements including the Bribery Act, the Modern Slavery 
Act, the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the Listing 
Rules. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations could lead to 
financial claims, penalties, awards of damages, fines or reputational 
damage which, in some cases, could be material and could significantly 
impact the financial performance of the business.

There are significant laws and regulations (including reporting 
and disclosure requirements) surrounding climate change and 
environmental reporting. Failure to comply with these could result in 
financial penalties, legal consequences and/or reputational damage. 

Change from prior year
Higher risk level. Regulatory requirements relating to climate change 
and environmental reporting have increased, which increase this risk 
level. The Group is now subject to the TCFD disclosure requirements.

Link to strategy

•  Developing our brand and increasing customer engagement 

are strategic aims. During the year we evolved and 
modernised our brand which will be rolled out across the 
business during autumn 2022.

• 

In conjunction with our brand evolution, communicate 
to colleagues our clarified purpose and values.

•  Provide intellectual property guidance and education 

to design and sourcing teams.

•  Monitor customer product reviews and take appropriate 

action to remove products from sale and take other actions 
as appropriate where quality issues are identified.

• 

In-house product quality assurance team works with suppliers 
to ensure product quality, safety and ethical production. 

•  Conduct third-party technical and ethical audits.
•  Monitor the Group’s ESG responsibilities (see page 31) 
including the processes in place to ensure the Group 
operates in a responsible way.

•  Oversight of regulatory compliance by CFO and Company 

Secretary with support from external advisers.

• 

Implement policies and procedures in relation to mandatory 
requirements and measures the Group has adopted voluntarily.

•  Operate a Whistleblowing Policy and procedure which 

enables colleagues to confidentially report any concerns 
or inappropriate behaviour.

•  Operate a GDPR Policy which is overseen by a data 
supervisor and monitored by members of a GDPR 
governance monitoring group who meet regularly and report 
key issues to the senior management team.

•  Retain experienced advisers where necessary to cover gaps 

in expertise in the in-house team.

•  Entered into a partnership with Salford Trading Standards, 
one of ten local trading standards authorities, to access 
greater consensus on regulatory interpretations and new 
legislation, particularly following Brexit.

42

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

7. Seasonality of sales
The Group historically makes all of its profit in the second half of the 
financial year, with the peak Christmas trading period contributing 
substantially all of this. Interruptions to supply, adverse weather or a 
significant downturn in consumer confidence in this period could have 
a significant impact on the short-term profitability of the Group.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Continue to focus on reducing seasonality, where possible, 

by growing the year-round appeal of the proposition.
•  Hold weekly trading meetings to ensure that immediate 
action is taken to maximise sales based on current and 
expected trading conditions.

•  Enhanced online fulfilment operation to increase capacity 

during the peak season.

8. People
The Group’s success is dependent on the quality of the Board and 
senior management team. A lack of effective succession planning and 
development of key colleagues could harm future prospects.

Change from prior year
Reduced risk level compared to the previous year following recent 
appointments to the Operations Board and senior management team.

Link to strategy

9. Business continuity
Significant disruption to the operation, in particular internal IT systems, 
the Support Centre or the Distribution Centre, could severely impact the 
Group’s ability to supply stores or fulfil online sales resulting in financial 
or reputational damage.

Change from prior year
Reduced risk as described above due to the implementation 
of additional security measures following cyber-security incident.

Link to strategy

•  Continue to develop succession plans which are discussed 

at Nomination Committee meetings.

•  Establishing development programmes to support future leaders.
•  Well-managed search and recruitment processes, together 
with appealing proposition and welcoming culture, enables 
recruitment of high-calibre executives.

• 

Implement a Remuneration Policy designed to ensure 
management incentives support the Group’s long-term 
success for the benefit of all stakeholders, including a Long 
Term Incentive Plan for Executive Directors and restricted 
share awards for Operations Board members. For further 
details see page 64 to 71.

•  Business continuity plan in place including system recovery. 
Following the cyber-security incident referred to above, this 
plan has been enhanced in a number of areas including the 
implementation of new cloud-based back-ups which improve 
the flexibility of any disaster recovery plan response. Further 
enhancements are planned in the coming year including 
subscription to a cloud-based technology recovery centre 
to improve system recovery speed and execution.

•  Undertake disaster recovery dry run exercises. The scope of 
these exercises has been updated and a number of dry runs 
will take place in FY23.

•  Emergency generator installed at the Group’s Support Centre 

to insulate the business from the impact of power cuts.
•  Maintain appropriate business interruption insurance cover.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

43

 
 
 
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

Initiatives to reduce our impact on the environment are 
being implemented, for example, reducing waste packaging 
in products sold and in parcel delivery packaging for 
online sales, and reducing our use of single use plastic 
(see page 29). 

•  Engaged a specialist ESG consultancy to assist in the 

development of the Group’s environmental strategy and 
ensure compliance with TCFD requirements (see page 31).
•  Recruiting a Sustainability Manager to lead and implement 

our environmental strategy.

•  Working with our third-party logistics providers to explore 
and invest in energy efficient solutions within the supply 
chain process. 

•  Financial forecasts and covenant headroom monitored 

and reported to the Board monthly.

•  Strategy focuses on driving LFL sales and improving 

efficiency, rather than previous store rollout plan, which 
is a lower risk, less capital intensive strategy.

•  The bank facilities have been increased to £30m and 

extended to 30 November 2025. 

•  Continue to prioritise and promote the health and wellbeing 

of colleagues, customers and the wider community. 
•  Focus on maximising the potential of the business in the 

broadest sense to increase its resilience.

•  The Group is now better able to flex its online fulfilment 
capacity to meet demand in the event of any future 
restrictions being imposed on retail store trading.

•  Successful navigation through the pandemic demonstrated 
the relevance of the Group’s proposition to customers and 
its ability to react to such an event.

10. Environmental (including climate change)
There is an increased focus on sustainable business from consumers 
and regulators. In our business this applies to products and packaging 
in particular. Failure to respond to these demands could affect the 
Group’s reputation, sales and financial performance. 

• 

Supply chain disruptions as a result of extreme weather events could 
damage operations, in particular the flow of stock which could 
adversely impact sales. 

There are increased reporting and disclosure requirements relating to 
climate change and environmental impact including new taxes. See 
also Regulations and compliance risk above.

Change from prior year
New risk this year.

Link to strategy

11. Liquidity
Insufficient liquidity available and/or insufficient headroom in 
banking facilities. Potential for breach of banking covenants if 
financial performance deteriorates significantly compared with plans. 
Availability of credit insurance to suppliers may be reduced or removed 
resulting in an increased cash requirement.

Change from prior year
Strengthened balance sheet and less capital intensive strategy reduce 
this risk to a lower level than the previous year. A new revolving credit 
facility has also recently been secured and increased to £30m.

Link to strategy

12. COVID-19
The risks relating to COVID-19 appear to have reduced significantly 
since last year. The residual risks are:

•  the potential for medium-term adverse economic impact following 

the cessation of Government support schemes; and 

•  further supply chain disruption due to restrictions potentially being 
maintained in certain parts of the world, particularly China, which 
could cause disruption to stock availability and cost inflation. 

Change from prior year
The risk is deemed to be lower than that reported at the prior year end, 
following the successful roll-out of the vaccination programme and the 
removal of Government restrictions.

Link to strategy

44

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Viability statement

In accordance with provision 31 of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code dated July 2018 (the “Code”), the Directors have assessed 
the prospects and viability of the Group over a three-year period, 
taking into account the Group’s current position and the potential 
impact of the principal risks documented in this report.

The Directors consider that three years is an appropriate planning 
horizon for the following reasons:

•  retail market trends evolve rapidly, including the way customers 
shop and the impact of new technologies. The uncertainty as to 
how the market will have evolved more than three years into the 
future is considered too great to enable plans extending beyond 
this period to be meaningful;

•  uncertainty exists in relation to the wider economy and its 

potential impact on consumer demand and shopping habits;
•  the average remaining term of the Group’s property portfolio 

leases is approximately three years.

The text which follows closely reflects the text in Note (1) (b) (i) of the 
financial statements, relating to the preparation of the accounts 
on a going concern basis.

The Group operates a three-year plan (covering the FY23 to FY25 
financial years/periods), referred to as the ‘Base Case’ scenario. 
In addition, a ‘severe but plausible’ ‘Downside Case’ sensitivity 
has been prepared to support the Board’s viability assessment, 
by stress testing the Base Case to indicate the financial headroom 
resulting from applying more pessimistic assumptions. These 
models are described in more detail below.

In assessing the Group’s viability the Directors have considered:

•  the external environment;
•  the Group’s financial position including the quantum and 

expectations regarding availability of bank facilities;

•  the potential impact on financial performance of the risks 

described in the Strategic report;

•  the output of the Base Case scenario, which represents the 

Group’s estimate of the most likely financial performance over 
the forecast period;

•  the measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of 

a significant downturn in trading

•  the resilience of the Group to these risks having a more severe 
impact, evaluated via the Downside Case which shows the 
impact on the Group’s cash flows, bank facility headroom and 
covenants; and

•  the response to situations in which consumer market conditions 

are even more severe than the downside Case.

These factors are described below.

External environment
The risks which were most prominent in the Board’s consideration 
of the viability of the business are those relating to the economy 
and the market, with the nature of these risks having altered 
significantly since last year’s Annual Report. COVID-19 was the 
dominant factor in making this judgement in relation to the 
financial statements for FY20 and FY21 but the Board’s assessment 
is that there is now only a residual risk associated with this. Instead, 
the risk of weaker consumer demand is now considered to be the 
greatest risk, due to the factors that have been widely reported 
externally in recent months, including a higher level of inflation and 
concerns about its effect on household budgets and consumer 
spending on discretionary items.

The potential adverse impact on trading in the event of a further 
weakening of consumer demand due to general economic or 
market weakness is considered to be of a smaller magnitude than 
the impact of the full national lockdowns which were experienced 
during periods of the COVID-19 pandemic.

Risks relating to Brexit are not considered significant for the 
Group and therefore are not expected to have any bearing 
on the viability assessment. 

Financial position and bank facilities
The cash and borrowings of the Group at the period end are shown 
in Notes 19 (Cash and cash equivalents) and 20 (Borrowings) of the 
financial statements. In addition, Note 25 (Financial instruments) 
describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for 
managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; 
details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its 
exposure to credit risk and liquidity risk.

At 1 May 2022 the Group held net cash (excluding lease liabilities) 
of £16.3m (FY21: net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £0.8m).

The Group’s bank facilities were renewed in June 2022, and 
now comprise a larger revolving credit facility (RCF), increased to 
£30.0m, which terminates at the end of November 2025. The facility 
includes two financial covenants which are structured in a way that is 
typical for a retail business of this size. The covenants are tested quarterly: 

1. 

the level of net debt to LTM (last 12 months’ rolling) EBITDA; and

2. 

 the ‘Fixed Charge Cover’ or ratio of LTM EBITDA prior to 
deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest.

The bank facility is larger than the Group expects to use, and has 
been sized in this way to provide the Board and stakeholders with 
additional assurance as to the availability of liquidity during the 
viability assessment period, given the current heightened levels 
of uncertainty as regards the economy and external environment.

Potential impact of risks on financial scenarios 
The ‘Principal risks and uncertainties’ section of the Strategic 
report, on pages 39 to 44, sets out the main risks that the Board 
considers could threaten the Group’s business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity.

It is considered unlikely that all the risks would manifest themselves 
to adversely affect the business at the same time. The Directors 
have estimated what the most likely combination of risks might 
be that could materialise within the forecast period and how the 
business might be affected; this combination of risks is reflected 
in the Base Case assumptions.

As noted above, the most prominent risks in the near term are 
considered to be the risk of lower consumer spending due to a 
weakened economy, which could affect sales, costs and liquidity. 

During FY22 the Group experienced a cyber-security incident. 
This had a limited immediate/direct impact on trading towards 
the end of FY22 and there was a residual effect on trading during 
early FY23 as the Group took the decision to implement a very 
cautious and low risk approach to reinstating its systems, whilst 
simultaneously introducing significantly strengthened cyber-security 
measures. As a result of these measures the Board considers that 
the risk of a material impact from any future cyber-security attack 
is lessened. 

The Downside Case scenario takes into consideration the same 
risks as the Base Case but assumes that their effects are more 
severe, especially the level of disruption that could be experienced 
if consumer spending weakens significantly from its already 
reduced level, during the coming peak trading season.

Base Case scenario
The Base Case scenario assumptions are aligned with the Group’s 
internal forecast:

•  during FY22 sales were adversely impacted during the peak 

trading season by significant disruptions to the flow of stock into 
the business due to problems in the ocean freight system and 
store sales were also affected by the Omicron COVID-19 variant. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

45

 
 
 
Viability statement continued

Base Case scenario continued
•  The Base Case assumes that sales are not affected by these 

factors during the going concern period;

•  online sales levels during the early part of FY23 have been 

lower than expected. The Base Case assumes that online sales 
improve from their recent levels but not to the level initially 
expected, despite the fact that the Group plans to implement 
measures to improve online sales;

•  the gross margin assumptions include provision for the 

continuation for a longer period than initially expected of higher 
than normal ocean container freight costs, until the end of FY23. 
Thereafter it is assumed that any reduction in freight rates will, 
broadly, be offset by a less favourable currency exchange rate 
than the hedged rate during FY23;

•  the Base Case provides for known or expected inflationary 

increases including those associated with significantly higher 
electricity prices which are assumed to double and not reduce 
during the forecast period, and wage rates including further 
increases in the National Living Wage;

•  capital expenditure levels are in line with the Group’s strategic 
plan, which would enable a reduction in capital expenditure in 
the event of a Downside scenario occurring; and 

•  the Base Case allows for the resumption of dividend payments.

Under the Base Case scenario, the Group’s forecasts show that 
it will not draw on its bank facility at any point. Whilst it may 
not be relevant given it is not envisaged that the facility would 
be used under the Base Case scenario, nevertheless the Base 
Case indicates that the financial covenants are complied with 
at all times.

The output of the Base Case model scenario therefore indicates 
that the Group would have sufficient financial resources to 
continue to be viable over the forecast period. 

Measures to maintain or increase liquidity
During the COVID-19 pandemic the Group demonstrated that it 
was capable of taking measures to maintain or improve liquidity, 
and subsequently, during FY22, the Group has continued to 
generate positive cash flow.

If deemed necessary, mitigating actions would be taken in 
response to a significant downturn in trading, which would 
increase liquidity. These may include, for example, delaying and 
reducing stock purchases, stock liquidation, reductions in capital 
expenditure, the review of payment terms and the review of 
dividend levels. Some of these potential mitigations have been 
built into the Downside Case model, and some have been noted 
as additional measures that may be taken in practice in the event 
of that scenario, or worse, actually occurring. 

Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario
The Downside Case makes the following assumptions to reflect 
more adverse conditions compared to the Base Case:

•  store LFL sales are assumed to be lower than the Base Case 

during the peak period prior to Christmas 2022, to allow for the 
possibility that consumer spending is adversely affected for the 
reasons described above. Recent store sales levels have been 
slightly above the Base Case level;

•  online sales are assumed to be lower than in the Base Case, 

reflecting the possibility that the recent performance is due to 
external factors beyond our control, such as a shift in consumer 
shopping patterns away from online sales, and/or the failure by 
the Group to successfully implement some or all of its plans to 
improve the online sales performance;

46

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

•  the gross margin assumptions are consistent with the Base Case, 
which the Board believes already takes a sufficiently cautious 
view of expected freight rates, even allowing for a severe but 
plausible Downside scenario; and 

•  volume related costs in the Downside Case are lowered where 

they move directly with sales levels; for example, online fulfilment 
and marketing costs are assumed to reduce to correspond with 
the lower online sales. The model also reflects certain steps 
which could be taken to mitigate the effect of lower sales levels, 
depending on management’s assessment of the situation at the 
time. These include adjustments to stock purchases, reducing 
capital expenditure, reductions in headcount or labour usage, 
a reduction in discounts allowed as part of the Group’s loyalty 
scheme and suspending the payment of dividends.

Under the Downside Case scenario, due to the mitigations built into 
the model, the Group’s forecasts show that it will not draw on its 
bank facility. Again, whilst it may not be relevant if the facility is not 
actually required, nevertheless the Downside Case also indicates 
that the financial covenants are complied with.

Having considered the output of the Downside Case and the 
additional mitigating steps available, the Board’s conclusion is that 
the business would continue to have adequate resources to continue 
in operation under this severe but plausible set of assumptions.

Consideration of more severe scenarios
Given the current rate of inflation and its potential impact on 
consumer confidence and spending, the Board believes that 
the Works value proposition positions it well to benefit from any 
tendency consumers may have to trade down in pursuit of better 
value. However, the Board also recognises that more severe 
downside scenarios than those modelled might arise. 

Accordingly, it has considered a range of more severe 
possibilities than are reflected in the Downside Case, including 
a 10% reduction in sales between January 2023 and April 2024 
on the basis that consumers may prioritise Christmas, but cut 
back on spending thereafter if their disposable incomes reduce 
for a sustained period. In these circumstances, in addition to 
the measures included in the Downside Case, further mitigating 
measures would be required and are available, which when 
implemented would generate additional profit and/or cash and 
provide further liquidity headroom and/or further headroom in 
relation to the financial covenants. Such measures could include 
further reductions in capital expenditure and further reductions 
in discretionary expenditure in areas such as travel, training and 
professional fees.

Conclusion regarding viability
The current economic environment, characterised by higher 
inflation than has been experienced for a number of years, and a 
high level of uncertainty about how long the situation will persist 
and whether it will become worse before it improves, creates a 
higher than normal level of uncertainty with regards to the strength 
of consumer spending. However, the Board’s assessment is that, 
despite this, the overall level of risk is not as high as represented 
by COVID-19, which resulted in a complete inability to operate the 
majority of the Group’s business for significant periods of time. The 
resilience demonstrated by the business during those periods, in 
very challenging conditions, provides additional assurance about 
its viability in the event of an extended economic downturn due to 
high inflation etc.

Based on all of the above considerations, the Directors believe that 
the business will remain viable for at least the forecast period.

Chair’s governance introduction

We have continued to 
embed our governance 
arrangements, focusing 
in particular on ensuring 
that the governance 
framework supports the 
delivery of the Company’s 
refreshed strategy.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Dear shareholder,

This is my first Corporate governance report since my appointment 
in September 2021. It covers key developments during the year 
ended 1 May 2022, how our governance framework has operated 
and our plans to evolve our processes in the future.

The Board remains fully committed to implementing the highest 
standards of corporate governance, and I am pleased to report that 
it has applied the principles of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance 
Code in so far as it applies to smaller listed companies (below the 
FTSE 350).

During FY22, our business continued to be disrupted by the 
pandemic. In addition, uncertainty relating to the external 
environment and the resulting impact on consumer spending 
began to affect the rate of sales growth in the second half of 
the year. Towards the end of the year, we also experienced 
some disruption to trading and business operations as a result of 
a cyber-security incident.

The Board has continued to focus on protecting the health 
and safety of our colleagues and customers, whilst ensuring the 
long-term financial security of the business. The Board is extremely 
grateful to all of our colleagues for the patience, hard work and 
commitment they continued to demonstrate during the pandemic. 

During the year we have continued to embed our governance 
arrangements, focusing in particular on ensuring that the 
governance framework supports the delivery of the Company’s 
refreshed strategy. We have also continued to monitor and assess 
the Company’s culture to ensure that it reflects our values and is 
aligned with our strategic ambitions.

During the year our ESG steering group, which is led by our CEO, 
assisted the Board in rigorously monitoring the Company’s ESG 
agenda and associated responsibilities. Information about the ESG 
steering group’s activities during the year, together with an update 
on ESG developments and priorities for the future, are included on 
pages 28 to 38.

Following our annual Board and Committee performance 
evaluation I am pleased to report that overall the evaluation 
found that the Board functions very effectively and a summary 
of the findings and proposed actions can be found on page 52.

We look forward to meeting shareholders at our forthcoming Annual 
General Meeting (AGM), which will be held on 27 October 2022. 
Further details will be set out in the Notice of AGM. 

Carolyn Bradley
Chair
23 September 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

47

 
 
 
Board of Directors

N

R

A

N

R

A

N

R

Carolyn Bradley
Chair and Non-Executive Director

Harry Morley
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Catherine Glickman
Independent Non-Executive Director

Date of appointment
September 2021

Date of appointment
July 2018

Date of appointment
July 2018

Committee membership
Chair of the Nomination Committee and 
member of the Remuneration Committee.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Extensive retail, marketing and 

commercial experience in executive and 
non-executive roles including 25 years at 
Tesco plc where her roles included Group 
Brand Director, UK Marketing Director and 
Chief Operating Officer for Tesco.com.

•  Significant consumer experience 

including leading Tesco’s Clubcard 
loyalty scheme, the ‘Every Little Helps’ 
service campaign and the grocery 
home delivery business. 

Current external appointment
Independent Non-Executive Director 
at B&M European Value Retail S.A. and 
a member of its remuneration committee, 
audit & risk committee and nomination 
committee, as well as designated 
Non-Executive Director for workforce 
engagement. Senior Independent Director 
and Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
of SSP Group plc, Non-Executive Director 
of Majid Al Futtain Retail LLC and The 
Mentoring Foundation and a Trustee 
of Cancer Research UK. 

Committee membership
Chair of the Audit Committee and member 
of the Nomination and Remuneration 
Committees.

Committee membership
Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
and member of the Audit and 
Nomination Committees.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Extensive retail and consumer  

experience, including as co-founder 
of Tragus Holdings Ltd, owner of Café 
Rouge and Bella Italia restaurant 
chains and a Non-Executive Director 
of Bibendum Wine Holdings Ltd.

•  Significant financial and commercial 
expertise as Chief Financial Officer of 
Tragus Holdings Ltd and CEO of Armajaro 
Asset Management LLP. He also held 
senior management roles at P&O.

•  Chartered accountant.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant retail experience as Group HR 
Director of Genus plc, having previously 
held the same role at Tesco plc where she 
led retail management development and 
customer service training during a period 
of significant expansion in the UK and 
overseas. Prior to this she held positions 
at Somerfield and Boots.

•  Extensive people and reward expertise 

having developed reward structures that 
align leadership motivation with strategy 
at both Genus plc and Tesco plc.

Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Audit Committee at JD Wetherspoon plc 
and The Mercantile Investment Trust plc and 
a Trustee of the Ascot Authority. Director of 
Cadogan Group Limited and two related 
subsidiary companies. 

Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee at Renishaw plc.

48

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Committee membership

A

N

R

Audit Committee

Nomination Committee

Remuneration Committee

Chair of Committee

Experience

Retail 

Consumer

Finance

PLC

100%

100%

100%

60%

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Tenure

20%

  1–3 years 

  0–1 years 

  3–5 years 

2020+
40%6060+

Gender 

  Female 

  Male  

40%

40%

60%

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer

Date of appointment
January 2020

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Date of appointment
May 2021

Committee membership
None

Committee membership
None

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant financial, retail and 

commercial expertise, including as Chief 
Financial Officer of The Works, and, prior 
to that, as Commercial Director at Card 
Factory plc where he was responsible for 
the commercial function (buying, space 
and merchandising) and leadership of 
the commercial finance team. He played 
a key role in the successful IPO of Card 
Factory in 2014 and its subsequent 
growth and evolution as a listed business.

•  Chartered Accountant, having started 
his career at PwC where he spent eight 
years working in the audit and corporate 
finance departments.

•  Joined The Works as CFO in April 2018, 
overseeing the IPO and serving as an 
executive director of TheWorks.co.uk plc 
since the IPO in July 2018.

Current external appointments
None

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant financial and retail expertise 
having initially joined The Works on an 
interim basis as CFO in June 2020. Prior 
to that, over 20 years’ experience of 
working in retail, most recently as CFO 
of Bonmarché Holdings plc, where he 
led a highly effective finance function, 
and completed several significant 
transactions, including a private equity 
backed management buyout, and 
two stock market listings. Previously he 
worked at Peacocks, the discount retailer, 
and chartered accountants EY.

•  Chartered accountant.

Current external appointments
None

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

49

+
40
40
+
+
40
40
+
+
N
N
+
40
40
+
+
N
N
 
 
 
Corporate governance report

UK Corporate Governance Code – compliance statement
The Company has applied all of the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) as they apply to it as a ‘smaller 
company’ (below FTSE 350) and has complied with all relevant provisions of the Code during the year. Full details of the Code are 
available at www.frc.org.uk. Details explaining how the Company has applied the principles of the Code can be found throughout 
this Annual Report.

Governance structure

Board

•  Overall leadership of the Group.
•  Oversight of systems of internal control, risk management 

and corporate governance.

•  Sets strategy, purpose, values and culture.
•  Approves major contracts.
•  Approves business plan and budget.

The Board has delegated a number of its responsibilities to the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee and Remuneration 
Committee. Each Committees’ terms of reference and the Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board, are available at 
https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/corporate-governance.

Audit Committee

Nomination Committee

Remuneration Committee

•  Reviews annual and interim 

financial statements.

• 

Identifies and nominates appointments 
to the Board.

•  Reviews accounting policies and financial 

reporting and regulatory compliance.

•  Reviews internal control system.
•  Monitors processes for internal audit, risk 

management and external audit.

•  Monitors independence of external and 

internal auditors.

•  Oversees relationship with external auditor.

•  Reviews NED time commitments.
•  Oversees succession planning.
•  Reviews size and composition of 

the Board.

•  Promotes diversity.
•  Responsible for undertaking annual 
performance evaluation of the Board, 
its Committees and individual Directors.

•  Sets Remuneration Policy.
•  Determines Executive Director and 
senior management remuneration.
•  Approves annual bonus plan and 

Long-Term Incentive Scheme targets.

•  Reviews workforce remuneration 

policies and practices.

•  Ensures that provisions regarding 

disclosure of remuneration are fulfilled.

Reporting to the CEO, responsible for the day-to-day trading activities of the Group and implementing the strategy agreed by the 
Board. Monitors performance against financial and operational targets and manages risk. Information about the Operations Board 
is available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership.

Operations Board

Role of the Board and how it operates
The Board’s role is to provide overall entrepreneurial leadership, 
setting the Group’s strategy, purpose, values and culture, and 
supporting the Executive Directors in the delivery of that strategy. 
The Board is also responsible for ensuring that appropriate policies, 
procedures and controls are in place to support effective risk 
management and performance against agreed financial and 
operational metrics.

Certain matters, including decisions relating to the strategic 
direction of the Group, changes to capital, corporate or 
management structure, approving financial reports, and approval 
of capital expenditure over agreed limits, are reserved to the Board 
and formally documented in a Schedule of Matters Reserved to the 
Board (see above) which is reviewed annually.

The Board meets at least ten times per year, and its activity at 
each meeting is planned in accordance with a formal schedule 
of activity approved by the Board. This ensures that it receives 
appropriate information at the appropriate time, and that all 
key operational, financial reporting and governance matters are 
discussed during the year. In addition to standing items, agendas 
incorporate sufficient flexibility to allow specific areas of focus to 
be considered as and when required. The schedule includes regular 
presentations from Operations Board members on specific areas 
of their responsibility, which assists the Non-Executive Directors’ 
understanding of the day-to-day operations of different functions 
of the Group.

A detailed pack is prepared and circulated in advance of each 
meeting which includes updates from the CEO, CFO and other 

50

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Operations Board members tracking performance against agreed 
key performance indicators. These reports also set out current 
areas of focus, and highlight any specific issues requiring further 
discussion or debate by the Board. The Company Secretary also 
prepares a report for each Board meeting covering matters such 
as forthcoming scheduled announcements and closed periods, the 
operation of the Company’s Share Dealing Code and regulatory 
or legislative developments which may impact the Company.

Roles and responsibilities
Chair and CEO
The Chair is responsible for leading the Board’s discussions, 
ensuring its effectiveness and promoting an open forum for debate 
and constructive relations between Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors. The Chair holds meetings with the Non-Executive 
Directors without the Executive Directors present. 

There is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chair 
and the CEO, with the purpose of each role clearly defined in 
their respective letter of appointment and service agreement. 
The CEO reports to the Board, and is responsible for all executive 
management matters of the Group.

Non-Executives
The Non-Executive Directors are all independent and provide 
constructive challenge to management, helping to develop 
proposals on strategy, and providing advice and support based 
on their experience in both executive and non-executive roles 
throughout their careers.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Senior Independent Director
Harry Morley is the Senior Independent Director, and in that 
role, acts as a sounding board for the Chair and is available 
to shareholders if they have concerns which contact through 
the normal channels of the CEO or Chair has failed to resolve. 
He also leads the annual evaluation of the Chair’s performance. 

Board Committees
In line with recognised governance practice, the Board has 
established three Board Committees (Audit, Nomination and 
Remuneration). Each Committee has its own terms of reference 
which are approved by the Board and are reviewed annually. 
Membership of the Committees is determined by the Board, on 
recommendations from the Nomination Committee. Details of the 
role, composition and activities of each Committee during the year 
are set out in their respective reports on pages 54, 58 and 60. 

Operations Board
The Executive Directors are supported in their day-to-day 
management of the business by an experienced Operations Board. 

Company Secretary
The Company Secretary supports the Board and each of the 
three Board Committees, and is in attendance at all meetings. 
The Company Secretary is available to all the Directors to advise 
on company law, governance and best practice, whilst assisting 
the Board in ensuring that the correct policies, processes and 
information are tabled for discussion, noting or approval at the 
correct point in time throughout the year.

Composition, independence and attendance
During FY22, the Board comprised five Directors (including the 
Chair). Having considered circumstances which are likely to impair 
a Non-Executive directors’ independence, it has been determined 
that both of the Non-Executive Directors (Catherine Glickman 
and Harry Morley) continue to be independent. The Chair (Carolyn 
Bradley) was independent on appointment. The Company has 
therefore complied with provision 11 of the Code throughout 
the year, with at least half of the Board (excluding the Chair) 
comprising independent Non-Executive Directors. 

Individual Director attendance at scheduled Board and Committee 
meetings (where they are a member) is set out in the table below: 

Director

Dean Hoyle1 
(stepped down 
from the Board on 
30 September 2021)

Carolyn Bradley 
(appointed to 
the Board on 
30 September 2021)

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge 
(appointed to 
the Board on 
14 May 2021)

Catherine Glickman

Harry Morley

Board
meetings
held/
attended

Audit
Committees
held/
attended

Remuneration
Committees
held/
attended

Nomination
Committees
held/
attended

1/3

N/A

N/A

0/1

8/8

11/11

11/11

11/11

11/11

N/A

N/A

N/A

3/3

3/3

2/2

N/A

N/A

5/5

5/5

1/1

N/A 

N/A

2/2 

2/2

1 

 Dean Hoyle was unable to attend two Board meetings due to other 
commitments arising, and recused himself from the Nomination 
Committee which was evaluating his successor.

All Directors are expected to attend all meetings of the Board 
and any Committees of which they are members, and to devote 
sufficient time to the Company’s affairs to fulfil their duties as 
Directors. The Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment 
anticipate that each Non-Executive Director will need to commit 
a minimum of two days per month to the Company but clarify 
that more time may be required. In addition, the Non-Executive 
Directors are expected to commit appropriate preparation time 
ahead of each meeting.

Where Directors are unable to attend a meeting, they are 
encouraged to submit any comments on papers or matters 
to be discussed to the Chair in advance to ensure that their 
views are recorded and taken into account during the meeting.

Key activities during the year
The Board met formally on 11 scheduled occasions during the 
year. With the relaxing of pandemic restrictions, the Board was 
able to resume scheduled meetings in person and also site visits 
to Rushden Lakes in May 2021 and Merry Hill in November 2021. 
The Rushden Lakes visit included an update on retail and store 
strategy. At the end of March 2022 and in early April 2022, the 
Board held five additional meetings at short notice to address 
the issues arising from the cyber-security incident that affected 
the Company’s systems.

The standing agenda for each scheduled Board meeting 
includes updates from the CEO and CFO on trading and financial 
performance, an investor relations update and an update on 
governance from the Company Secretary. In addition, the Board 
has also received regular presentations from members of the 
Operations Board covering updates on a range of topics including 
brand proposition, supply chain challenges, e-commerce and 
electric point of sales technology, property, people and IT 
strategy. These Operations Board presentations ensure that the 
Non-Executive Directors are informed of key operational initiatives 
and challenges, and provide the opportunity for senior executives 
to meet and discuss their areas of responsibility with the Board.

During the year the Board, has, as part of its annual 
governance programme:

•  reviewed the Company’s delegated authority limits;
•  reviewed the Group risk register and internal controls structure;
•  reviewed and approved the FY23 budget;
•  reviewed its Schedule of Matters Reserved and the Terms 

of Reference of the Board Committees;

•  received an update on Company culture and reviewed 
a summary of key workforce policies and procedures;

•  reviewed various governance policies, including the Disclosure 
Policy, Whistleblowing Policy, Share Dealing Code and Board 
Diversity Policy;

•  reviewed and approved the half-year and full-year 

financial statements;

•  reviewed the results of the Board evaluation and employee 

engagement survey;

•  considered and agreed a presentation from the ESG steering 
group on the proposed approach to a number of ESG matters.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

51

 
 
 
Corporate governance report continued

Training and development
A full, formal and tailored induction programme has been 
developed for any new Directors joining the Board. The Company 
Secretary ensures that the Board is briefed on forthcoming 
legal and regulatory developments, as well as developments in 
corporate governance best practice, and Directors are expected 
to keep themselves appraised of developments relevant to the 
Company’s business.

Evaluation and effectiveness
During the year, a formal internal performance evaluation 
was conducted for the Board and each of its Committees. 
The evaluation was conducted using questionnaires and 
was facilitated by the Company Secretary. The evaluation’s key 
findings were discussed at the Board’s meeting on 1 July 2022.

Overall the evaluation process found that the Board functions very 
effectively, relationships are good, all Directors contribute fully and 
discussions are constructive. In particular the Board’s response 
to the recent cyber-security incident was felt to have been robust 
and effective. Other key matters arising from the evaluation are 
set out in the table below.

Key matter

Purpose, values 
and strategy

Actions
•  Develop an overall execution plan 
encompassing all elements of the 
Company’s strategy. 

•  Create a dashboard to monitor and 

measure progress against relevant KPIs.

Stakeholders 

•  Build on recent good stakeholder 

engagement with both colleagues 
and shareholders. 

•  Develop and support the Company’s ESG 
programme, at Board and executive level, 
recognising that the programme requires  
more definition and data provision.

•  Ensure executive time is not taken 

up preparing reports for limited use.

•  Taking account of the Board’s detailed 
review of the internal control structure, 
the Operational Board to consider the 
implementation of further processes and the 
necessary level of internal audit support. 

Board dialogue, 
relationships 
and quality of 
discussion 

Risk and internal 
controls, and 
internal audit

The Board and 
succession

• 

Increase Nomination Committee focus 
on succession planning at Board and 
executive levels.

•  Create more opportunities for the Board to 

meet rising stars and future executive leaders. 

Information and support
Agendas and accompanying papers are distributed to the 
Board and Committee members well in advance of each Board 
or Committee meeting. Where necessary, separate papers are 
prepared to support specific matters requiring Board decision 
or approval (for example capital expenditure projects), and the 
Non-Executives provide ongoing feedback to the CEO and CFO 
on the content of papers to ensure they continue to support 
effective debate and decision making by the Board.

All Directors have direct access to the Operational Board 
members and other senior managers should they require additional 
information on any of the items to be discussed. The Board and 
the Audit Committee also receive regular and specific reports to 
allow the monitoring of the adequacy of the Company’s systems 
of internal control.

Minutes of all Board and Committee meetings are taken by the 
Company Secretary and circulated to Directors for approval as 
soon as practicable following the meetings. Specific actions arising 
from meetings are recorded both in the minutes and on separate 
action logs, thereby facilitating the effective communication 
of actions to those responsible and allowing the Board to 
monitor progress.

Appointment and election
The Board considers all Directors to be effective and committed 
to their roles and to have sufficient time to perform their duties. 
Having been appointed by the Board since the last AGM, Carolyn 
Bradley will stand for appointment by shareholders at the 2022 
AGM for the first time. In accordance with the Company’s Articles 
of Association (articles), all other members of the Board will be 
offering themselves for reappointment at the Company’s AGM 
on 27 October 2022. 

All of the Directors have service agreements or letters of 
appointment and the details of their terms are set out below.

Executive Director service contracts

Name

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Date of
service
agreement

Notice 
period by 
Company
(months)

Notice 
period by
 Director
(months)

Position

CEO 19 July 2018

CFO 14 May 2021

12

6

12

6

The Non-Executive Directors (including the Chair) do not have service 
contracts, but are instead appointed by letters of appointment. 
Each of the Non-Executive Directors and the Chair are appointed 
for a three-year term, subject to their annual reappointment by 
shareholders at the AGM.

Non-Executive Director appointments

Name

Date of
appointment

Appointment letter 
commencement 
date

Unexpired
 term as at 27
October 2022

Carolyn Bradley

30 September 
2021

30 September 
2021

23 months

Catherine Glickman

19 July 2018

26 July 2022

33 months

Harry Morley

19 July 2018

26 July 2022

33 months

52

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

The Board received regular updates on colleague engagement 
activity through Operational Board reports. The Board also 
reviewed and discussed the results of the annual employee 
engagement survey, and management’s feedback on the survey’s 
key findings was sought and discussed by the Board. As part of its 
review of Code compliance during the year, the Board assessed 
the various methods by which the Directors engage with the wider 
workforce. The Board agreed that the combination of the methods 
described on page 53 ensures that the Board is appropriately 
informed about, and understands, workforce views, and therefore 
this approach continues to appropriately address the requirement 
to engage with the workforce under provision 5 of the Code. 
The Board does not currently intend to adopt one of the three 
workforce engagement methods suggested in that provision, 
but will continue to monitor its workforce (and wider stakeholder) 
engagement mechanisms to ensure they operate effectively.

Relations with shareholders
The Board recognises the importance of explaining financial 
results and key strategic and operational developments in the 
business to the Company’s shareholders, and of understanding 
any shareholder concerns. 

Ensuring a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders and receiving 
reports on the views of shareholders are matters reserved for the 
Board. Day-to-day responsibility for investor relations is delegated 
to the CEO and the CFO, who are supported by the Company’s 
retained financial PR advisers, and its corporate brokers. As part 
of its investor relations programme, the Group aims to maintain 
a dialogue with its shareholders, including institutional investors, 
to discuss issues relating to the performance of the Group. 
Information and investor news is also made available via the 
Company’s website (https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/investors). 
In April 2022, the Board met with Investec, the Company’s 
lead brokers, to discuss the development of a more proactive 
shareholder engagement programme.

The Non-Executive Directors are available to discuss any matters 
shareholders might wish to raise. Shortly after her appointment 
the Chair contacted lead shareholders and offered a meeting. 
The Chair and independent Non-Executive Directors also attend 
meetings with investors and analysts as required. Investor relations 
activity is a standing item on the Board’s agenda.

The Company’s AGM will take place at 9am on 27 October 2022 
at Boldmere House, Faraday Avenue, Hams Hall Distribution Park, 
Coleshill, Birmingham B46 1AL. This Annual Report and financial 
statements and Notice of the AGM will be made available to 
shareholders in accordance with the required notice periods.

Conflicts of interest
The Company’s Articles set out the policy for dealing with 
Directors’ conflicts of interest and are in line with the Companies 
Act 2006. The Articles permit the Board to authorise conflicts and 
potential conflicts, as long as the potentially conflicted Director 
is not counted in the quorum and does not vote on the resolution 
to authorise. 

The Board operates a procedure under which Directors are 
required to immediately notify the Company Secretary when a 
conflict or potential conflict arises in order that Board authorisation 
can be sought. If the Board determines that a conflict or potential 
conflict can be authorised, it may impose additional conditions 
to manage such conflicts of interest. The procedure is in place 
to ensure that independent judgement is maintained at all times 
and that Directors are not affected by the influence of third parties, 
and that any conflicts arising from significant shareholdings are 
managed appropriately. 

In addition, Directors are reminded at the beginning of each 
Board meeting to notify the Board of any further conflicts of 
interest in accordance with Sections 175, 177 and 182 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Whistleblowing
The Company has adopted procedures by which colleagues may, 
in confidence, raise concerns relating to possible improprieties 
in matters of financial reporting, financial control or any other 
matter. The Whistleblowing Policy applies to all colleagues 
across the Group. The Board is responsible for monitoring the 
Group’s whistleblowing arrangements and reviewed the policy 
and arrangements in April 2022. Whilst the Board is satisfied 
that the arrangements are effective, facilitating the appropriate 
investigation of reported matters, it is seeking to further enhance 
the Whistleblowing Policy in FY23.

Stakeholder engagement
The CEO and Operational Board members are responsible for the 
day-to-day management of stakeholder relationships and to 
ensuring that stakeholder issues are appropriately reported to the 
Board. Further information on how we engage with stakeholders 
is set out on pages 24 and 25. The Directors recognise their duty 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act to consider the interests 
of stakeholders, and the nature of our business means that the 
interests of our colleagues, customers and suppliers are at the front 
of mind in the Board’s decision-making process. The Company’s 
Section 172 statement is included on page 26.

Engagement with the workforce
During the year, the Board devoted significant time to considering 
colleagues’ safety and wellbeing. The Board also continue to 
monitor the Company’s culture. 

The Board recognises that the Company’s culture underpins its 
long-term success. Accordingly, assessing and monitoring the 
culture that is being fostered across the Group forms part of 
the Board’s activity schedule. In addition, during the year the 
Board undertook a formal review of the Company’s culture, and 
in particular how culture supports the retention of hard working, 
customer centric colleagues. It also reviewed a number of 
workforce policies. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

53

 
 
 
Audit Committee report
Chair of the Audit Committee’s letter to shareholders

Dear shareholder,
I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s report for 
the 52-week period ended 1 May 2022. The report sets out the 
Committee’s work in relation to financial reporting, internal 
control and audit, risk management and oversight of the 
external audit process.

The Committee’s role is to assist the Board with the discharge 
of its responsibilities in relation to external audit, monitoring the 
Group’s arrangements for internal audit, reviewing the Group’s 
annual financial statements, considering the scope of the audit 
and the extent of any non-audit work undertaken by the external 
auditor, advising on the appointment of the external auditor and 
reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control systems. 

Our main activities in the year have included a review of the 
half-year and full-year financial statements and the Annual 
Report, reviewing the Group’s systems of internal control and 
risk management, and considering the reports of the Company’s 
external auditor. 

Significant accounting judgements and policies
The significant accounting judgements identified by management 
and reviewed with the external auditor were discussed by the Audit 
Committee at our meetings on 31 March 2022 and 8 September 
2022. Details of the significant judgements and how they have 
been addressed are set out below.

Risk management and internal control
The Committee continued to review the effectiveness of the 
Group’s internal control systems and risk management processes, 
taking into account developments during the year which are 
described below. Following the review the Committee concluded 
such systems and processes are effective. They identified some 
areas of improvement which management are addressing, the 
most significant of which are described below. The committee also 
concluded that, with the support of specialist independent advice 
as required, the establishment of a permanent internal audit 
function is not currently required. This will continue to be reviewed 
on an ongoing basis as the business evolves.

External auditor
The Committee has reviewed the effectiveness of the FY21 
external audit process, and our external auditor’s (KPMG LLP) 
independence, and following that review the Committee has 
recommended that KPMG LLP be reappointed as the Company’s 
auditor at the forthcoming AGM.

We have monitored the level of non-audit services provided 
by KPMG (described on page 57), and confirm that all non-audit 
services provided were in line with our policy.

Harry Morley
Chair of the Audit Committee
23 September 2022

Harry Morley
Chair of the Audit Committee

Other member:
Catherine Glickman (member since September 2018)

“ The Committee supports the 
Board in discharging its duties 
in relation to various matters 
including financial reporting 
and risk management.”

54

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Composition of committee
The members of the Committee are Harry Morley and 
Catherine Glickman.

Harry Morley is a qualified chartered accountant, has an 
executive background in finance roles and is an experienced 
Audit Committee Chair. The Board is therefore satisfied that Harry 
has recent and relevant financial experience as recommended 
under provision 24 of the Code. The Board is also satisfied that 
the Committee as a whole has competence relevant to the sector 
in which the Company operates, with both Committee members 
having experience as directors in the retail and leisure sectors.

Further biographical information about the Committee members is 
included on pages 48 and 49.

Role and responsibilities
The Audit Committee’s role and responsibilities are summarised on 
page 50 and in its terms of reference which are available on the 
Company’s website at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-
are/corporate-governance.

Meetings and attendees
The Committee met on four occasions during the year, and has 
met twice since the year end. All meetings were attended by all 
members of the Committee as shown in the table on page 51.

Activity during the year
During the year the Committee has:

•  considered the impact on the business of the 

COVID-19 pandemic;

•  considered the findings of a detailed risk review exercise 

undertaken by the Head of Finance and, in light of this, reviewed 
the Group’s principal risks and the appropriateness of the 
approach to managing them;

•  considered the treatment of asset impairments in light of the 

COVID-19 pandemic;

•  considered the requirement for an internal audit function.
•  reviewed the scenario analysis in support of the going concern 

assessment and long-term viability statement;

•  monitored the application of the Group’s policy on the provision 

of non-audit services by the external auditor.;

•  reviewed the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control and risk 

management systems;

•  reviewed the half-year financial statements, and this Annual 
Report and financial statements, and recommended their 
approval by the Board;

•  reviewed the effectiveness of the external auditor; and
•  reviewed the Committee’s terms of reference to ensure they 

remain in line with the Code and associated guidance.

The external auditor has the right to attend meetings, and other 
Directors and members of the management team may attend 
by invitation. Outside of the formal meeting programme, the 
Audit Committee Chair maintains a dialogue with key individuals 
involved in the Company’s governance, including the Chair, the 
CEO, the CFO, and the external auditor. At least twice per year, the 
Committee also meets the external auditor without members of the 
management team present.

Significant issues considered in relation to the 
financial statements
Significant issues and accounting judgements are identified by 
the finance team and through the external audit process and are 
reviewed by the Audit Committee. The significant issues considered 
by the Committee in respect of the year ended 1 May 2022 are set 
out in the table below.

Significant issues 
and judgements

Going concern

How the issues were addressed

The Committee considered the appropriateness of applying the Going Concern convention. The risk of weaker 
consumer demand was considered to be the factor requiring the greatest degree of judgement relating to the 
going concern assessment. The Committee concluded that the potential adverse impact on trading from a further 
reduction in demand is expected to be less than the impact of the full national lockdowns which were experienced 
during periods of the COVID-19 pandemic.

Valuation of inventory

The committee reviewed the results of a large sample of 4-wall store stock counts performed at year end and 
considered the judgement surrounding the estimation of error rates across the stock records. The Committee also 
considered the reasonableness of the provisions for stock obsolescence.

Carrying value of Parent 
Company investments

A degree of judgement was required to assess the carrying value of parent company investments in its subsidiary 
companies, particularly given the currently large disparity between the properly estimated value in use, and the 
Group’s market capitalisation.

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for setting the Group’s risk 
appetite and ensuring that there is an effective risk management 
framework to maintain levels of risk within the risk appetite. 
The Board has delegated responsibility for review of the risk 
management methodology and effectiveness of internal control 
to the Audit Committee. 

During the year the Audit Committee and the Board have reviewed 
the Group’s risk register, and challenged management on the 
classification of risks and the mitigations in place. In the second half 
of FY22,  a full risk register analysis was undertaken by the Head of 
Finance which was presented to the Committee in January 2022. 
This enabled the Committee to reassess the principal risks facing 
the Group, which informed its year-end review of principal risks and 

uncertainties prior to making its recommendation to the Board. 
Further details of the Group’s risk management approach, structure 
and principal risks are set out on pages 39 to 44.

The Group’s system of internal control comprises entity-wide high-
level controls, controls over business processes and store-level 
controls. Policies and procedures and defined levels of delegated 
authority have been approved and communicated across the 
Group, and include an Internal Control Framework, corporate risk 
register, business continuity plan and IT system policies. These 
are supplemented by other policies and procedures which are 
communicated to colleagues through the employee handbook.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

55

 
 
 
•  Following a cyber-security incident in March 2022, the Committee 
approved the engagement of specialist independent advisers to 
review the Group’s existing IT security plans, arrangements and 
controls, and make recommendations as appropriate. This review 
generally endorsed the Group’s existing plans, and made useful 
additional recommendations, as well as providing advice as to 
the method of implementation. As a result, the Committee has 
gained valuable assurance as to the adequacy of the Group’s 
enhanced protections and controls following the incident.
•  To support the work of the Profit Protection Manager, and to 

increase the Group’s capacity generally for carrying out process 
reviews and implementing improvements as well as reviewing 
the effectiveness of internal controls, the Group has recently 
appointed a suitably qualified and experienced individual to 
establish an in-house process/control improvement function 
within the finance team.

Internal audit
The review of the Company’s risk register referred to above 
enabled the Committee to assess the need for external support 
in carrying out reviews of priority areas. As highlighted above, the 
Committee approved the engagement of specialist independent 
advisers to review and make recommendations in relation to 
certain IT matters, and the Group has also recently created a 
dedicated function within its finance team to review systems and 
processes, oversee and/or implement improvements and review 
internal controls.

The Committee is satisfied that the continued targeted use of 
specialist independent advisers to review priority areas of focus 
has effectively supported the existing internal resource during 
FY22. Noting also the additional internal resources the Group 
has engaged to support process/control improvements, the 
Committee has concluded that the arrangements for reviewing 
and monitoring internal controls are adequate and that there 
is no current requirement for the establishment of a permanent 
dedicated internal audit function.

Audit Committee report continued

Risk management and internal control continued
Management has identified the key operational and financial 
processes which exist and implemented internal controls over 
these processes in addition to the higher level review and 
authorisation-based controls. These policies are designed to 
ensure the accuracy and reliability of financial reporting and 
govern the preparation of the financial statements. The Board is 
ultimately responsible for the Group’s system of internal controls 
and risk management and discharges its duties in this area by:

•  holding regular Board meetings to consider the matters reserved 

for its consideration;

•  receiving regular management reports which provide an 

assessment of key risks and controls;

•  scheduling periodic Board reviews of strategy including reviews 

of the material risks and uncertainties facing the business;
•  ensuring there is an organisational structure with defined 

responsibilities and levels of authority;

•  ensuring there are documented policies and procedures in 

place; and

•  regularly reviewing reports containing detailed information 

regarding financial performance, forecasts, actual and forecast 
bank covenant compliance and financial and non-financial KPIs.

In reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal controls, 
the Audit Committee:

•  reviews the risk register compiled and maintained by senior 
managers within the Group and questions and challenges 
where necessary; and

•  regularly reviews the system of financial and accounting controls.

The Audit Committee, on behalf of the Board, has reviewed the 
effectiveness of the internal control systems and risk management 
processes in place, taking account of any material developments 
since the year end. We would highlight the following as a result 
of this ongoing process of review:

• 

It was noted in last year’s Audit Committee report that the 
process for counting stock in stores had been interrupted during 
FY21 due to the periods of enforced store closures resulting 
from the pandemic. In January 2022, the Company employed 
a Profit Protection Manager, part of whose role encompasses 
the monitoring and review of processes to improve operational 
controls and reduce losses. The Audit Committee approved a 
proposal by the Profit Protection Manager to engage a third 
party (Retail and Asset Solutions) to advise on the process and 
count stock in a significant sample of stores prior to the year 
end, to increase assurance as to the integrity and robustness of 
the results. Accordingly, a programme was undertaken to count 
stock in 125 stores. During FY23 this programme will be expanded 
to cover the Group’s entire store estate and will be undertaken 
on a rolling basis, with a risk based approach being used to 
target additional follow up counts.

56

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

The external auditor may not be engaged to provide non-audit 
services which have been identified as ’prohibited’ in accordance 
with legislative and regulatory requirements.

During the year, the only non-audit services which KPMG has been 
engaged to carry out relate to the issuance of turnover certificates 
for a small number of stores where the terms of the lease require 
them to be independently verified. The fees paid to KPMG LLP in 
respect of these services totalled £ 1k, representing 0.7% of the 
total audit fee. Further detail is included in Note 7 to the financial 
statements on page 104.

External audit effectiveness
During the year, the Audit Committee reviewed the external 
auditor’s effectiveness in carrying out the FY21 year-end audit and 
concluded that the audit process had been carried out effectively. 
The Committee will formally review the effectiveness of the FY22 
audit process during FY23.

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Board and its 
Committees during the year was conducted using questionnaires 
and was facilitated by the Company Secretary. The questionnaires 
included a section on the work of the Committee. The key findings 
of the evaluation are set out on page 52.

Harry Morley
Chair of the Audit Committee
23 September 2022

External auditor
The Audit Committee is responsible for overseeing the Group’s 
relationship with its external auditor, KPMG LLP. This includes 
the ongoing assessment of the auditor’s independence and 
the effectiveness of the external audit process, the results of 
which inform the Committee’s recommendation to the Board as 
to the auditor’s appointment (subject to shareholder approval) 
or otherwise.

Appointment and tenure
KPMG was appointed as the Company’s external auditor in 2018. 
The current lead audit partner, Tony Sykes, was appointed ahead 
of the FY19 audit process and will retire from the firm prior to the 
FY23 audit. To ensure an orderly succession, the Committee has 
met with Gordon Docherty, the audit partner who will (subject to 
shareholder approval of KPMG’s reappointment) take over from 
Tony Sykes, following the conclusion of the FY22 audit.

KPMG generally requires the rotation of the lead audit partner 
every five years for a listed client. This requirement will not now 
manifest itself until after the FY27 audit. In addition to KPMG’s 
internal guidelines and, in accordance with the Code and EU 
legislation, the Audit Committee intends to put the external audit 
out to tender at least every ten years.

Non-audit services
The engagement of the external audit firm to provide non-audit 
services to the Group can impact on the independence assessment. 
The Company has therefore adopted a policy which requires Audit 
Committee approval for any permitted non-audit services, except 
for permitted non-audit services with a fee of less than £5k on 
an individual basis or £20k on an aggregated basis for which the 
Audit Committee has pre-approved the use of the external auditor, 
subject to approval of the service by the CFO.

When reviewing requests for non-audit services the Audit 
Committee will assess:

•  whether the provision of such services impairs the auditor’s 

independence or objectivity and any safeguards in place to 
eliminate or reduce such threats;
•  the nature of the non-audit services;
•  whether the skills and experience make the auditor the most 

suitable supplier of the non-audit service;

•  the fee to be incurred for non-audit services, both for individual 
non-audit services and in aggregate, relative to the Group 
audit fee; and

•  the criteria which govern the compensation of the individuals 

performing the audit.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

57

 
 
 
Nomination Committee report
Chair of the Nomination Committee’s letter to shareholders

Dear shareholder,
Over the past 12 months, there have been a number of changes 
at both Board and senior executive levels within The Works. 

I was delighted to be appointed Chair of the Board and the 
Nomination Committee in September 2021. I would like to thank 
Harry Morley, who was the Chair of the Nomination Committee 
from the Company’s IPO until this year, for his leadership of the 
Committee during this time. Harry took on the role as Chair of 
the Committee at IPO as our then Board Chair (Dean Hoyle) was 
not deemed independent under the Code. As I was deemed to 
be independent on my appointment as Board Chair, the Board 
agreed it was appropriate for me to also chair the Nomination 
Committee in line with typical practice for listed Companies of our 
size. I am grateful that Harry, along with Catherine Glickman, the 
Committee’s other member, are continuing as Committee members 
and thank them both for their support. 

This report summarises the work of the Nomination Committee 
during the year. Whilst, in conjunction with our CEO, Gavin Peck, 
we have established a strong Board and senior leadership team 
to drive the Group’s growth and development in the coming years, 
there is still work to be done, particularly in relation to diversity and 
this will be a focus for the Committee in the next 12 months. 

Carolyn Bradley
Chair of the Nomination Committee
23 September 2022

Carolyn Bradley
Chair since 30 September 2021

Other members: 
Catherine Glickman (member since September 2018)

Harry Morley (Chair until 30 September 2021 and member 
since September 2018)

“ Whilst we have established 
a strong leadership team 
there is still work to be done, 
particularly in relation to 
diversity, and this will be a 
focus in the next 12 months.”

58

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Composition of the Committee
The members of the Committee are Carolyn Bradley, Catherine 
Glickman and Harry Morley.

The biographies of the Committee members are included 
on page 48.

Role and responsibilities
The role and responsibilities of the Committee are summarised 
on pages 50 to 51 and in its terms of reference which are available 
on the Company’s website at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/
who-we-are/corporate-governance.

Meetings and attendees
The Committee meets at least once per year and otherwise as 
required in order to discharge its duties. Only members of the 
Committee have the right to attend meetings, but the CEO and 
People Director are typically invited to attend at least part of each 
meeting, particularly when executive succession planning is being 
discussed and other workforce related matters. Other Directors, 
executives or advisers may be invited to attend all or part of any 
meeting as appropriate.

The Committee met twice during the year. Individual attendance 
at the meetings is set out in the table on page 51. The meetings 
covered a number of matters including reviewing the composition 
of the Board and Board succession planning, but primarily focused 
on the recruitment of a new Board Chair. The Committee also 
reviewed the Board Diversity Policy.

Appointment of Chair
During the summer of 2021, the Chair of the Nomination Committee 
(at that time), Harry Morley, led the process to recruit a new Chair 
of the Board to succeed Dean Hoyle, who had announced his 
intention to step down having been Chair since 2014. Mr Hoyle 
recused himself from the Nomination Committee’s activities during 
this period. The search was undertaken by Odgers Berndtson 
(Odgers), which has have no other relationship with the Company. 
The aim of the process was to bring in a new independent 
Non-Executive Director with strong experience in the retail sector, 
particularly in brand and customer proposition, as well as solid 
listed company board experience. 

As a result of the search process, Odgers complied a long-list of 
candidates which was considered by the Committee. Following 
consideration and discussion the Committee agreed on a short-list 
of candidates who subsequently met with members of the Committee 
and the CEO and CFO. Following these meetings and further 
discussions, the Committee recommended my appointment to the 
Board, which was approved by the Board in July 2021.

Succession planning
Board and senior management succession planning remains on 
the Committee’s rolling agenda and will continue to be considered 
on a regular basis. 

During the year, the Committee monitored a number of changes 
in the Operating Board. Now that the team is established, during 
the coming year it will begin to focus on talent development.

Diversity
The Board recognises the importance of diversity, including gender 
diversity. While it believes that all appointments should be made 
on merit, the Board recognises the need to ensure an appropriate 
balance of skills and experience within the Board and across 
the Company. 

The Board supports the measures the Financial Conduct Authority 
(FCA) has introduced to enhance transparency in relation to 
diversity. As at 1 May 2022 the proportion of women on the Board 
was 40% (in line with the FCA’s target) and the proportion of men 
60%. Carolyn Bradley’s appointment as Chair already aligns 
the Company with the FCA’s target of at least one senior board 
position being held by a woman. 

Women made up 33% of the Group’s senior management team 
as at 1 May 2022.

The Committee is responsible for monitoring compliance with the 
objectives of the Company’s Diversity Policy. The Policy recognises 
the benefits of greater diversity, including gender diversity and 
sets out the Board’s commitment to ensuring that the Company’s 
Directors bring a wide range of skills, knowledge, experience, 
backgrounds and perspectives to the Group. Its key objective 
is to ensure that the recruitment processes that the Nomination 
Committee oversees considers an appropriately diverse pool 
of candidates that will enhance the Board’s balance of skills 
and backgrounds. 

As part of its commitment to diversity, the Company has signed up 
to the British Retail Council Diversity and Inclusion Charter. During 
the year the Board also agreed to further increase the focus on 
diversity across the business. In the coming year, the Committee 
will review the ethnic diversity of the Board and the senior 
management team and develop a programme of initiatives to 
promote greater ethnic diversity at senior levels across the Group, 
including the appointment of at least one Director from an ethnic 
minority background.

Other matters considered
Other than for the appointment of Carolyn Bradley as Chair 
(described above), there has been no formal Board recruitment 
process during the year. 

The Code also places other responsibilities and objectives on the 
Committee, including an annual review of the structure, size and 
composition of the Board and an annual review of the Board’s 
Diversity Policy. Both of these matters were addressed at the 
Committee’s meeting in April 2022.

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the Committee’s performance in 2022 was 
conducted by the Board using questionnaires and was facilitated 
by the Company Secretary. The questionnaires included a section 
on the work of the Committee. The key findings of the evaluation 
are set out on page 52.

Carolyn Bradley
Chair of the Nomination Committee
23 September 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

59

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report
Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s letter to shareholders 

Dear shareholder,
As Chair of the Remuneration Committee, I present our Directors’ 
remuneration report for FY22.

This year’s report consists of this letter, our new Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy for which shareholder approval will be sought 
at the 2022 AGM (the Policy), and then the Annual report on 
remuneration which sets out payments made to the Directors and 
demonstrates how Company performance and remuneration were 
aligned for FY22. At the 2022 AGM, shareholders will be asked to 
vote by separate resolution on the New Policy and, on an advisory 
basis, on the remainder of the Directors’ remuneration report. 

Renewal of the Company’s Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy
Our current Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the Current Policy) was 
approved at the 2019 AGM and in line with applicable legislation we 
are required to submit it for shareholder approval at the 2022 AGM.

The Committee reviewed the Current Policy during the year. We 
think it supports our ‘better, not just bigger’ strategy and is aligned 
both with best practice and governance requirements. We are 
therefore proposing to retain it with a small number of refinements. 
These do not increase remuneration opportunities and are 
summarised on pages 62-63, together with illustrations of how the 
Policy would be implemented if it is approved by shareholders. In 
determining the Policy, the Committee followed a robust process, 
getting input from independent advisers. We consulted with 
major shareholders before finalising the Policy: we thank those 
who responded and I am pleased to report that the feedback 
we received supported our proposals. The Committee also had 
regard to the provisions of paragraphs 40 and 41 of the Code, as 
explained on page 72.

FY22 remuneration in the context of our business 
performance
As detailed in the Strategic report, the Group delivered a good 
trading performance in FY22, which was well ahead of pre-COVID 
levels and ended the year in a strong financial position. In particular:

•  two-year like-for-like sales increased 10.5%, and total two-year 

gross sales grew 12.7%;

• 

• 

improved proposition helped offset external headwinds, with 
FY22 EBITDA of £16.6m;

 delivered record Christmas trading with net cash of £16.3 million, 
an increase of £15.5 million during FY22; and

•  dividend reinstated, with a final dividend of 2.4 pence per share 
to be proposed to shareholders for approval at the 2022 AGM

The FY22 bonus opportunity for Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge 
was up to a maximum of 100% of salary, with 90% of the award 
based on stretching EBITDA targets and the remaining 10% based 
on performance against key strategic objectives. Details of the 
measures and targets are set out on page 65. EBITDA of £16.6m 
was achieved resulting in bonuses being earned of 68.5% of salary 
in respect of the EBITDA element. Following a robust assessment of 
the achievements against the strategic objectives, the Committee 
agreed a bonus outcome for Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge of 9.5% 
of salary and 9% of salary respectively in respect of the strategic 
element. Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge therefore earned a bonus 
equal to 78% of salary and 77.5% of salary respectively.

Catherine Glickman 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Other members: 
Carolyn Bradley (member since 2021)

Harry Morley (member since 2018)

“ We are pleased that, 
given the challenges 
of the last couple of 
years, we continue to be 
one of the 25 Best Big 
Companies to work for.”

60

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

•  To provide future flexibility, up to 25% of an LTIP award may be 

based on non-financial performance measures, although there 
is no current intention to introduce such measures. 

•  The shareholding guideline has been aligned at 200% of salary 

for all Executive Directors.

•  A formal post-employment shareholding guideline has been 

introduced such that Executive Directors will be required to retain 
for one year following cessation of employment relevant shares 
that have a value equal to the in-service shareholding guideline 
(200% of salary) or if less all of those shares. 

Other minor amendments have been made to the Current Policy to 
aid the operation of the Policy. 

The fees for our Non-Executive Directors, Harry Morley and 
Catherine Glickman, have applied since Admission. The Non-
Executive Directors have been awarded a 3% increase in their 
fees with effect from 1 September 2022. Our Non-Executive Chair, 
Carolyn Bradley, was appointed on 30 September 2022 on an 
annual fee of £100,000; no fee increase has been awarded in 
respect of FY23. 

Stakeholder engagement
Given the external challenges we have faced over the last years, 
I would like to thank the Executive Directors, the Operational 
Directors and all our colleagues at The Works for their continued 
commitment, flexibility and sheer hard work over the last year. 
We know that our colleagues are a key part of our customer 
experience. The other Board members and I have had the 
opportunity this year to visit stores and teams around the country 
and meet our colleagues. Both those with long service or new to 
The Works have demonstrated their caring and can-do attitude, 
and their enthusiasm for our products. We continue to be a 
company in which colleagues can develop their careers with us, 
with the majority of colleagues being internally developed. We are 
pleased that, given the challenges of the last couple of years, we 
continue to be one of the 25 Best Big Companies to work for. 

As the Board, we continue to receive regular updates on colleague 
wellbeing, morale, retention and health and safety. We also review 
the annual Best Companies engagement survey results, in which 
colleagues provide feedback on leadership, personal growth, and 
giving something back, as well as pay and benefits. 

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank shareholders for their 
engagement with us during the year. I am happy to receive any 
questions or comments from shareholders at any time, and hope 
that you will be happy to support the new Remuneration Policy and 
the Annual report on remuneration.

Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
23 September 2022

Gavin Peck was granted a Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award 
in September 2019 which vested by reference to EPS performance 
over the three financial years ending with FY22. Details of the 
targets are set out on page 75. The EPS targets were achieved in 
part resulting in the award vesting at 38.4% of maximum. The award 
remains subject to a further two-year holding period before it can 
be exercised.

In line with good practice, these incentive outcomes were reviewed 
in the context of overall business performance over FY22 (as 
regards the bonuses) and the three-year performance period (in 
relation to Gavin Peck’s LTIP award). The Committee considered 
that the level of vesting was appropriate given overall performance 
and did not exercise discretion to adjust the outturns. 

Remuneration across the business
The Committee continues to make decisions on remuneration for 
the Executive Directors in the context of decisions for colleagues 
across the Group, both for FY22 and for FY23 and the operation of 
the New Policy. 

In March 2022 we made an award of one week’s pay as a one-
off bonus to all colleagues (except those at Director grade and 
2022 new starters) to recognise all their hard work throughout the 
last two years and to say thank you. This has been extremely well 
received. In addition, the Committee has approved further bonus 
payments to be made to senior leaders and store managers in 
October 2022.

For FY23, salaries for colleagues in retail have increased in line 
with the National Living Wage, with further investment in the 
management grades to maintain appropriate differentials. This 
resulted in an average increase of 6.3% for colleagues in retail. 
Salaries for Distribution Centre and Support Centre roles increased 
in line with the National Living Wage where relevant with further 
investment in certain grades to maintain appropriate differentials, 
and outside of that, an average increase of 3% was applied. 
Recognising the cost-of-living pressures, in FY23 we also launched 
a new engagement and benefits platform (MyWorks by Reward 
Gateway) across the business which offers colleagues discounts 
and money saving offers with a number of businesses and services 
which has been well received. 

We consider the Operational Directors to be an effective high-
performing team. To retain and motivate them, we continued 
to make awards of restricted shares in FY22, a policy that has 
been very well received. For FY23 we intend to introduce a hybrid 
scheme, with a smaller award of restricted shares and opportunity 
to earn more through a three-year performance related element. 
For area and retail management, we have introduced a new bonus 
scheme which will reward achievement of objectives aligned with 
our strategy.

Approach to remuneration for FY23
Our approach to Directors’ remuneration in respect of FY23 is 
summarised in the table on page 62, along with a summary of the 
proposed Policy refinements which are as follows: 

•  Codifying that pension provision for the Executive Directors 

is aligned with the wider workforce, which aligns with 
current practice.

•  Codifying that for financial performance metrics under the 
annual bonus no more than 50% will be earned for target 
performance, which aligns with current practice.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

61

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Our Policy – summary and FY23 intended approach
The following table summarises the key aspects of our Current Policy, changes proposed in the Policy and, subject to shareholders’ 
approval, information on how we intend to implement the Policy in FY23.

Base salary

Current Policy

Ordinarily reviewed annually. In line with typical 
practice, increases are normally within the range 
of increases awarded to other colleagues. 
Flexibility is retained to award higher increases in 
appropriate circumstances. 

Retirement benefits

Defined contribution pension (or cash equivalent). 

Gavin Peck: The Current Policy permits a 
contribution of up to 10% of salary plus the 
amount of any employer social security saving if 
he sacrifices any other element of remuneration 
into pension. However, and as previously reported 
on his appointment as CEO Gavin’s pension was 
aligned with that of the wider workforce at 3% of 
base salary. 

Steve Alldridge: The Current Policy provides for 
his pension to be aligned with that applicable to 
other colleagues and has been at the level of 3% 
of base salary since appointment.

Annual bonus

Maximum opportunity of 100% of salary. 

Full bonus ordinarily paid in cash but with flexibility 
to defer into shares for up to two years. 

The Committee has discretion to amend the 
pay-out should any formulaic output not 
reflect the Committee’s assessment of overall 
business performance. 

At least 50% of the bonus is based on 
financial measures.

Policy and intended implementation in FY23

No changes to the Current Policy. 

For FY23, the Executive Directors’ salaries have 
been increased by 3% to:

•  Gavin Peck: £309,000.
•  Steve Alldridge: £216,300.

Having regard to the reduction in Gavin Peck’s 
pension provision on his appointment as CEO, the 
Policy refers to alignment with the wider workforce 
for all Executive Directors. 

The Policy retains the ability for Executive Directors 
to sacrifice other elements of remuneration into 
pension and benefit from any associated employer 
social security saving. 

No change to quantum or to the manner 
of payment or to the flexibility as regards 
performance measures. 

In line with best practice, the Policy confirms that 
for financial targets no more than 50% of the 
maximum opportunity may be earned for target 
performance, which reflects how the annual bonus 
has been applied in practice. 

In addition to on-target and maximum 
performance targets, a threshold performance 
target will be introduced against which no more 
than 20% of the maximum opportunity may 
be earned.

For FY23, the maximum bonus opportunity will 
be 100% of salary for each Executive Director. 
Consistent with the bonus arrangement for FY22 
performance will be based on EBITDA as regards 
90% of the award and strategic objectives 
with clear measurable targets as regards 10% 
of the award. As targets (both financial and 
strategic) under the annual bonus are considered 
commercially sensitive, these will be disclosed 
retrospectively in the FY23 Annual Report.

62

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Policy and intended implementation in FY23

No change to the quantum or timeline. 

To give flexibility for the future, in relation to 
performance conditions, a minor change permits 
up to 25% of an award to be based on non-financial 
performance measures, although there is no 
current intention to introduce such measures. 

For FY23, it is intended that the maximum LTIP 
opportunity will be 100% of salary for each 
Executive Director, in order to appropriately 
retain, motivate and reward them for delivering 
resilient future performance. Full details of the 
performance metrics and targets will be included 
in the regulatory announcement at the time the 
awards are granted. It is currently intended that 
the awards will be subject to EPS performance 
and share price performance metrics (equally 
weighted).

The required holding has been aligned at 200% of 
salary for all Executive Directors.

A formal guideline has been introduced, which 
will apply to shares acquired pursuant to LTIP and 
deferred bonus awards granted in respect of FY23 
and future years (including the FY23 LTIP awards 
even if they are granted before the 2022 AGM). 

Executive Directors will be required to retain for 
one year following cessation of employment such 
of the relevant shares as have a value equal to the 
in-service shareholding guideline (200% of salary) 
or if less all of those shares. 

The current approach of ordinarily releasing a 
‘good leaver’s’ LTIP awards only on the ordinary 
timescale will be maintained. 

No changes to the Current Policy. 

It is intended to review the Non-Executive Directors’ 
fees during FY23.

LTIP

Current Policy

Maximum award of 100% of salary, or 200% 
of salary in exceptional circumstances, with 
up to 25% vesting for threshold performance. 
Performance conditions must be based on 
financial performance measures. Awards are 
subject to a three-year vesting period followed 
by a two-year holding period. The Committee 
has discretion to amend the pay-out should any 
formulaic output not reflect the Committee’s 
assessment of overall business performance.

In-service shareholding 
guidelines

Post-employment 
shareholding guidelines

Executive Directors are required to retain half of 
all shares acquired under the LTIP (after sales to 
cover tax and any exercise price) until such a time 
as their holding as a value equal to 200% of salary 
in the case of the CEO and 100% of salary in the 
case of any other Executive Director.

Ordinarily any awards under the LTIP which are 
held by an Executive Director will continue and 
only be released on the ordinary timescale so that 
the interests of a departing Executive Director 
who is a ‘good leaver’ continue to be aligned with 
those of shareholders.

Non-Executive Directors’ 
remuneration

Fees are set taking into account the 
responsibilities of the role and expected time 
commitment.

Benefits may be provided where appropriate 
which are relevant to the requirements of the 
role. Non-Executive Directors are currently paid a 
single all-inclusive fee. The Current Policy includes 
flexibility to introduce a structure of a basic Non-
Executive Director fee with additional fees paid for 
chairing of Committees and assuming the role of 
Senior Independent Director.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

63

 
 
 
Remuneration policy

Directors’ remuneration policy
This part of the Directors’ remuneration report sets out The Works’ Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the Policy), which, subject to 
shareholder approval at the 2022 AGM, will take binding effect from the close of that meeting. The differences between the Policy and the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy approved at the 2019 AGM are described on pages 62 and 63. 

The Policy is determined by the Company’s Remuneration Committee (the Committee).

Policy for Executive Directors
Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

While no formal 
performance conditions 
apply, an individual’s 
performance in role 
is taken into account 
in determining any 
salary increase.

Not applicable.

Whilst there is no maximum 
salary, increases will 
normally be within the 
range of salary increases 
awarded (in percentage 
of salary terms) to 
other employees of 
the Group. However, 
higher increases may be 
awarded in appropriate 
circumstances, such as:
•  on promotion or 

in the event of an 
increase in scope of 
the role or individual’s 
responsibilities;

•  where an individual has 
been appointed to the 
Board at a lower than 
typical market salary 
to allow for growth in 
the role, in which case 
larger increases may 
be awarded to move 
salary positioning to 
a typical market level 
as the individual gains 
experience;

•  change in size and/
or complexity of the 
Group; and

•  significant market 

movement. 

Increases may be 
implemented over 
such time period as 
the Committee deems 
appropriate.

Whilst the Committee 
has not set an absolute 
maximum on the level 
of benefits Executive 
Directors may receive, the 
value is set at a level which 
the Committee considers 
to be appropriately 
positioned taking into 
account the nature and 
location of the role and 
individual circumstances.

Base  
salary

Core element of fixed 
remuneration reflecting 
individual’s role 
and experience.

The Committee ordinarily reviews base 
salaries annually taking into account 
a number of factors including (but not 
limited to) the value of the individual, 
the scope of their role, their skills and 
experience and performance. 

The Committee also takes 
into consideration:

•  pay and conditions of the 
workforce generally; and

•  group profitability and prevailing 

market conditions.

Benefits

Fixed remuneration 
provided on a market 
competitive basis.

Benefits include the use of a fully 
expensed car (or car allowance), 
medical cover for the Executive 
Director and his/her spouse and 
dependent children, critical illness 
cover and life assurance scheme. 

Other benefits may be provided based 
on individual circumstances, which 
may include relocation costs, travel 
and accommodation expenses. 

Reimbursed expenses may include 
a gross-up to reflect any tax or 
social security due in respect 
of the reimbursement.

64

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Retirement 
benefits

Provide a competitive 
means of saving to 
deliver appropriate 
income in retirement.

Annual  
bonus

The executive bonus 
scheme rewards 
Executive Directors 
for performance in the 
relevant year against 
targets and objectives 
linked to the delivery of 
the Company’s strategy.

The Company operates a defined 
contribution scheme. 

In appropriate circumstances, 
an Executive Director may receive 
a salary supplement in lieu of 
some or all of the contributions 
that would otherwise be made 
to a pension scheme.

Executive Directors may be 
permitted to sacrifice other elements 
of remuneration and receive an 
equivalent contribution to a pension 
scheme. Should any Executive Director 
elect to do so, any employer social 
security saving for the Group may 
also be contributed to a pension 
arrangement on behalf of the 
Executive Director.

Targets and objectives are reviewed 
annually and any pay-out is 
determined by the Committee 
after the year end.

The Committee has discretion 
to amend the pay-out should any 
formulaic output not reflect the 
Committee’s assessment of overall 
business performance.

The full amount of any bonus earned 
will ordinarily be paid in cash, although 
the Committee has discretion to defer 
some or all of the bonus earned into 
shares, for up to two years. 

Deferred bonus awards may take 
the form of conditional shares or nil 
(or nominal) cost options.

Deferred bonus awards may 
incorporate the right to receive 
additional shares calculated by 
reference to the value of dividends 
which would have been paid on the 
deferred bonus award shares up to 
the time of vesting; this amount may 
be calculated assuming that the 
dividends have been reinvested in 
the Company’s shares on such basis 
as the Committee determines. 

Recovery provisions apply, 
as referred to below.

Not applicable.

The maximum contribution 
will be aligned with the 
contribution available to 
other employees, plus the 
amount of any employer 
social security saving 
if an Executive Director 
sacrifices any other 
element of remuneration 
as referred to in the 
‘Operation’ column.

The maximum annual 
bonus opportunity is 
100% of base salary.

Targets (which may be 
based on financial or 
strategic measures) and 
individual objectives are 
determined to reflect 
the Company’s strategy. 

At least 50% of the 
bonus opportunity is 
based on financial 
measures which may 
include but are not 
limited to EBITDA or 
other measure of profit.

The balance of the 
bonus opportunity will 
be based on financial 
measures and/or the 
delivery of strategic/ 
individual measures.

Subject to the 
Committee’s discretion 
to amend the formulaic 
output, for financial 
measures up to 20% 
of the maximum will be 
earned for threshold 
performance and up 
to 50% of the maximum 
will be earned for 
on-target performance. 

For strategic/individual 
measures, the bonus will 
be earned between 0% 
and 100% based on the 
Committee’s assessment 
of the extent to 
which the measure 
has been achieved. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

65

 
 
 
Remuneration policy continued

Policy for Executive Directors continued

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

The maximum award 
level is 100% of base 
salary, or 200% of base 
salary in exceptional 
circumstances.

The market value of 
shares subject to an LTIP 
award will be determined 
on such basis as the 
Committee considers 
appropriate, which will 
be applied consistently 
where possible.

If a qualifying LTIP is 
granted, the value of 
shares subject to the 
CSOP option will not count 
towards the limit referred 
to above, reflecting the 
provisions for the scale 
back of the ordinary 
LTIP award.

For at least 75% of 
an LTIP award, the 
performance measures 
will be based on 
financial measures 
(which may include, 
but are not limited 
to, earnings per 
share, relative total 
shareholder return, 
and share price). Any 
balance of an LTIP 
award will be subject to 
performance measures 
based on non-financial 
measures aligned 
with the Company’s 
strategic priorities.

Subject to the 
Committee’s discretion 
to amend the formulaic 
output, awards will 
vest up to 25% for 
threshold performance, 
rising to 100% for 
maximum performance.

Long Term  
Incentive 
Plan (LTIP)

The LTIP provides a 
clear link between the 
remuneration of the 
Executive Directors and 
the creation of value 
for shareholders by 
rewarding the Executive 
Directors for the 
achievement of longer 
term objectives aligned 
with shareholders’ 
interests.

Under the LTIP, the Committee may 
grant awards as conditional shares 
or as nil (or nominal) cost options.

Awards will usually vest following 
the assessment of the applicable 
performance conditions, typically 
following the end of a three-year 
performance period, but will not be 
released (so that the participant is 
entitled to acquire shares) until the 
end of a holding period of two years 
beginning on the vesting date. 

Alternatively, awards may be granted 
on the basis that the participant is 
entitled to acquire shares following 
the assessment of the applicable 
performance conditions but that 
(other than as regards sales to cover 
tax liabilities and any exercise price) 
the award is not released (so that 
the participant is able to dispose 
of those shares) until the end of the 
holding period. 

The Committee has discretion 
to amend the pay-out should any 
formulaic output not reflect the 
Committee’s assessment of overall 
business performance. 

LTIP awards may incorporate the 
right to receive additional shares 
calculated by reference to the value 
of dividends which would have been 
paid on the vested shares subject to 
the award up to the time of release; 
this amount may be calculated 
assuming that the dividends have 
been reinvested in the Company’s 
shares on such basis as the 
Committee determines.

The Committee may at its discretion 
structure awards as qualifying LTIP 
awards, consisting of a tax qualifying 
Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) 
option with a per share exercise price 
equal to the market value of a share 
at the date of grant and an ordinary 
nil (or nominal) cost LTIP award, with 
the ordinary award scaled back at 
exercise to take account of any gain 
made on exercise of the CSOP option. 

Recovery provisions apply, 
as referred to below.

66

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

All  
employee  
share  
plans

Provision of the Save As 
You Earn (‘SAYE’) Scheme 
creates staff alignment 
with the Group and 
provides a sense of 
ownership across the 
Group’s employee base. 
Executive Directors may 
participate in any other 
all employee share plan 
as may be introduced 
from time to time.

Tax qualifying monthly savings 
scheme facilitating the purchase 
of shares at a discount. 

Any other all employee share plan 
would be operated for Executive 
Directors in accordance with its rules 
and on the same basis as for other 
qualifying employees.

Not subject to 
performance conditions 
in line with typical 
market practice.

The limit on participation 
and the permitted 
discount under the SAYE 
Scheme will be those set 
in accordance with the 
applicable tax legislation 
from time to time.

The limit on participation 
and other relevant terms 
of any other all employee 
share plan would be 
determined in accordance 
with the plan rules (and, 
where relevant, applicable 
legislation) and would be 
the same for the Executive 
Directors as for other 
relevant employees.

Recovery provisions (malus and clawback)
Malus: The annual bonus opportunity and unvested deferred share awards may be cancelled or reduced before payment and an 
LTIP award may be cancelled or reduced before vesting in the event of material error in assessing a performance condition, material 
misstatement of results, material failure of risk management, material misconduct, corporate failure or serious reputational damage.

Clawback: For up to two years following payment of a bonus and until the fifth anniversary of the grant of an LTIP award, the bonus may 
be recovered or the LTIP award cancelled or reduced (if it has not been exercised) or the Executive Director may be required to make 
a payment to the Company in respect of some or all of the shares acquired in the event of material error in assessing a performance 
condition, material misstatement of results, material failure of risk management, material misconduct, corporate failure or serious 
reputational damage.

Malus and clawback may be applied to any CSOP option granted under the LTIP to the extent permitted by the applicable tax legislation.

Explanation of performance metrics
Performance measures for the LTIP and annual bonus are selected to reflect the Company’s strategy. Stretching performance targets 
are set each year by the Committee taking into account a number of different factors.

Annual bonus: The Committee currently considers that EBITDA is closely aligned with the Group’s key performance metrics, and 
encourages sustainable growth year by year. Where strategic measures are applied, the bonus rewards the achievement of objectives 
linked to the future execution of strategy. 

LTIP: The application of EPS to the LTIP aligns management’s objectives with those of shareholders for the longer term, whilst the use 
of a share price measure is directly aligned with shareholder value. 

The Committee may vary or substitute any performance measure if an event occurs which causes it to determine that it is appropriate 
to do so (including to take account of acquisitions or divestments, a change in strategy or a change in prevailing market conditions), 
provided that any such variation or substitution is fair and reasonable and (in the opinion of the Committee) the change would not make 
the measure less demanding than the original measure would have been but for the event in question. If the Committee were to make 
such a variation, an explanation would be given in the next Directors’ remuneration report. 

Operation of share plans
The Committee may amend the terms of awards and options under its share plans in accordance with the plan rules in the event of 
a variation of the Company’s share capital or a demerger, special dividend or other similar event or otherwise in accordance with the 
rules of those plans. The Committee may operate any such plan in accordance with its rules. Share awards granted under any such plan 
may be settled in cash or granted as a right to receive a cash amount calculated by reference to a number of notional shares, although 
the Committee would only do so where the particular circumstances made this the appropriate course of action (for example where 
a regulatory reason prevented the delivery of shares). 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

67

 
 
 
Remuneration policy continued

Shareholding guidelines
To align the interests of the Executive Directors with those of shareholders, the Committee has adopted formal shareholding guidelines. 
Executive Directors are required to retain half of all shares acquired under the LTIP (after sales to cover tax and any exercise price) until 
such a time as their holding as a value is equal to 200% of salary. Shares subject to LTIP awards which have vested but not been released 
(that is which are in a holding period), or which have been released but have not been exercised, and shares subject to deferred bonus 
awards, count towards the guidelines on a net of assumed tax basis.

The Committee has adopted a formal post-employment shareholding guideline, which will apply with effect from the approval of the 
Policy. Shares are subject to this guideline only if they are acquired pursuant to LTIP or deferred bonus awards granted after 1 May 2022. 
Following employment, an Executive Director must retain for one year such of their relevant shares as have a value (as determined by 
the Committee) equal to 200% of their salary (or, if fewer, all of their relevant shares). The Committee has discretion to waive or vary the 
post-employment shareholding guideline in exceptional circumstances (for example, in compassionate circumstances, or on a change 
of control or if a conflict of interest arises with an Executive Director’s next appointment). 

Policy for Non-Executive Directors

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Fees and benefits

To provide fees within a market 
competitive range reflecting 
the individual, responsibilities 
or the role and the expected 
time commitment.

To provide benefits where 
appropriate which are relevant 
to the requirements of the role.

The fees of the Chair are determined 
by the Committee and the fees of 
the Non-Executive Directors are 
determined by the Board.

Non-Executive Directors may 
be eligible to receive benefits 
such as travel and other 
reasonable expenses.

Fees are set taking into account 
the responsibilities of the role and 
expected time commitment.

Non-Executive Directors are paid 
a single all-inclusive fee.

A basic fee with additional fees 
paid for chairing of Committees 
and assuming the role of Senior 
Independent Director, may be 
introduced in the future.

Where benefits are provided to 
Non-Executive Directors they will be 
provided at a level considered to 
be appropriate taking into account 
individual circumstances.

Policy for the remuneration of employees more generally
The Group aims to provide a remuneration package that is competitive and which is appropriate to promote the long term success 
of the Company. The Company intends to apply this policy fairly and consistently and does not intend to pay more than is necessary 
to attract and motivate colleagues. In respect of the Executive Directors, a greater proportion of the remuneration package is ‘at risk’ 
and determined by reference to the performance conditions.

Base salaries are reviewed annually together with all employees and increases ordinarily become effective from 1 May. The Committee 
is kept informed of salary increases across the wider workforce and how decisions are made.

The Board believes that Group success should be shared amongst the wider workforce and therefore, where the business performs 
strongly, will reward employees taking into account levels of contribution and responsibility.

The Group operates a SAYE Scheme to encourage share ownership across the wider workforce and alignment in longer-term goals.

68

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Illustration of Policy application 
The following charts provide an illustration, for each of the Executive Directors, of the application of the Policy in FY23. The charts show the 
split of remuneration between fixed pay (that is base salary, benefits, employer pensions contributions/salary supplement), annual bonus 
and long-term incentive pay on the basis of minimum remuneration, remuneration receivable for performance in line with The Works’ 
expectations, and maximum remuneration (including and excluding share price appreciation of 50% on the LTIP outcome).

Gavin Peck 

Maximum Plus*

Maximum

Target

Minimum

Steve Alldridge

1,103,770

Maximum Plus*

949,270

640,270

331,270

Maximum

Target

Minimum

451,089

234,789

775,539

667,389

£’000

0

200

400

600

800

1,000

1,200

0

200

400

600

800

1,000

  Basic salary and benefits 

  Bonus 

  Long-term Incentives

Minimum performance

Performance in line with 
expectations

Maximum performance

Maximum performance with 
share price appreciation of 50%

* 

 Total value of remuneration package plus 50% increase in 
share price.

Fixed pay

Base salary (being £309,000 
in the case of Gavin Peck and 
£216,300 in the case of Steve 
Alldridge), employer pension 
contributions at an assumed 
rate of 3% on the latest known 
salary, and benefits disclosed  
in the single figure table 
on page 73 for the 2022 
financial year.

Annual bonus

No bonus

Bonus equal to 50% 
of salary is earned

Bonus equal to 100% 
of salary is earned

Bonus equal to 100% 
of salary is earned

LTIP

No LTIP vesting

LTIP vests as to 50% of the 
maximum award, based on 
current practice

LTIP vests in full (100% of salary)

LTIP vests in full (100% of 
salary) plus share price 
appreciation of 50%

Recruitment remuneration policy
When hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will typically align the remuneration package with the Policy.

When determining appropriate remuneration arrangements, the Committee may include other elements of pay which it considers are 
appropriate. However, this discretion is capped and is subject to the limits referred to below.

Base salary will be set at a level appropriate to the role and the experience of the Executive Director being appointed. This may include 
agreement on future increases up to market rate, in line with increased experience and/or responsibilities, subject to good performance, 
where it is considered appropriate. Pension will be provided in line with the Policy. 

The Committee will not offer non-performance related incentive payments (for example a guaranteed sign-on bonus). 

Other elements may be included in the following circumstances:

•  an interim appointment being made to fill an Executive Director role on a short term basis;
• 

if exceptional circumstances require that the Chair or a Non-Executive Director takes on an executive function on a short term basis;

• 

• 

if an Executive Director is recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a bonus or long- term incentive 
award for that year as there would not be sufficient time to assess performance. Subject to the limit on variable remuneration set out 
below, the quantum in respect of the months employed during the year may be transferred to the subsequent year so that reward 
is provided on a fair and appropriate basis; and

if the Director will be required to relocate in order to take up the position, it is the Company’s policy to allow reasonable relocation, 
travel and subsistence payments. Any such payments will be at the discretion of the Committee.

The Committee may also alter the performance measures, performance period, vesting period and holding period of the annual 
bonus or long-term incentive opportunity if the Committee determines that the circumstances of the recruitment merit such alteration. 
The rationale will be clearly explained in the next Directors’ remuneration report.

The maximum level of variable remuneration which may be granted (excluding buyout awards as referred to below) is 300% of salary.

The Committee may make payments or awards in respect of hiring an Executive Director to ‘buy out’ remuneration arrangements 
forfeited in connection with leaving a previous employer. In doing so, the Committee will take account of relevant factors including any 
performance conditions attached to the forfeited arrangements and the time over which they would have vested. The Committee will 
generally seek to structure buyout awards or payments on a comparable basis to the remuneration arrangements forfeited. Any such 
payments or awards are excluded from the maximum level of variable remuneration referred to above. Buyout awards will ordinarily 
be granted on the basis that they are subject to forfeiture or clawback in the event of departure within 12 months of joining The Works, 
although the Committee will retain discretion not to apply forfeiture or clawback in appropriate circumstances.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

69

 
 
 
Remuneration policy continued

Recruitment remuneration policy continued
Any share awards referred to in this section will be granted as far as possible under The Works ordinary share plans. If necessary, and 
subject to the limits referred to above, recruitment awards may be granted outside of these plans as permitted under the Listing Rules 
which allow for the grant of awards to facilitate, in unusual circumstances, the recruitment of an Executive Director.

Where a position is filled internally, any ongoing remuneration obligations or outstanding variable pay elements will continue in 
accordance with their terms.

Fees payable to a newly appointed Chair or Non-Executive Director will be in line with the policy in place at the time of the appointment.

Policy on service contracts
The Company’s policy is for service agreements with Executive Directors to be capable of termination by either the Company or the 
Executive Director by the giving of not more than 12 months’ notice. The Non-Executive Directors (including the Chair) do not have service 
contracts, but are instead engaged via letters of appointment. Information in relation to the Executive Directors’ service agreements and 
the Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment is set out on page 52.

Policy on payments for loss of office
The following table summarises the Company’s policy on the determination of payments for loss of office by Executive Directors.

Provision

Treatment

Fixed remuneration

Salary/fees, benefits and pension will be paid to the date of termination.

Payment in lieu of notice

Annual Bonus

LTIP

Change of control

Where a payment in lieu of notice is made, this will include salary, benefits and pension (or a cash 
equivalent) until the end of the notice period that would otherwise have applied. Alternatively, the 
Company, may continue to provide the relevant benefits. Unless the Committee determines otherwise, 
amounts will be paid in equal monthly instalments. Mitigation will apply.

This will be reviewed on an individual basis taking into account the terms of the relevant service 
agreement. The decision whether or not to award a bonus in full or in part will be dependent on a 
number of factors including the circumstances of the departure, contribution to the business during the 
bonus period and the terms of the service agreement. Any bonus would typically be pro-rated to reflect 
time in service to termination and paid at the usual time (although the Committee retains discretion to 
pay the bonus earlier in appropriate circumstances). 

Any outstanding deferred bonus awards would typically continue (other than in the event of dismissal for 
gross misconduct, where the entitlement would lapse) and vest at the normal vesting date, although the 
Committee retains discretion to vest any such award at the date of cessation. In either case, the award 
will vest in full, unless the Committee determines the award should be reduced to take account of the 
proportion of the deferral period that has elapsed at cessation.

If an Executive Director ceases employment with the Group as a result of death, ill-health, injury, 
disability or for any other reason at the Committee’s discretion before an award under the LTIP vests, the 
award will usually be released on the ordinary release date (although the Committee retains discretion 
to release the award as soon as reasonably practicable after the cessation of employment or at some 
other time, such as following the end of the performance period in the case of an award that would 
otherwise be subject to a holding period). In either case, the award will vest to the extent determined 
by reference to the performance conditions and, unless the Committee determines otherwise, 
the proportion of the performance period that has elapsed at cessation.

If an Executive Director ceases employment with the Group after an award under the LTIP has vested 
but before it is released (that is the Executive Director ceases employment during a holding period), the 
award will continue and be released at the normal release date (unless the cessation is due to dismissal 
for gross misconduct, in which case the awards will lapse). The award will be released to the extent it has 
vested by reference to performance conditions. The Committee retains discretion to release the award 
at cessation.

In the event of a change of control, unvested awards under the LTIP will vest and be released to the 
extent determined by the Committee taking into account the relevant performance conditions and, 
unless the Committee determines otherwise, the extent of vesting so determined shall be reduced 
to reflect the proportion of the performance period that has elapsed.

Any deferred bonus shares will vest on a change of control or other relevant event.

Options under the SAYE Scheme will vest on a change of control.

70

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Provision

Other payments

Treatment

The Committee reserves the right to make additional exit payments where such payments are 
made in good faith in discharge of an existing legal obligation (or by way of damages for breach of 
such obligation) or by way of settlement or compromise of any claim arising in connection with the 
termination of a Director’s office or employment. Payments may include, but are not limited to, paying 
any fees for outplacement assistance and/or the Director’s legal and/or professional advice fees in 
connection with his/her cessation of office or employment and payments in respect of accrued but 
untaken holiday. 

Where a buyout or other award is made in connection with recruitment, the leaver provisions would 
be determined at the time of the award.

Options under the SAYE Scheme will vest on cessation in accordance with the plan rules, which do not 
allow discretionary treatment.

The Non-Executive Directors are not entitled to compensation for termination of their appointment.

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
Whilst the Committee does not formally consult with employees as part of its process when determining Executive Director pay, it does 
take into account pay practices and policies of employees across the wider Group. This includes the general basic salary increase, 
remuneration arrangements and employment conditions.

Consideration of shareholders’ views
The Committee welcomes dialogue with its shareholders. Shareholder views are considered when evaluating and setting the 
remuneration strategy and the Committee has consulted with key shareholders in relation to the Policy, and will do so in relation to any 
significant change to it.

Legacy remuneration arrangements
The Committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payments and/or payments for loss of office (including exercising any 
discretions available to it in connection with such payments) notwithstanding that they are not in line with the Policy where the terms 
of the payments were agreed:

•  either before the Policy comes into effect, provided that if they were agreed on or after 28 August 2019 (the date on which the 

Company’s first shareholder approved Directors’ Remuneration Policy came into effect) they are in line with the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy in effect at the date they were agreed; and

•  or at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Company and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment was not 

in consideration for the individual becoming a Director of the Company.

For these purposes ‘payments’ includes the Committee satisfying awards of variable remuneration and, in relation to an award over 
shares, the terms of the payment are ‘agreed’ at the time the award is granted.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

71

 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration

This report has been prepared in accordance with the applicable regulations and the Code.

Composition of the Committee
The members of the Committee are Catherine Glickman (Chair), Carolyn Bradley and Harry Morley.

Duties and responsibilities
The Committee’s key responsibilities are:

•  reviewing the on-going appropriateness and relevance of Remuneration Policy and agreeing a new policy for shareholders to approve 

at the 2022 AGM;

•  reviewing and approving the remuneration packages of the Executive Directors;
•  recommending and monitoring the level and structure of remuneration of senior management; and
•  production of the annual report on the Directors’ remuneration.

When determining the application of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy in FY22, the Committee considered the factors of clarity, 
simplicity, risk, predictability, proportionality and alignment to culture as referred to in the Code. As with the approach in FY21, these were 
reflected, in particular, in the Executive Directors’ LTIP awards which are subject to simple and transparent performance measures based 
on our appetite for risk, with specific monetary caps added as a further risk mitigation. 

As part of its work, the Committee reviewed the remuneration for the wider workforce and related policies and takes these into account 
when setting the Policy for Executive Director and senior management remuneration. 

Meetings and attendees
The Committee met a total of four times during the year and has met three times since the year end. All members attended those 
meetings. 

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Board and its Committees during the year was conducted using questionnaires and was 
facilitated by the Company Secretary. The questionnaires included a section on the work of the Committee. 

The evaluation outcome was discussed at the Remuneration Committee’s April 2022 meeting. It confirmed that the Committee operates 
effectively but reiterated the need for the Committee to continue to ensure that the Remuneration Policy and incentive arrangements 
operate effectively to incentivise, motivate and retain the Executive and Operational Directors, and senior management.

Advisers
The following people have provided advice to the Committee during the year in relation to its consideration of matters relating to 
Directors’ remuneration:

•  Chair, CEO, CFO, People Director and Company Secretary; and
•  Deloitte LLP (Deloitte).

Deloitte is retained to provide independent advice to the Committee as required. Deloitte is a member of the Remuneration Consultants 
Group and, as such, voluntarily operated under the Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. Deloitte 
fees for providing remuneration advice to the Committee were £23,950 for FY22. The Committee assesses from time to time whether 
this appointment remains appropriate or should be put out to tender and takes into account Remuneration Consultants Group Code of 
Conduct when considering this.

Deloitte was appointed by the Committee and has provided share scheme advice and general remuneration advice to the Company.

72

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Single figure table – audited information
The following table sets out total remuneration in respect of FY22 for each person who served as a Director in that year, along with the 
corresponding remuneration for FY21:

Salary and
fees 1
£000

Benefits 2
£000

Pension 3
£000

Annual
bonus 4
£000

Long-term
incentive 5
£000

Executive Directors

Gavin Peck6

Steve Alldridge 
(appointed 14 May 
2021)

Non-Executive 
Directors

Dean Hoyle  
(stepped down 30 
September 2021)7

Carolyn Bradley 
(appointed 30 
September 2021)

Harry Morley8

Catherine Glickman8

2022

2021

2022

2021

2022

2021

2022

2021

2022

2021

2022

2021

300

283

203

N/A

25

67

59

N/A

55

52

50

47

13

11

12

N/A

—

—

—

N/A

—

—

—

—

9

9

6

N/A

—

—

—

N/A

—

—

—

—

234

—

163

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

56

—

—

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Total
£000

612

303

384

N/A

25

67

59

N/A

55

52

50

47

Total fixed
 remuneration
£000

Total variable
 remuneration
£000

322

303

221

N/A

25

67

59

N/A

55

52

50

47

290
—

163
N/A

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

1    Salary and fees: The amount of salary/fees earned in respect of the year. The salary and fees for 2021 (and 2022 in the case of Dean Hoyle) reflect the 

voluntary reductions referred to below.

2    Benefits: The taxable value of benefits received in the year: these are principally private medical insurance and car or car allowance. For Gavin Peck the 
2022 benefits figure includes his SAYE option granted in August 2021, valued as the aggregate discount of the exercise price from the share price used to 
determine the exercise price. 

3   Pension: The pension figure represents the cash value of pension contributions for the Executive Director to the defined contribution pension arrangement 

and any cash payments in lieu of pension contributions made in the year.

4    Annual bonus: The cash value of the bonus earned in respect of the financial year. Details in relation to the bonuses earned for FY22 are set out below.

5   Long-term incentives: Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in September 2019 which vested by reference to EPS performance over the three financial 
years ending with FY22. Details of the performance targets and the vesting outturn are set out below. In the single figure table, the value of the LTIP is 
calculated by reference to a share price of £0.57, being the three month average share price to the end of FY22. 

6    As disclosed in the FY21 Directors’ remuneration report, Gavin Peck’s salary for FY22 remained at £300,000, and Steve Alldridge’s was set at £210,000 on 

his appointment to the Board. In FY21, in response to the closure of stores and furloughing of colleagues due to the pandemic, Gavin Peck agreed to a 33% 
salary reduction from 1 April 2020 to 30 June 2020.

7    In FY21 in response to the closure of stores and furloughing of colleagues due to the pandemic, the then Chair, Dean Hoyle, agreed to a 100% fee reduction 

from 1 March 2020 to 31 May 2020 and to a further 100% fee reduction from 1 February 2021 to 30 June 2021.

8   Harry Morley and Catherine Glickman agreed to a 33% fee reduction from 1 April 2020 to 30 June 2020. 

Details of Chair and Non-Executive Directors’ fees are set out below. These are the same fee levels as have applied since Admission.

Chair’s fee

Harry Morley

Catherine Glickman

Base fee 
£000

100,000

55,000

50,000

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

73

 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

Annual incentive plan – audited information
Each Executive Director was eligible to earn a bonus in respect of FY22 of up to 100% of salary. 90% of the award was based on stretching 
EBITDA targets, which took account of business rates relief during the year: this paid out at 76.1%. The remaining 10% was based on 
performance against key strategic objectives, as set out below, with any payout in respect of the strategic objectives element being 
subject to the achievement of a threshold level of EBITDA performance. 

EBITDA element

Target

Maximum

Strategic objectives element

Vesting
(% of maximum 
the EBITDA 
element)

Actual 
performance
(£m)

Performance
(£m)

Bonus earned for 
EBITDA element
(% of maximum 
for EBITDA 
element)

Bonus earned 
for EBITDA 
element
(% of salary)

15

18

50%

100%

16.6

76.1%

68.5%

Executive Director

Gavin Peck

Achievement against Objectives

Bonus 
earned for 
strategic 
objective  
element 
(% of salary)

Develop The Works’ brand, and 
communicate the value of the business 
externally

•  Developed and communicated the updated purpose, values and three-year 

strategic plan externally and internally.

• 

Increased positive analyst and media engagement during the year, and meetings 
with brokers and potential investors.

Defining and developing The Works’ 
brand proposition 
Lead the definition of the brand and 
customer proposition, and develop The 
Works’ ESG strategy.

Develop the brand and customer 
proposition to grow the customer base, 
improve customer engagement and 
optimise the loyalty programme.

•  Brand evolution defined and approved by the Board, with clear articulation of 

brand differentiators and positioning. Plans developed to deliver this brand refresh 
across the business during FY23.

•  Product proposition reviewed, aligned to new purpose. Implementation underway with 

clear evidence of this driving sales growth and appealing to new customers.
•  Established and chaired the ESG steering group, signed off objectives and 

workstreams and delivered progress against workstreams. 

•  Loyalty scheme reviewed and future strategy developed including evolution of 

branding and more proactive marketing of the offering.

Develop our people – leadership and 
capability
Increase leadership capability through 
embedding and developing a strong 
and well-functioning Operational Board. 

•  Appointment of Commercial Director, Head of Brand, Head of IT Service and Head of Profit 
Protection; investment in IT, Commercial Buying and Marketing teams to build capability. 
•  Maintained status in Best Places to Work Colleague Survey, coming 13th amongst Top 

25 Big Companies to work for with 2% improvement in Leadership score.

•  Leading a high-performing, collaborative and driven Operational Board; high-

9.5%

Additional Achievement

Steve Alldridge

Stakeholder engagement
Drive increased engagement with key 
stakeholders – shareholders and banks 
specifically post COVID-19.

Improving business insight 
and reporting
Sponsor project to improve data and 
performance reporting capabilities, 
focused on trading performance and 
stock integrity and accuracy.

Strengthen our ESG credentials – 
control environment
Improve our financial control environment, 
by strengthening the finance team and 
reviewing key financial processes and 
controls, specifically stock. 

quality individual and collective targets set.

•  Highly effective leadership navigating global freight challenges and through the 
cyber attack; the investment in accelerating future IT investment has resulted in 
robust security.

• 

 Proactive and constructive engagement with stakeholders during FY22, appropriately 
taking into consideration the stage of the Group’s strategic and financial development.

•  Refinancing completed with commercially competitive terms and fees.

•  Project plan developed to improve data and reporting; stymied because of other 

priorities during year. This will be reset as a FY23 priority: investment in additional IT 
resources will support delivery of this objective in the new financial year.

• 

Investment in commercial financial planning resource and capability to develop 
team and drive improvement in data and performance reporting capabilities 
alongside investment in IT systems.

9%

•  Significant strengthening of finance leadership and team, with improvement in 

engagement scores. 

•  Review of key finance processes/controls completed; significant strengthening and 
embedding of disciplines ahead of FY23, including supporting the establishment of 
the new Profit Protection function.

•  Maintained tight internal cost control and cash flow management. 

Lead The Works’ financial plan update 

•  3 year financial plan updated and aligned with updated strategy.

Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge therefore earned a bonus equal to 78% of salary and 77.5% of salary respectively. 
74

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Long-term incentives
2019 LTIP award vesting
Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in September 2019 which vested by reference to EPS performance over the three financial years 
ending with FY22, as set out below. The award will not be released to Gavin so that he can exercise it until the end of a further two year 
holding period. 

Threshold 
performance
(compound
annual growth in
EPS)2
20% vesting

Maximum 
performance
(compound
annual growth
in EPS)2
100% vesting

Actual 
performance
(compound 
annual growth in 
EPS)

Vesting 
percentage

Vested shares

Value of vested
shares3

10%

22.1%

12.8%

38.4%

96,151

£54,806

Shares under 
award

250,6171

Dividend
equivalent4

£1,154

Total value

£55,960

1 

 In addition to his LTIP award, Gavin was granted a tax qualifying CSOP option over 37,037 shares with an exercise price of £0.81 per share. To the extent the 
CSOP award is exercised at a gain, the extent to which the associated LTIP award can be exercised shall be reduced by the amount of the gain so that 
there is no increase in the pre-tax value of the award. Accordingly, the CSOP award is ignored for the purposes of the table above.

2  Straight-line vesting applies for performance between threshold and maximum. 

3  In the table above, the value of the vested shares is estimated based on the three-month average share price to the end of FY22 (£0.57).

4   In accordance with the LTIP rules and the Current Policy, Gavin Peck will be awarded additional shares in respect of dividends over the period to the 
release of the award. In the period to the date of vesting, these dividend equivalents have a value of £1,154. The number of shares will be determined 
following the release of the award. 

The 2019 LTIP award was granted when the share price was £0.81. The value of the vested shares is estimated based on a share price of 
£0.57. Therefore, 0% of the value of vested shares is attributable to share price appreciation since the grant date. The Committee did not 
consider that it was necessary to exercise discretion in respect of share price movements since the grant date.

Long-term incentives - awards granted during the FY22 – Audited information
LTIP awards were granted to Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge on 30 September 2022 equal to 100% of salary on the following basis:

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Type of award

Maximum
opportunity

Number of
shares

Face value at
grant £1

% of award vesting
at threshold

LTIP

LTIP

100% of salary

100% of salary

638,297

446,808

299,999

209,999

20%

20%

Performance period2

See footnote 2

See footnote 2

1 

 For these purposes, the face value of an award is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the award was granted by 47 pence, 
the average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of grant.

2   Each award is subject to performance conditions assessed over the Company’s FY22, FY23 and FY24 financial years as regards the EPS element of the 

performance condition, with the share price element of the performance condition assessed following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year 
Trading Update for its FY24 financial year (as described further below). To the extent an award vests following the end of the performance period, it is 
subject to a further two-year holding period before the shares are released.

A summary of the performance conditions for these awards (with half of each award based on EPS, and half on share price) is set out on 
page 77. The Committee believes that the Executive Directors have direct influence over both measures, and that targets are stretching 
but achievable.

SAYE Scheme options granted during FY22 – audited information
Gavin Peck was granted a SAYE Scheme option on 31 August 2021 as detailed below as part of the SAYE Scheme offer made to all 
eligible colleagues.

Gavin Peck

Type of award

SAYE option

Number of
shares

16,363

Exercise price1

£0.55

Face value at
grant (£)2

11,160

1 

 In line with the SAYE scheme, this is set at a 20% discount to 68.2 pence, the average closing share price on 3, 4 and 5 August 2021, the three business days 
prior to the date of invitation.

2   For these purposes, the face value of the option is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the option was granted by 68.2 pence the 

average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of invitation.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

75

 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited Information

The number of shares of the Company in which the Directors had a beneficial interest, together with details of the Executive Directors 
long-term incentive interests, as at 1 May 2022, are set out in the table below.

Executive Directors

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Outstanding scheme interests’ 1 May 2022

Beneficially owned shares

Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions

Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures

Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests 1

3 May 2021

1 May 2022

Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 1 May 2022

1,736,371

446,808

–

—

1,736,371

446,808

554,636

554,636

2,291,007

—

—

446,808

1 

 The tax qualifying CSOP awards granted as part of the 2019 awards are not included in these numbers, reflecting that if they were to be exercised the LTIP 
element of those awards would be reduced to reflect the gain on the CSOP element, as referred to on page 77. 

Non-Executive Directors

Carolyn Bradley

Harry Morley

Catherine Glickman

Outstanding scheme interests’ 1 May 2022

Beneficially owned shares

Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions

Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures

Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests

3 May 2021

1 May 2022

Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 1 May 2022

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

N/A

100,000

31,812

105,866

200,000

77,244

105,866

200,000

77,244

On 21 July 2022, Carolyn Bradley purchased 73,870 shares, bringing her total holding to 179,736. On 10 August 2022, Kate Morley (a person 
closely associated with Harry Morley), purchased 75,000 shares making Harry Morley’s total holding 275,000 shares. On 18 August 
2022, Catherine Glickman purchased 103,789 shares, bringing her total holding to 181,033. There have been no further changes to the 
beneficially owned interests of the Directors between 1 May 2022 and the date of this report other than the partial lapse of Gavin Peck’s 
LTIP award granted in 2019, as referred to in the footnotes to the following table.

76

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

 
I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Executive Directors’ interests under share schemes – audited information
The table below sets out the Executive Directors’ interests in the LTIP.

The LTIP awards are subject to performance conditions as set out in the table below.

Award date

Vesting, exercise 
or release date

As at 
3 May
2021

Granted 
during the
year

Exercised 
during the
year

Lapsed 
during the
year

Gavin Peck

LTIP

22 August 20181

 N/A

3 September 20192

September 2022

15 February 2021

30 September 2021

June 2023

June 2024

SAYE

31 August 2021 

1 October 2024

Steve Alldridge

LTIP

30 September 2021

June 2024

116,959

250,617

847,457

–

–

638,297

16,363

446,808

—

—

–

–

–

—

116,959

–

–

Number of
shares at 
1 May
2022

—

250,617

847,457

638,297

Exercise
price

N/A

N/A

N/A

16,363

55 pence

—

446,808

N/A

1 

I n addition to his LTIP award, Gavin Peck was also granted a tax qualifying CSOP awards over 17,543 shares with an exercise price of £1.71 (2018) and 37,037 
shares with an exercise price of £0.81 (2019). To the extent a CSOP award is exercised at a gain, the extent to which the associated LTIP award can be 
exercised shall be reduced by the amount of the gain so that there is no increase in the pre-tax value of the award. The CSOP award granted in 2018 
lapsed as referred to in the FY21 Directors’ Remuneration Report.

2   38.4% of Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in 2019 vested by reference to EPS performance over the three financial years ending with FY22. The remaining 

portion of the award has lapsed. The vested portion of the award will not be released to Gavin so that he can exercise it until the end of a further two year 
holding period. 

The performance condition applying to Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in 2019 is summarised on page 75.

Vesting of the LTIP award made in February 2021 is based on EPS and share price targets which are set out in the FY21 Directors’ 
Remuneration Report, along with details of the performance underpin, ‘windfall gains’ underpin and cap.

Vesting of the LTIP awards made in September 2021 is based on EPS and share price targets as set out in the table below. 

Measure

EPS1

Share Price2

Weighting

50%

50%

Threshold (20% vesting)

Maximum (100% vesting)

5.6 pence

£0.57

15.6 pence

£2

1 

 Basic EPS for the Company’s FY24, pre-IFRS16 and subject to such adjustments as the Remuneration Committee determines to ensure that performance is 
assessed on a fair and consistent basis. 

2   Average share price over the period of four weeks beginning with the announcement by the company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2023/2024 

financial year.

The awards are subject to a general performance underpin, whereby the Committee shall assess overall financial performance of the 
Group over the performance period in determining the level of vesting and an assessment of whether any of the value of the awards on 
assessment of the performance conditions represents a ‘windfall gain’. The awards are also subject to a cap such that the value of the 
vested shares, determined by reference to the price used to assess the share price element of the performance condition may not exceed 
£2,500,000 in the case of Gavin Peck’s award and £1,750,000 in the case of Steve Alldridge’s award.

Directors’ share ownership guidelines – Audited information
The Committee has adopted a shareholding guideline for the Executive Directors, which requires, as at the date of this Annual Report, a 
shareholding equivalent to 200% of base salary for the CEO and 100% of base salary for other Executive Directors. As noted above, under 
the Policy, the shareholding requirement will be increased to 200% of salary for all Executive Directors. Gavin Peck’s and Steve Alldridge’s 
shareholding as at 1 May 2022, is summarised below.

Executive Director

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Number 
of shares
 counting
towards the
guideline at
1 May 2022

Value of 
shares
counting
 towards
the guideline 1

Value of
shares as
a percentage
 of base salary

Shareholding
 guideline met?

554,636

£315,588

105%

In progress

—

—

—

In progress

1  Based on a share price of 56.9 pence as at 29 April 2022 (being the last trading day prior to the year end of 1 May 2022).

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

77

 
 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

Performance graph and historical CEO remuneration outcomes
The graph below shows the total shareholder return (TSR) performance for the Company’s shares in comparison to the FTSE SmallCap for 
the period from Main Market Admission on 19 July 2018 to 1 May 2022. The TSR performance of the FTSE SmallCap index has been selected 
as it is considered the most appropriate comparator group. For the purposes of the graph, TSR has been calculated as the percentage change 
in the market price of the shares during the period, assuming that dividends are reinvested. The graph shows the value, as at 1 May 2022, 
of £100 invested in shares in the Company on 19 July 2018 compared with £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap.

150

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

)

0
0
1
£
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(

n
r
u
t
e
r

l

r
e
d
o
h
e
r

a
h
s

l

a
t
o
T

Jul 2018 Oct 2018 Jan 2019 Apr 2019

Jul 2019

Oct 2019 Jan 2020

Apr 2020

Jul 2020

Oct 2020

Jan 2021

Apr 2021

Jul 2021

Oct 2021

Jan 2022

Apr 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc

FTSE SmallCap

The table below sets out the CEO’s total remuneration over the last four financial years, valued using the methodology applied to the single 
total figure of remuneration. The Committee does not believe that the remuneration paid in earlier years as a private company bears any 
comparative value to that paid in its time as a public company and, therefore, the Committee has chosen to disclose remuneration only for 
the four most recent financial years (with the figures for FY19 being for the period from Admission on 19 July 2018 to 28 April 2019):

Year (CEO)

2022 (Gavin Peck)

2021 (Gavin Peck)

2020 (Gavin Peck – from 16 January 2020)

2020 (Kevin Keaney – until 16 January 2020)

2019 (Kevin Keaney)

Total single
 figure
 remuneration
£000

Annual 
bonus payout 
(% of maximum
 opportunity)

LTIP vesting 
(% of maximum
 number of
 shares)

612

303

85

267

288

78%

0%

0%

0%

0%

38.4%

0%

N/A1

N/A1

N/A1

1  There were no LTIP capable of vesting in respect of performance ending during the relevant year.

Change in remuneration of Directors compared to group employees
The table below sets out the annual change in salary and fees, benefits and bonus paid to each of the Directors from FY21 to FY22. The 
regulations also require a comparison of the change in the remuneration of the employees of TheWorks.co.uk plc. The Company has no 
employees other than the Executive Directors and, accordingly, strictly no disclosure is required. Given the added complexities of the 
impact in FY21 of furlough, the Company has not included the average employee salary changes between FY20 and FY21 or between FY21 
and FY22, but, in the interests of transparency and having regard to the approach adopted in FY20 and FY21 has provided information on 
the approach to the change in salary of the Group’s UK employees.

Steve Alldridge and Carolyn Bradley were appointed during FY22 and, accordingly, have been excluded from the table below. Notes to 
the table provide additional information in relation to the changes shown and additional information in relation to the changes in previous 
years is set out in the relevant previous Directors’ remuneration reports.

78

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

 
 
 
 
 
I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Executive Directors

Non-Executive Directors

UK employees’ average

Gavin Peck

Catherine Glickman

Harry Morley

Dean Hoyle

Salary/Fees

FY20 – FY21

FY21 – FY22

Taxable benefits

FY20 – FY21

Annual bonus

FY21 – FY22

FY20 – FY21

FY21 – FY22

27%

6% 1

0%

18% 2

N/A

N/A 3

(2%)

6% 1

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

(2%)

6% 1

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

(23%)

24% 4

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

See note 5

23.49%

(17.8%)6

(60.40%)

See note 7

1 

 Gavin Peck’s, Catherine Glickman’s and Harry Morley’s salaries were not increased for FY22, and the increase reflects their voluntary reduction in 
remuneration in FY21 as explained on page 73 and disclosed in the FY21 Directors’ remuneration report.

2  Increase reflects increase due to SAYE discount included in taxable benefits.

3   No annual bonus was earned by Gavin Peck in respect of FY21. Therefore, the percentage change between FY21 and FY22 is not considered to be a 

meaningful disclosure.

4   Dean Hoyle stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2021. For the purposes of this table, his FY22 fees have been annualised to reflect the fees 
he would have earned had he not stepped down from the Board in order to provide a meaningful disclosure, but the voluntary reduction in his fees as 
referred to on page 73 is taken into account.

5   The vast majority of colleagues were furloughed for long periods of FY21, and the average change in employee salary between FY20 and FY21 and 

between FY21 and FY22 would not, therefore, be a meaningful disclosure. During FY21, rates for store and distribution colleagues were increased in line 
with increases in the National Living and Minimum Wages, with colleagues aged 25 plus receiving increases of 6.2% in April 2020 and 2.2% in April 2021. 
We applied an average 2% increase to non-minimum wage colleagues and maintained wage differentials for store teams. In FY22 rates for store and 
distribution colleagues were increased in line with increases in the National Living and Minimum Wages, with colleagues aged 23 plus receiving an 
increase of 6.6% in April 2022. We applied an average 3% increase to non-minimum wage colleagues and maintained a wage differential for store teams. 

6   The decrease in the UK colleagues’ average benefits predominantly reflects an increase in headcount through the year for those not in receipt of taxable 
benefits. Although this is a relatively large percentage decrease, this reflects a decrease in the average value of benefits provided from c.£145 to c.£119.

7   As reported in FY21, standard bonus schemes were removed and only a small number of exceptional bonuses were paid. In FY22 all colleagues (with the 

exception of those at Director grade and 2022 new starters) were paid one week’s pay as a one-off bonus and therefore the percentage change between 
FY21 and FY22 is not considered to be a meaningful disclosure. 

Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table sets out the total remuneration for all employees and the total shareholder distributions in FY21 and FY22. All figures 
provided are taken from the relevant Company accounts.

Total remuneration for all employees (including Executive Directors)

Dividends and share buy backs

FY21
£000

FY22
£000

Percentage
 change

49,988

60,031

0

0

20.1%

0%

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows how the CEO’s remuneration (as taken from the single figure remuneration table and, therefore, taking into account 
the CEO’s voluntary reduction in remuneration in relevant years as disclosed in previous Directors’ remuneration reports and on page 73) 
compares to equivalent remuneration for full-time equivalent UK employees, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.

Method

25th percentile 

Median 

75th percentile 

25th percentile 

Median 

75th percentile 

Pay ratio

Remuneration values (£)

Year

FY22

Option C

FY21

Option C

FY20

Option C

33:1

17:1

21:1

31:1

16:1

19:1

28:1

15:1

17:1

Salary only

Total remuneration

Salary only

Total remuneration

Salary only

Total remuneration

18,533

18,637

18,138

18,138

17,077

17,077

19,115

19,487

18,720

18,720

18,013

18,094

20,389

21,591

19,448

19,675

19,925

20,338

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

79

 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

CEO pay ratio continued
Methodology applied to calculate pay ratios
1. 

 The regulations set out three methodologies for determining the CEO pay ratio. We have chosen ‘Option C’ consistent with the FY20 
and FY21 calculations.

2. 

3. 

 As ratios could be unduly impacted by joiners and leavers who may not participate in all remuneration arrangements in the year 
of joining and leaving, the Committee has modified the statutory basis to exclude any employee not employed throughout the 
financial year.

 Employee pay data is based on full-time equivalent (FTE) base pay for UK employees as at 31 March of the relevant year (based on 
FTE salary for salaried employees and hourly pay rates for hourly paid employees), to which actual pension contributions, bonus 
and benefits have been added, except that the value of SAYE options has been excluded (for the purposes of the FY20 and FY22 
calculations) as their value is not considered to have a significant impact on the CEO pay ratios and sourcing the data for each 
employee is administratively burdensome. The employees have then been ranked by FTE pay and benefits calculated on this basis 
and the employees at the 25th percentile, 50th percentile (median) and 75th percentile have been identified. The FTE pay and benefits 
calculated on this basis for those three employees are then compared to the CEO single figure of remuneration to calculate the ratios; 
the calculations do not, therefore, take into account the impact of the identified employees having been furloughed during any year in 
which that was relevant.

4. 

 For 2020 the CEO single figure of remuneration used comprises the single total figure for FY20 for Kevin Keaney, plus the single total 
figure for Gavin Peck for the period of the year from his appointment as CEO (16 January 2020) to 26 April 2020.

The CEO pay ratio has the potential to vary considerably year on year due to a significant proportion of the CEO’s remuneration package 
comprising performance related variable pay. Gavin Peck earned a bonus equal to 78% of salary in respect of FY22 and the LTIP award 
granted to him in September 2019 is expected to vest at 38.4% of maximum in September 2022. Gavin Peck received no bonus and no LTIP 
vested in respect of FY21. The variance in incentive outcomes between FY21 and FY22 is the primary reason for the increase in the CEO 
pay ratio.

The Company considers that the median pay ratio is consistent with pay, reward and progression policies for the Company’s employees 
as a whole.

Payments to past Directors and for loss of office – audited information
No payments for loss of office or to past Directors were made during FY21.  As disclosed in the FY20 DRR, when Kevin Keaney, the 
Company’s former CEO, left the business he retained his LTIP award granted in September 2019. This vested to the same extent as Gavin 
Peck’s LTIP award granted in September 2019, meaning that after the time-based pro-ration to reflect the proportion of the performance 
period that had elapsed when Mr Keaney left the business, his award has vested in respect of 59,749 shares. The award, including dividend 
equivalents (valued at £717 at the date of vesting), will not be released to Mr Keaney until the end of a further two-year holding period.

Implementation of the Policy 
Information on how the Committee intends to implement the Policy is set out on page 62 and 63.

Shareholder voting at AGM
The following table shows the results of the binding vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Policy at our 2019 AGM, and the advisory vote on 
the Directors’ remuneration report at our 2021 AGM:

For (including discretionary)

Against

Withheld

Approval of the Remuneration Policy

Approval of the Directors’ 
remuneration report

Total number
 of votes

50,116,302

1,500

0

% of 
votes cast

99.99

0.01

N/A

Total 
number 
of votes

39,533,298

15,288

2,810

% of 
votes cast

99.96

0.04

N/A

Approval
This report was approved by the Board on 23 September 2022 and signed on its behalf by:

Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
23 September 2022

80

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Directors’ report

The Directors present their report for the financial year ended 1 May 2022. Additional information which is incorporated by reference into 
this Directors’ report, including information required in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and Listing Rule 9.8.4R of the UK 
Financial Conduct Authority’s Listing Rules, can be located as follows:

Disclosure

Future business developments

Environmental policy

Employee engagement

Diversity policy

Viability 

Section 172 statement

Stakeholder engagement in key decisions

Location

Strategic report – pages 01 to 46.

ESG review – pages 28 to 38.

Our stakeholders – pages 24 and 25.
ESG review – pages 28 to 38. 
Corporate governance report – page 53.

Nomination Committee report – page 58.

Viability statement – pages 45 and 46.

Page 26.

Our stakeholders – pages 24 and 25. 
Section 172 statement – page 26.
Corporate governance report – page 50.

Corporate governance compliance statement

Corporate governance report – page 50.

Financial risk management objectives and policies 
(including hedging policy and use of financial instruments)

Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 119 to 123.

Exposure to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk

Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 119 to 123.

Details of long-term incentive schemes

Directors’ remuneration report – page 75.

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Page 84.

Directors
The Directors of the Company who held office throughout the period are set out below: 

Gavin Peck (CEO) 

Harry Morley (Senior Independent Director) 

Catherine Glickman (Non-Executive Director)

During FY22 the following changes to the Directors of the Company occurred: on 30 September 2021, Carolyn Bradley was appointed 
a Director and became Chair of the Board; Steve Alldridge, having been appointed as permanent CFO, was appointed as a Director 
of the Company, with effect from 14 May 2021; Dean Hoyle retired as a Director on 30 September 2021.

Summaries of the current Directors’ key skills and experience are included on pages 48 and 49.

Results and dividend
The results for the year are set out in the consolidated income statement on page 92. The Directors are proposing a final dividend 
for the year ended 1 May 2022 of 2.4 pence per share payable on 24 November 2022, to shareholders on the register on 4 November 2022.

Articles of Association
The rules governing the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles. The Articles may be amended 
by a special resolution of the Company’s shareholders. The Articles also set out in full the powers of the Directors in relation to issuing 
shares and buying back the Company’s own shares. 

Share capital
Details of the Company’s share capital, including changes during the year, are set out in Note 24 to the financial statements. As at 1 May 
2022, the Company’s issued share capital consisted of 62,500,000 ordinary shares of 1 pence each. There have been no changes to the 
Company’s issued share capital since the financial period end.

Ordinary shareholders are entitled to receive notice of, and to attend and speak at, any general meeting of the Company. On a show 
of hands every shareholder present in person or by proxy (or being a corporation represented by a duly authorised representative) shall 
have one vote, and on a poll every shareholder who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he is the 
holder. The Notice of AGM specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies.

Other than the general provisions of the Articles (and prevailing legislation) there are no specific restrictions of the size of a holding 
or on the transfer of the ordinary shares.

The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in the restriction of the transfer 
of securities or on voting rights. No shareholder holds securities carrying any special rights or control over the Company’s share capital.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

81

 
 
 
Directors’ report continued

Authority for the Company to purchase its own shares
Subject to authorisation by shareholder resolution, the Company may purchase its own shares in accordance with the Act. Any shares 
which have been bought back may be held as treasury shares or cancelled immediately upon completion of the purchase.

At the Company’s AGM held on 30 September 2021, the Company was generally and unconditionally authorised by its shareholders 
to make market purchases (within the meaning of Section 693 of the Companies Act 2006) purchase up to a maximum of 6,250,000 of 
its ordinary shares. The Company has not repurchased any of its ordinary shares under this authority, which is due to expire at the AGM 
to be held on 27 October 2022, and accordingly has an unexpired authority to purchase up to 6,250,000 ordinary shares with a nominal 
value of £62,500.00. A resolution to renew the authority for a further year will be proposed at the 2022 AGM.

Directors’ interests
The number of ordinary shares of the Company in which the Directors were beneficially interested as at 1 May 2022 is set out in the 
Directors’ remuneration report on page 76.

Directors’ indemnities
The Company’s Articles provide, subject to the provisions of UK legislation, an indemnity for Directors and Officers of the Company and 
the Group in respect of liabilities they may incur in the discharge of their duties or in the exercise of their powers.

Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover is maintained by the Company and is in place in respect of all the Company’s Directors 
at the date of this report. The Company reviews its level of cover on an annual basis.

Compensation for loss of office
The Company does not have any agreements with any Executive Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of office 
or employment resulting from a takeover except that provisions of the Company’s LTIP and other share schemes may cause options 
and awards outstanding under such schemes to vest on a takeover. Further information is provided in the Directors’ remuneration report 
on page 63.

Significant interests
The table below shows the interests in shares notified to the Company in accordance with the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules as at 1 May 2022, and 13 September 2022 (being the latest practicable date prior to publication of this Annual Report):

Name of shareholder

Schroders plc

Dean Hoyle  
(including interest of Janet Hoyle)

Jupiter Fund Management plc

Standard Life Aberdeen plc

BennBridge Limited

Canaccord Genuity Group Inc.

Downing Strategic Micro-Cap 
Investment Trust

Graeme Coulthard

As at 1 May 2022

As at 14 September 2022

Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held

Percentage of 
total voting rights held

Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held

Percentage of 
total voting rights held

12,043,141

10,329,378

6,467,667

3,109,275

3,054,597

—

—

—

19.27%

16.53%

10.34%

4.97%

4.89%

—

—

—

12,043,141

10,329,378

5,317,667

3,109,275

3,054,597

3,000,000

1,950,000

1,910,247

19.27%

16.53%

8.50%

4.97%

4.89%

4.80%

3.12%

3.06%

Branches outside the UK
Other than ten stores located in the Republic of Ireland, the Company has no branches outside the UK.

Employee involvement
Information relating to employees of the Group and how the Company engages with its workforce can be found on pages 24 and 25.

Disabled employees
It is the policy of the Group to provide equal recruitment and other opportunities for all colleagues regardless of sex, age, religion, 
race, disability or sexual orientation. The Group gives full consideration to applications for employment from disabled people, where 
they adequately fulfil the requirements of the job. Once employed by the Group, we ensure that disabled colleagues have full access 
to training and career development opportunities. Where colleagues become disabled, it is the Group’s policy to provide continuing 
employment and retraining where practicable.

Political donations
The Company did not make any political donations during the year.

82

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Change of control – significant agreements
There are a number of agreements that may take effect after, or terminate upon, a change of control of the Company, such as commercial 
contracts, bank loan agreements and property lease arrangements.

The only significant agreement to which the Company is a party that takes effect, alters or terminates upon a change of control of the 
Company following a takeover bid, and the effect thereof, is the Company’s committed bank facility dated 10 June 2022 which contains 
a provision such that, in the event of a change of control, the facility may be cancelled and all outstanding amounts, together with 
accrued interest, will become repayable on the date falling 30 days following written notice being given by the lenders that the facility 
has been cancelled.

Audit information
Each of the Directors at the date of the approval of this report confirms that:

•  so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor are unaware; and
•  the Director has taken all the reasonable steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any 

relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor are aware of the information.

The confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Companies Act 2006.

Auditor
KPMG LLP have indicated its willingness to continue in office and a resolution seeking to reappoint them will be proposed at the 
forthcoming AGM.

Annual General Meeting
The AGM will be held on 27 October 2022. The Notice of AGM is contained in a separate letter from the Chair accompanying this report.

Post-balance sheet events
Other than as disclosed in the Strategic report, there have been no material post-balance sheet events involving the Company or any of 
the Company’s subsidiaries as at the date of this report.

The Strategic report on pages 1 to 46 and this Directors’ report have been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance 
upon, applicable English company law and any liability of the Directors in connection with these reports shall be subject to the limitations 
and restrictions provided by such law.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

By order of the Board

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
23 September 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

83

 
 
 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and Parent Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. The Company is required to include these financial statements in an annual financial report 
prepared using the single electronic reporting format specified in the TD ESEF Regulation. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent Company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law, 
they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with International Accounting Standards in conformity with the 
requirements of UK adopted International Accounting Standards and applicable law and have elected to prepare the Parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with accounting standards including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.

Under company law, the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group 
and Parent Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;
•  for the Group annual statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standards in 

conformity with the requirements of UK adopted International Accounting Standards;

•  for the Parent Company annual statements, state whether appropriate UK accounting standards have been followed, subject 

to any material departures disclosed and explained in the Parent Company annual statements;

•  assess the Group and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 

concern; and

•  use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease 

operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Parent Company and that enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal control as they determine 
is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, 
and have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent 
and detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic report, Directors’ report, Directors’ 
remuneration report and Corporate governance report that comply with that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the Annual Financial Report
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a 
whole; and

•  the Strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the issuer and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

We consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

By order of the Board

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
23 September 2022

84

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Independent auditor’s report
To the Members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of TheWorks.co.uk plc 
(“the Company”) for the 52 week period ended 1 May 2022 which 
comprise the Consolidated income statement, Consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, Consolidated statement of 
financial position, Consolidated statement of changes in equity, 
Consolidated cash flow statement, Company statement of 
financial position and Company statement of changes in equity 
and the related notes, including the accounting policies in note 1. 

Overview

Materiality: 
group financial 
statements as a whole

Coverage

Key audit matters 

Recurring risks

In our opinion: 

•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 

of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 1 May 
2022 and of the Group’s profit for the 52 week period then ended; 

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared 
in accordance with international accounting standards in 
conformity with the requirements of UK-adopted international 
accounting standards; 

•  the parent Company financial statements have been properly 

prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, including 
FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework; and 

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with 

the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities are described below. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis 
for our opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with our report to the 
audit committee. 

We were first appointed as auditor by the directors on 11 July 2018. 
The period of total uninterrupted engagement is for the 4 
financial years ended 1 May 2022. We have fulfilled our ethical 
responsibilities under, and we remain independent of the Group in 
accordance with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed public interest entities. No non-audit 
services prohibited by that standard were provided. 

£750k (2021:£500k)

0.29% (2021: 0.28%) of revenue

100% (2021: 100%) of revenue

2022 vs 2021

Existence of inventory 
held in stores

Going concern

Carrying amount of 
Parent Company 
investment in subsidiaries

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

85

 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report continued
To the Members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those 
which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. We summarise below the key audit matters, in decreasing order of audit significance, in arriving at our audit opinion 
above, together with our key audit procedures to address those matters and, as required for public interest entities, our results from those 
procedures. These matters were addressed, and our results are based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the 
purpose of, our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that 
opinion, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. 

The UK government COVID trading restrictions imposed on non-essential retailers in FY21 was regarded as an impairment trigger for all 
stores and in these circumstances we determined that the carrying value of stores had a high degree of estimation uncertainty, albeit 
lower than in FY20 due to the success of the government’s vaccination programme. The COVID trading restrictions also interrupted the 
company’s normal process for selling through terminal stock and in these circumstances we determined that there was a high degree 
of estimation uncertainty associated with the NRV provision. These restrictions no longer apply and, accordingly, we no longer consider 
these two matters to be a key audit matters. 

Our response

Our procedures included: 

•  Tests of detail: We counted 1,485 lines items at 
30 stores and compared our count results with 
the company inventory records;

•  Assessing methodology: We assessed the 

methodology used by the group to calculate the 
shrinkage provision; 

•  Independent reperformance: We performed 

our own evaluation of the projected shrinkage 
based on our count results, which we compared 
to management’s estimate; and  

•  Assessing transparency: We assessed the 

adequacy of the group’s disclosures about the 
degree of estimation involved in arriving at the 
shrinkage provision.

We performed the detailed tests above rather 
than seeking to rely on any of the group’s controls 
because our knowledge of the design of these 
controls indicated that we would not be able to 
obtain the required evidence to support reliance 
on controls. 

Our results 
We found the provision for existence of inventory 
held in the stores to be acceptable (2021: acceptable).

Existence 
of inventory 
held in stores
£20.4 million; 
2021: £21.2 million

Refer to page 54 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 
97 (accounting 
policy) and page 
115 (financial 
disclosures).

The risk

Subjective estimation
Inventory is a significant balance. It is held in stores, at 
the Company warehouse and at a third party logistics 
provider. The risks described below relate to inventory 
held at the stores.

It is usual in a retail environment for differences to arise 
between the inventory records and physical quantities 
for a variety of reasons, including theft and other losses, 
often referred to as shrinkage.

The existence and completeness of inventory and the 
extent of any shrinkage is assessed by management 
through sample inventory counts at every store 
throughout the year (“tactical counts”) and full wall-to-
wall at a number of stores (“4-wall counts”) (together 
“management’s count processes”). The inventory records 
are adjusted to reflect results of management’s count 
processes. A shrinkage provision is established to cater 
for an estimate of the losses incurred between the count 
dates and the year end.

Management’s count processes in the stores during FY22 
was disrupted by a cyber incident in March. As a result, 
management has not been able to conduct as many 
4 wall counts as planned to confirm the existence and 
completeness of store inventory during the course of 
the year. Therefore, management has conducted 4-wall 
counts at a sample of stores and has estimated the level 
of shrinkage on this basis. It is possible that the results 
of the sample selected may not be representative of the 
population as a whole.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the provision for 
shrinkage has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, 
with a potential range of reasonable outcomes greater 
than our materiality for the financial statements as a 
whole. The financial statements (note 17) disclose the 
sensitivity estimated by the group.

86

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

The risk

Our response

Going concern 
Refer to page 54 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 97 
(accounting policy).

Disclosure quality
The financial statements explain how the Board has 
formed a judgement that it is appropriate to adopt the 
going concern basis of preparation for the Group and 
parent Company.

That judgement is based on an evaluation of the inherent 
risks to the Group’s and Company’s business model and 
how those risks might affect the Group’s and Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue operations over 
a period of at least a year from the date of approval of 
the financial statements. 

The risks most likely to adversely affect the Group’s 
and Company’s available financial resources and 
metrics relevant to debt covenants over this period 
were those associated with the revenues forecasts and 
how thy might be impacted by the effect of inflation on 
disposable incomes and consumer demand. 

The risk for our audit was whether or not those risks 
were such that they amounted to a material uncertainty 
that may have cast significant doubt about the ability 
to continue as a going concern. Had they been 
such, then that fact would have been required to 
have been disclosed.

We considered whether these risks could plausibly 
affect the liquidity or covenant compliance in the 
going concern period by assessing the directors’ 
sensitivities over the level of available financial 
resources and covenant thresholds indicated by the 
Group’s financial forecasts taking account of severe, 
but plausible, adverse effects that could arise from 
these risks individually and collectively.

Our procedures included: 

•  Funding assessment: Considering the availability 
and sufficiency of the financing arrangements 
in place at the Group, including the headroom 
on financial covenants in place on the Group’s 
renewed revolving credit facility;

•  Sensitivity analysis: Challenging the stress testing 
performed by the Directors considering the severe 
but plausible scenarios that could arise; 
•  Historical comparisons: Assessing historical 

forecasting accuracy, by comparing previous 
forecast results to those actually achieved by 
the Group;

•  Assessing assumptions: Assessing the key 

assumptions (including growth rates in turnover 
and margin expectations) as included in the 
directors’ business plans and approved at 
the period-end date by considering historic 
store performance, recent trading and sector 
knowledge to set our own expectations; 
•  Evaluating directors’ intent: Evaluating the 

achievability of the actions the directors consider 
they would take to improve the position should the 
risks materialise, taking into account the extent 
to which the directors can control the timing and 
outcome of these;

•  Comparing assumptions: Considering whether 
the forecasts and assumptions used by the 
Directors are consistent with other forecasts used 
by the Group (including those used to assess 
recoverability of Parent Company investments in 
subsidiaries and recoverability of store assets);
•  Conducting sensitivity analysis: We considered 

the directors’ downside scenario, including 
performing our own sensitivity analysis and 
comparing that to management’s and, as a result, 
required management to consider a more severe 
downside in more detail; and

•  Assessing transparency: Considering whether the 
going concern disclosure in the basis of preparation 
of the accounts gives a full and accurate 
description of the Directors’ assessment of 
going concern, including the identified risks and 
corresponding assumptions.

Our results
We found the going concern disclosures in the basis 
of preparation of the accounts without any material 
uncertainty to be acceptable (2021: acceptable).

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

87

 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report continued
To the Members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

Carrying 
amount 
of Parent 
Company 
investment in 
subsidiaries
£57.3 million 
(2021: 57.3 million)

Refer to page 54 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 97 
(accounting policy) 
and page 129 
(financial 
disclosures).

The risk

Forecast-based assessment
The carrying amount of the Parent Company’s 
investments in subsidiaries represents 100% (2021: 80.1%) 
of the Parent Company’s total assets. The net assets 
of the subsidiaries are less than the carrying amount 
of the Parent Company’s investment which is therefore 
assessed with reference to their discounted forecast 
future cash flows. This is inherently judgemental due to 
the subjectivity and uncertainty involved in selecting 
the appropriate key assumptions and preparing future 
discounted cash flows. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the carrying value of the 
parent company’s investment in subsidiaries has a high 
degree of estimation uncertainty, with a potential range 
of reasonable outcomes greater than our materiality 
for the financial statements as a whole. The financial 
statements (Note 33) disclose the sensitivity estimated by 
the Company.

Our response

Our procedures included: 

Our sector experience: We used our sector 
knowledge and understanding of the business 
and considered whether or not they had been 
appropriately captured in the impairment models;

Our valuation expertise: We used our experience 
to assist us in assessing appropriateness of the 
methodology and assumptions. In addition we 
performed an independent calculation of the 
discount rate based on market data to assist us in 
assessing the discount rate assumptions used by 
the Group;

Assessing assumptions: Assessing the key 
assumptions (including growth rates in turnover and 
margin expectations) as included in the directors’ 
business plans and approved at the period-end date 
by considering historic performance and industry 
forecasts to set our own expectations;

Sensitivity analysis: We applied sensitivities to 
key assumptions to assess their impact on the 
recoverability of the assets;

Historical comparison: We evaluated the historical 
accuracy of the Group’s forecasts by comparing 
previous budget to actual results;

Comparing valuations: We compared the results of 
discounted cash flows against the Group’s market 
capitalisation, after adjusting for intercompany 
debt to assess the reasonableness of those cash 
flows; and

Assessing transparency: We also considered the 
adequacy of the Group’s disclosure of the key risks 
and sensitivity around the outcome, and whether 
that disclosure reflected the risks inherent in the 
valuation of investments in subsidiaries.

We performed the tests above rather than seeking 
to rely on any of the Group’s controls because the 
nature of the balance is such that we would expect 
to obtain audit evidence primarily through the 
detailed procedures described.

Our results
The results of our testing were satisfactory and we 
found the impairment recorded and the resulting 
carrying value of the investment in subsidiaries to 
be acceptable (2021: acceptable). 

3. Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £750k (2021: £500k), determined with reference to a benchmark of 
revenue of £265m (2021: £181m) of which it represents 0.28% (2021: 0.28%). We consider total revenue to be the most appropriate benchmark 
as it provides a more stable measure year on year than group profit before tax.

Materiality for the parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £600k (2021: £400k), This is lower than the materiality we 
would otherwise have determined with reference to a benchmark of Company net assets, of which it represents 80% (2021: 80%).

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower threshold, 
performance materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial misstatements in individual account 
balances add up to a material amount across the financial statements as a whole.

Performance materiality was set at 65% (2021: 75%) of materiality for the financial statements as a whole, which equates to £487.5k (2021: 
£375k). We applied this percentage in our determination of performance materiality based on the level of identified misstatements and 
control deficiencies in the control environment during the prior period.

88

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Benchmark – Revenue 
£265m (2021: £180m)

Group materiality 
£750k (2021: £500k)

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

£750k 
Whole financial statements 
materiality (2021: £500k)

£487.5k 
Whole financial statements 
performance materiality 
(2021: £375k)

£37.5k 
Misstatements reported 
to the audit committee 
(2021: £25k)

Group profit before tax

100%

I100+100+
100100+

(2021: 100%)

9595++55++II

  Revenue

  Group materiality

Group revenue

(2021: 100%)

100%

I100+100+
100100+
I100+100+
100100+

100%

Group total assets

(2021: 100%)

3. Our application of materiality and an overview of the 
scope of our audit continued
Performance materiality for the parent Company was set at 75% 
(2021: 75%) which equates to £450k (2021: £300k). We applied 
this percentage in our determination of performance materiality 
because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated 
level of risk.

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected or 
uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £37.5k (2021: £25k), 
in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.

The scope of the audit work performed was predominantly substantive 
as we placed limited reliance upon the Group’s internal control over 
financial reporting.

As disclosed on page 8, the company experienced a cyber security 
incident involving unauthorised access to its computer systems 
which temporarily affected till systems, replenishment deliveries 
to stores and delayed the fulfilment of online orders. With support 
from our cyber security specialists, we considered management’s 
response to this incident and assessed the risks of misstatement 
that it gave rise to and determined that the impact on the audit 
approach was limited given its substantive nature. 

The Group team performed the audit of the Group as if it was 
a single aggregated set of financial information. The audit was 
performed using the materiality and performance materiality levels 
set out above.

4. Going concern
The directors have prepared the financial statements on the 
going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the Group 
or the Company or to cease their operations, and as they have 
concluded that the Group’s and the Company’s financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are 
no material uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt 
over their ability to continue as a going concern for at least a year 
from the date of approval of the financial statements (“the going 
concern period”). 

An explanation of how we evaluated management’s assessment of 
going concern is set out in the related key audit matter in section 2 
of this report.

Our conclusions based on this work:

•  we consider that the directors’ use of the going concern basis 
of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements 
is appropriate;

•  we have not identified, and concur with the directors’ 

assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to 
events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast 
significant doubt on the Group’s or Company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern for the going concern period;

•  we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation 
to the directors’ statement in note 1 to the financial statements 
on the use of the going concern basis of accounting with no 
material uncertainties that may cast significant doubt over the 
Group and Company’s use of that basis for the going concern 
period, and we found the going concern disclosure in note 1 to be 
acceptable; and

•  the related statement under the Listing Rules set out on page  
81 is materially consistent with the financial statements and our 
audit knowledge.

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and 
as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, 
the above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group or the 
Company will continue in operation. 

  Full scope for group audit purposes 2022

  Full scope for group audit purposes 2021

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

89

+
I
+
+
I
I
+
I
+
+
I
I
+
I
+
+
I
I
 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report continued
To the Members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

5. Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – 
ability to detect
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement 
due to fraud
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) 
we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive 
or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit 
fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included:

•  Enquiring of directors and inspection of policy documentation as 
to the Group’s high-level policies and procedures to prevent and 
detect fraud, including the Group’s channel for “whistleblowing”, 
as well as whether they have knowledge of any actual, 
suspected or alleged fraud;

•  Reading Board, audit committee, and remuneration committee 

meeting minutes;

•  Considering remuneration incentive schemes and performance 
targets for directors and how these are impacted by separately 
disclosed items; and

•  Using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or 

unexpected relationships.

We communicated identified fraud risks throughout the audit 
team and remained alert to any indications of fraud throughout 
the audit.

As required by auditing standards, and taking into account 
possible pressures to meet profit targets, we perform procedures to 
address the risk of management override of controls, in particular 
the risk that Group management may be in a position to make 
inappropriate accounting entries. 

On this audit we do not believe there is a fraud risk related to 
revenue recognition due to the simple recognition criteria the 
majority of revenue streams, which are recognised at the point of 
sale and the limited opportunity for management to manipulate 
the revenue recognised.

We did not identify any additional fraud risks.

We performed procedures including: 

• 

Identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test based 
on risk criteria and comparing the identified entries to supporting 
documentation. These included: unusual revenue pairings and 
unusual journals with a credit or debit entry to cash. 

•  Assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting 

estimates are indicative of a potential bias.

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due 
to non-compliance with laws and regulations
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably 
be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements 
from our general commercial and sector experience and through 
discussion with the directors and other management (as required 
by auditing standards) and discussed with the directors and other 
management the policies and procedures regarding compliance 
with laws and regulations. 

As the Group is regulated, our assessment of risks involved gaining 
an understanding of the control environment including the entity’s 
procedures for complying with regulatory requirements. 

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout our 
team and remained alert to any indications of non-compliance 
throughout the audit. The potential effect of these laws and 
regulations on the financial statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group is subject to laws and regulations that directly 
affect the financial statements including financial reporting 
legislation (including related companies legislation), distributable 

90

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

profits legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the 
extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part of our 
procedures on the related financial statement items. 

Secondly, the Group is subject to many other laws and regulations 
where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material 
effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial statements, 
for instance through the imposition of fines or litigation. We 
identified the following areas as those most likely to have such 
an effect: health and safety, data protection laws, anti-bribery 
and employment law. Auditing standards limit the required audit 
procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws and 
regulations to enquiry of the directors and other management 
and inspection of regulatory and legal correspondence, if any. 
Therefore if a breach of operational regulations is not disclosed 
to us or evident from relevant correspondence, an audit will not 
detect that breach.

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of 
law or regulation
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an 
unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material 
misstatements in the financial statements, even though we have 
properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with 
auditing standards. For example, the further removed non-
compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and 
transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely the 
inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards would 
identify it. 

In addition, as with any audit, there remained a higher risk of 
non-detection of fraud, as these may involve collusion, forgery, 
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of 
internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect 
material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing 
non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect 
non-compliance with all laws and regulations.

6. We have nothing to report on the other information 
in the Annual Report
The directors are responsible for the other information presented 
in the Annual Report together with the financial statements. Our 
opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion 
or, except as explicitly stated below, any form of assurance 
conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether, based on our financial statements audit work, 
the information therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with 
the financial statements or our audit knowledge. Based solely on 
that work we have not identified material misstatements in the 
other information.

Strategic report and directors’ report 
Based solely on our work on the other information: 

•  we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic 

report and the directors’ report; 

• 

• 

in our opinion the information given in those reports for the 
financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and 

in our opinion those reports have been prepared in accordance 
with the Companies Act 2006. 

Directors’ remuneration report 
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to 
be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006. 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

6. We have nothing to report on the other information 
in the Annual Report continued
Disclosures of emerging and principal risks and longer-term viability 
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether there 
is a material inconsistency between the directors’ disclosures in 
respect of emerging and principal risks and the viability statement, 
and the financial statements and our audit knowledge. 

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent 

Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us; or 

•  the parent Company financial statements and the part of 

the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law 

Based on those procedures, we have nothing material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to: 

•  the directors’ confirmation within the Viability statement page 45 

that they have carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and 
principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten 
its business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity; 

•  The Principal risks and uncertainties disclosures describing these 
risks and how emerging risks are identified, and explaining how 
they are being managed and mitigated; and 

•  the directors’ explanation in the Viability statement of how they 
have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what period 
they have done so and why they considered that period to be 
appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period 
of their assessment, including any related disclosures drawing 
attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions. 

We are also required to review the Viability statement, set out on 
page 45 under the Listing Rules. Based on the above procedures, 
we have concluded that the above disclosures are materially 
consistent with the financial statements and our audit knowledge.

Our work is limited to assessing these matters in the context of 
only the knowledge acquired during our financial statements 
audit. As we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as 
subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, 
the absence of anything to report on these statements is not a 
guarantee as to the Group’s and Company’s longer-term viability.

Corporate governance disclosures 
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether there 
is a material inconsistency between the directors’ corporate 
governance disclosures and the financial statements and our 
audit knowledge.

Based on those procedures, we have concluded that each of the 
following is materially consistent with the financial statements and 
our audit knowledge: 

•  the directors’ statement that they consider that the annual 
report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, 
balanced and understandable, and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy; 

•  the section of the annual report describing the work of the 

Audit Committee, including the significant issues that the audit 
committee considered in relation to the financial statements, 
and how these issues were addressed; and

•  the section of the annual report that describes the review of 

the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management and internal 
control systems.

We are required to review the part of the Corporate Governance 
Statement relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules 
for our review. We have nothing to report in this respect. 

7. We have nothing to report on the other matters on 
which we are required to report by exception 
Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you if, 
in our opinion: 

are not made; or 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we 

require for our audit. 

We have nothing to report in these respects. 

8. Respective responsibilities 
Directors’ responsibilities 
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 84, 
the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial 
statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable 
the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group 
and parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and 
using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either 
intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our 
opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted 
in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or 
error and are considered material if, individually or in aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s 
website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

The Company is required to include these financial statements 
in an annual financial report prepared using the single electronic 
reporting format specified in the TD ESEF Regulation. This auditor’s 
report provides no assurance over whether the annual financial 
report has been prepared in accordance with that format. 

9. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe 
our responsibilities 
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the 
Company’s members those matters we are required to state to 
them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility 
to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members, 
as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed. 

Anthony Sykes
(Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants 
15 Canada Square, London, E14 5GL
23 September 2022

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

91

 
 
 
Consolidated income statement
For the period ended 1 May 2022

52 weeks to 1 May 2022

53 weeks to 2 May 2021 (Restated – Note 5, Note 7)

Result before
 Adjusting items
£000

Note

Adjusting
items
£000

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Other operating income

Distribution expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance income

Finance expenses

Net financing expense

Profit/(loss) before tax

Taxation

Profit/(loss) for the period

Profit/(loss) before tax and IFRS 16 

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

3

4

7

9

10

5

12

12

264,630

(216,082)

48,548

(111)

(9,128)

(24,004)

15,305

16

(5,192)

(5,176)

10,129

(1,436)

8,693

9,525

13.9

13.7

Profit for the period is attributable to equity holders of the Parent.

—

29

29

—

—

—

29

—

—

—

29

—

29

(241)

Total
£000

264,630

(216,053)

48,577

(111)

(9,128)

(24,004)

15,334

16

(5,192)

(5,176)

10,158

(1,436)

8,722

9,284

14.0

13.7

Result before
 Adjusting items
£000

Adjusting
items
£000

—

975

975

—

—

(199)

776

—

—

—

776

—

776

(94)

180,680

(170,342)

10,338

17,081

(6,440)

(19,088)

1,891

18

(5,486)

(5,468)

(3,577)

502

(3,075)

(3,395)

(4.9)

(4.9)

Total
£000

180,680

(169,367)

11,313

17,081

(6,440)

(19,287)

2,667

18

(5,486)

(5,468)

(2,801)

502

(2,299)

(3,489)

(3.7)

(3.7)

92

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the period ended 1 May 2022

Profit/(loss) for the year

Items that may be recycled subsequently into profit and loss

Cash flow hedges – changes in fair value

Cash flow hedges – reclassified to profit and loss

Cost of hedging reserve – changes in fair value

Cost of hedging reserve – reclassified to profit and loss

Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the period, net of income tax

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the period attributable to equity shareholders of the Parent

FY22
£000

8,722

4,181

(321)

(83)

94

—

3,871

12,593

FY21
£000

(2,299)

(2,865)

252

(90)

(160)

536

(2,327)

(4,626)

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

93

 
 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position
As at 1 May 2022

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Derivative financial asset

Current tax asset

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Derivative financial liability

Current tax liability

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Provisions

Derivative financial liability

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent

Share capital

Share premium

Merger reserve

Share-based payment reserve

Hedging reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

Note

13

14

14, 15

16

17

18

25

19

20

15, 20

21

22

25

FY22
£000

2,672

13,970

94,351

3,477

114,470

29,387

8,427

2,393

—

16,280

56,487

FY21
(Restated 
 – Note 14)
£000

2,463 

17,524 

112,542 

2,852 

135,381 

 29,132 

 6,913 

 — 

 704 

8,315 

45,064 

170,957

180,445 

—

25,434

35,958

204

—

1,115

62,711

7,095 

31,552 

26,188 

718 

1,649 

— 

67,202 

15, 20

85,702

104,362 

22

25

24

24

913

—

86,615

149,326

21,631

625

28,322

(54)

2,252

2,227

—

53 

104,415 

171,617 

8,828 

625 

28,322 

(54)

1,601 

(1,203)

(11,741)

(20,463)

21,631

8,828

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 23 September 2022 and were signed on its behalf by:

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 11325534

94

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Balance at 26 April 2020

Total comprehensive income for the period

Loss for the period

Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the period

Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging 
transferred to the cost of inventory (Note 25)

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charges

Total transactions with owners

Balance at 2 May 2021

Total comprehensive income for the period

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the period

Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging 
transferred to the cost of inventory (Note 25)

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charges

Total transactions with owners

Balance at 1 May 2022

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Share
capital
£000

625

Share
premium
£000

28,322

Merger
reserve
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

Hedging
reserve 1
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

(54)

1,506

1,171

(18,164)

13,406

625

28,322

(54)

1,601

(1,203)

(20,463)

8,828

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 

—

—

—

—

—

— 

—

—

—

14

14

—

81

81

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

651

651

—

(2,299)

(2,299)

(2,327)

—

(2,299)

(4,626)

—

—

—

(33)

81

81

—

8,722

8,722

3,871

—

8,722

12,593

—

—

—

(441)

651

651

(2,341)

(2,341)

(33)

—

—

3,871

3,871

(441)

—

—

625

28,322

(54)

2,252

2,227

(11,741)

21,631

1 

 Hedging reserve includes £175,956 (FY21: £155,124) in relation to changes in forward points which are recognised in other comprehensive income and 
accumulated as a cost of hedging within the hedging reserve.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

95

 
 
 
Consolidated cash flow statement
For the period ended 1 May 2022

Profit/(loss) for the year (including Adjusting items)

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Impairment of property, plant and equipment

Reversal of impairment of property, plant and equipment

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

Impairment of right-of-use assets

Reversal of impairment of right-of-use assets

Amortisation of intangible assets

Derivative exchange gain

Financial income

Financial expense

Interest on lease liabilities

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of right-of-use assets

Profit on disposal of lease liability

Loss on disposal of intangible assets

Share-based payment charges

Taxation

Operating cash flows before changes in working capital

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

Increase in inventories

Increase in trade and other payables

Increase/(decrease) in provisions

Cash flows from operating activities

Corporation tax paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment

Acquisition of intangible assets

Interest received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Payment of lease liabilities (capital)

Payment of lease liabilities (interest)

Payment of RCF fees

Other interest paid

Repayment of bank borrowings

Issue of bank loan

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Exchange rate movements

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

96

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

FY22
£000

8,722

5,005

416

(175)

20,029

710

(980)

806

289

(16)

692

4,500

244

2,066

(2,340)

—

651

1,436

42,055

(1,514)

(892)

9,336

399

49,384

(222)

49,162

(1,936)

(1,015)

16

(2,935)

(25,969)

(4,500)

—

(157)

(7,500)

—

(38,126)

8,101

(136)

8,315

16,280

FY21
(Restated 
 – Note 14)
£000

(2,299)

5,187

957

(1,000)

23,311

4

(874)

947

(444)

(18)

617

4,869

262

373

(464)

311

81

(502)

31,318

1,217

(2,284)

167

(261)

30,157

(30)

30,127

(1,869)

(526)

18

(2,377)

(14,327)

(4,869)

(619)

(279)

(10,000)

7,500

(22,594)

5,156

218

2,941

8,315

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Notes to the consolidated financial statements
(Forming part of the financial statements)

1. Accounting policies
Where accounting policies are particular to an individual note, narrative regarding the policy is included with the relevant note; 
for example, the accounting policy in relation to inventory is detailed in Note 17 (Inventories). 

(a) General information
TheWorks.co.uk plc is one of the UK’s leading multi-channel value retailers of arts and crafts, stationery, toys and books, offering 
customers a differentiated proposition as a value alternative to full price specialist retailers. The Group operates a network of over 500 
stores in the UK & Ireland and an online store.

TheWorks.co.uk plc (the ‘Company’) is a UK-based public limited company (11325534) with its registered office at Boldmere House, 
Faraday Avenue, Hams Hall Distribution Park, Coleshill, Birmingham B46 1AL. 

These consolidated financial statements for the 52 weeks ended 1 May 2022 (FY22 or the ‘Period’) comprise the results of the Company 
and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the ‘Group’), and are presented in pounds sterling. All values are rounded to the nearest 
thousand (£000), except when otherwise indicated. 

(b) Basis of preparation
The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards.

The preparation of the financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect 
the application of policies, and the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated 
assumptions are based on historical experience, future budgets and forecasts, and various other factors that are believed to be 
reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets 
and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in 
which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects 
both current and future periods. The Group’s significant judgements and estimates relate to going concern and the inventory shrinkage 
provision; these are described in Note 1(f).

(i) Going concern
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which the Directors consider appropriate for the reasons 
set out below.

The Directors have assessed the prospects of the Group, taking into account its current position and the potential impact of the principal 
risks documented in the Strategic report on pages 39 to 44.

The Group has prepared cash flow forecasts for a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of these financial 
statements, based on the Board’s forecast for FY23 and its 3 Year Plan, referred to as the ‘Base Case’ scenario. In addition, a ‘severe but 
plausible’ ‘Downside Case’ sensitivity has been prepared to support the Board’s conclusion regarding going concern, by stress testing the 
Base Case to indicate the financial headroom resulting from applying more pessimistic assumptions.

In assessing the basis of preparation the Directors have considered:

•  the external environment;
•  the Group’s financial position including the quantum and expectations regarding availability of bank facilities;
•  the potential impact on financial performance of the risks described in the Strategic report;
•  the output of the Base Case scenario, which represents the Group’s estimate of the most likely financial performance over the 

forecast period;

•  measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of a significant downturn in trading;
•  the resilience of the Group to these risks having a more severe impact, evaluated via the Downside Case which shows the impact on the 

Group’s cash flows, bank facility headroom and covenants; and

•  the response to situations in which consumer market conditions are even more severe than the Downside Case.

These factors are described below.

External environment
The risks which were most prominent in the Board’s consideration of going concern are those relating to the economy and the market, 
with the nature of these risks having altered significantly since last year’s Annual Report. COVID-19 was the dominant factor in making this 
judgement in relation to the financial statements for FY20 and FY21, but the Board’s assessment is that there is now only a residual risk 
associated with this. Instead, the risk of weaker consumer demand is now considered to be the greatest risk, due to the factors that have 
been widely reported externally in recent months, including a much higher level of inflation and concerns about its effect on household 
budgets and consumer spending on discretionary items.

The potential adverse impact on trading in the event of a further weakening of consumer demand due to general economic or market 
weakness is considered to be of a smaller magnitude than the impact of the full national lockdowns which were experienced during 
periods of the COVID-19 pandemic.

Risks relating to Brexit are not considered significant for the Group and therefore are not expected to have any bearing on the basis 
of preparation of the financial statements.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

97

 
 
 
1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Financial position and bank facilities
The cash and borrowings of the Group at the period end are shown in the financial statement Notes 19 (Cash and cash equivalents) 
and 20 (Borrowings). In addition, Note 25 (Financial instruments) describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing 
its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposure to credit 
risk and liquidity risk.

At 1 May 2022 the Group held net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £16.3m (FY21: net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £0.8m).

The Group’s bank facilities were renewed in June 2022, and now comprise a larger revolving credit facility (RCF), increased to £30.0m 
which terminates at the end of November 2025. The facility includes two financial covenants which are structured in a way that is typical 
for a retail business of this size. The covenants are tested quarterly: 

1. 

the level of net debt to LTM (last twelve months’ rolling) EBITDA (maximum ratio 2.5x).

2. 

 the ‘Fixed Charge Cover’ or ratio of LTM EBITDA prior to deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest (minimum ratio 1.20x 
until 31 October 2023, 1.25x until 31 October 2024 and 1.30x thereafter).

The bank facility is larger than the Group expects to use, and has been sized in this way to provide the Board and stakeholders with 
additional assurance as to the availability of liquidity, given the current heightened levels of uncertainty as regards the economy and 
external environment, and to provide such assurance beyond the going concern period.

Potential impact of risks on Base Case and Downside Case scenarios 
The ‘Principal risks and uncertainties’ section of the Strategic report, on pages 39 to 44, sets out the main risks that the Board considers 
could threaten the Group’s business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

It is considered unlikely that all the risks would manifest themselves to adversely affect the business at the same time. The Directors have 
estimated what the most likely combination of risks might be that could materialise within the going concern assessment period and how 
the business might be affected; this combination of risks is reflected in the Base Case assumptions. As noted above, the most prominent 
risk in the near term is considered to be the risk of lower consumer spending due to a weakened economy, which could affect sales, costs 
and liquidity. 

During FY22 the Group experienced a cyber security incident. This had a limited immediate/direct impact on trading towards the end of 
FY22 and there was a residual effect on trading during early FY23 as the Group took the decision to implement a very cautious and low 
risk approach to reinstating its systems, whilst simultaneously introducing significantly strengthened cyber security measures. As a result 
of these measures the Board considers that the risk of a material impact from any future cyber security attack is lessened. 

The Downside Case scenario takes into consideration the same risks as the Base Case but assumes that their effects are more severe, 
especially the level of disruption that could be experienced if consumer spending weakens significantly from its already reduced level, 
during the coming peak trading season.

Base Case scenario
The Base Case scenario assumptions are aligned with the Group’s internal forecast:

•  during FY22 sales were adversely impacted during the peak trading season by significant disruptions to the flow of stock into the 

business due to problems in the ocean freight system and store sales were also affected by the Omicron COVID-19 variant. The Base 
Case assumes that sales are not affected by these factors during the going concern period;

•  online sales levels during the early part of FY23 have been lower than expected. The Base Case assumes that online sales improve 

from their recent levels but not to the level initially expected, despite the fact that the Group plans to implement measures to improve 
online sales;

•  the gross margin assumptions include provision for the continuation for a longer period than initially expected of higher than normal 
ocean container freight costs, until the end of FY23. Thereafter it is assumed that any reduction in freight rates will, broadly, be offset 
by a less favourable currency exchange rate than the hedged rate during FY23;

•  the Base Case provides for known or expected inflationary increases including those associated with significantly higher electricity 

prices which are assumed to double and not to reduce during the going concern period, and wage rates including further increases in 
the National Living Wage;

•  capital expenditure levels are in line with the Group’s strategic plan, which would enable a reduction in capital expenditure in the event 

of a Downside scenario occurring; and 

•  the plan allows for the resumption of dividend payments.

Under the Base Case scenario, the Group’s forecasts show that it will not draw on its bank facility at any point. Whilst it may not be 
relevant given it is not envisaged that the facility would be used under the Base Case scenario, nevertheless the Base Case indicates 
that the financial covenants are complied with at all times.

The output of the Base Case model scenario therefore indicates that the Group would have sufficient financial resources to continue 
to meet its liabilities as they fall due over the going concern period.

9898

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of a significant downturn in trading
During the COVID-19 pandemic the Group demonstrated that it was capable of taking measures to maintain or improve liquidity, 
and subsequently, during FY22, the Group has continued to generate positive cash flow.

If deemed necessary, mitigating actions would be taken in response to a significant downturn in trading, which would increase liquidity. 
These may include, for example, delaying and reducing stock purchases, stock liquidation, reductions in capital expenditure, the review of 
payment terms and the review of dividend levels. Some of these potential mitigations have been built into the Downside Case model, and 
some have been noted as additional measures that may be taken in practice in the event of that scenario, or worse, actually occurring. 

Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario
The Downside Case makes the following assumptions to reflect more adverse conditions compared to the Base Case:

•  store LFL sales are assumed to be 5% lower than the Base Case during the peak period prior to Christmas 2022, to allow for the 

possibility that consumer spending is adversely affected for the reasons described above. Recent store sales levels have been slightly 
above the Base Case level;

•  online sales are assumed to be lower than in the Base Case, reflecting the possibility that the recent performance is due to external 
factors beyond our control, such as a shift in consumer shopping patterns away from online sales, and/or the failure by the Group 
to successfully implement some or all of its plans to improve the online sales performance;

•  the gross margin assumptions are consistent with the Base Case, which the Board believes already takes a sufficiently cautious view 

of expected freight rates, even allowing for a severe but plausible Downside scenario; and 

•  volume related costs in the Downside Case are lowered where they move directly with sales levels; for example, online fulfilment and 

marketing costs are assumed to reduce to correspond with the lower online sales. The model also reflects certain steps which could be 
taken to mitigate the effect of lower sales levels, depending on management’s assessment of the situation at the time. These include 
adjustments to stock purchases, reducing capital expenditure, reductions in headcount or labour usage, a reduction in discounts 
allowed as part of the Group’s loyalty scheme and suspending the payment of dividends.

Under the Downside Case scenario, due to the mitigations built into the model, the Group’s forecasts show that it will not draw on its 
bank facility at any point during the going concern period. Again, whilst it is may not be relevant if the facility is not actually required, 
nevertheless the Downside Case also indicates that the financial covenants are complied with at all times.

Having considered the output of the Downside Case and the additional mitigating steps available, the Board’s conclusion is that the 
business would continue to have adequate resources to continue in operation under this severe but plausible set of assumptions.

Consideration of more severe scenarios
Given the current rate of inflation and its potential impact on consumer confidence and spending, the Board believes that the Works 
value proposition positions it well to benefit from any tendency consumers may have to trade down in pursuit of better value. However, the 
Board also recognises that more severe downside scenarios than those modelled might arise. 

Accordingly, it has considered a range of more severe possibilities than are reflected in the Downside Case, including a 10% reduction in 
sales between January 2023 and April 2024 on the basis that consumers may prioritise Christmas, but cut back on spending thereafter 
if their disposable incomes reduce for a sustained period. In these circumstances, in addition to the measures included in the Downside 
Case, further mitigating measures would be required and are available which when implemented, would generate additional profit and/
or cash and provide further liquidity headroom and/or further headroom in relation to the financial covenants. Such measures could 
include further reductions in capital expenditure and further reductions in discretionary expenditure in areas such as travel, training 
and professional fees. 

Conclusion regarding basis of preparation
The current economic environment, characterised by higher inflation than has been experienced for a number of years, and a high level 
of uncertainty about how long the situation will persist and whether it will become worse before it improves, creates a higher than normal 
level of uncertainty with regard to the strength of consumer spending. However, the Board’s assessment is that, despite this, the overall 
level of risk is not as high as was represented by COVID-19, which resulted in a complete inability to operate the majority of the Group’s 
business for significant periods of time. The resilience demonstrated by the business during those periods, in very challenging conditions, 
provides additional assurance about the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in the event of an extended economic downturn 
due to high inflation etc.

Consequently, the Directors are confident that the Group will have sufficient funds to continue to meet its liabilities as they fall due for 
at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements and have therefore prepared the financial statements 
on a going concern basis.

(ii) New accounting standards
The Group has applied the following new standards and interpretations for the first time for the annual reporting period commencing 
3 May 2021:

•  COVID-19 Related Rent Concessions (Amendments to IFRS 16)
• 

Interest Rate Benchmark Reform: Phase 2 (Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39, IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and IFRS 16)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above has not led to any changes to the Group’s accounting policies or had 
any other material impact on the financial position or performance of the Group.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

99
99

 
 
 
1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(ii) New accounting standards continued
As at the date of approval of these financial statements, the following standards and interpretations, which have not been applied 
in these financial statements, were in issue, but not yet effective:

IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts

• 
•  Property, Plant and Equipment – Proceeds Before Intended Use (Amendments to IAS 16)
•  Reference to the Conceptual Framework (Amendments to IFRS 3)
•  Onerous Contracts – Cost of Fulfilling a Contract (Amendments to IAS 37)
•  Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2018-2020
•  Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2)
•  Definition of Accounting Estimates (Amendments to IAS 8)
•  Deferred Tax Related to Assets and Liabilities Arising From a Single Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12)
•  Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-Current (Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above is not expected to have a material impact on the financial position or 
performance of the Group.

(c) Accounting convention
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for certain financial assets 
and financial liabilities (including derivative instruments), which are held at fair value.

(d) Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the Company 
(its subsidiaries). Control is achieved when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity 
and has the ability to direct the activities that affect those returns through its power over the entity. Consolidation of a subsidiary begins 
from the date control commences and continues until control ceases. The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee 
if circumstances indicate that there are changes to the elements of control detailed above.

(e) Business combinations
Subject to the transitional relief in IFRS 1, all business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Business 
combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method as at the acquisition date, which is the date on which control is transferred 
to the Group.

The Group measures goodwill at the acquisition date as the fair value of the consideration transferred, less the fair value of identifiable 
assets acquired and liabilities assumed. Any contingent consideration payable is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. 
Subsequent changes to the fair value of the contingent consideration are recognised in profit or loss. Costs related to the acquisition 
are expensed to the income statement as incurred.

(f) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of consolidated financial statements requires the Group to make estimates and judgements that affect the application 
of policies and reported amounts.

Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Group accounting policies. Where a 
significant risk of materially different outcomes exists due to management assumptions or sources of estimation uncertainty, this will 
represent a key source of estimation uncertainty. 

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations 
of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate, in the following notes:

Description

Going concern

Inventory – shrinkage provision

Note

1

17

Page

97

115

2. Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 requires segment information to be presented on the same basis as used by the Chief Operating Decision Maker for assessing 
performance and allocating resources.

The Group has one operating segment with two revenue streams, in store and online. This reflects the Group’s management and reporting 
structure as viewed by the Board of Directors, which is considered to be the Group’s Chief Operating Decision Maker. Aggregation is 
deemed appropriate due to both operating segments having similar economic characteristics, similar products on offer and a similar 
customer base.

100100

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

3. Revenue
Accounting policy
Revenue represents receipts from the sale of goods to customers, less deductions for actual and expected returns, discounts and 
vouchers redeemable by members of the Group’s loyalty scheme, and is stated net of value added tax and other sales taxes. Revenue is 
recognised when performance obligations are satisfied and goods are delivered to the customer and the control of goods is transferred 
to the buyer.

Transactions that result in customers earning points under the Group’s loyalty scheme are accounted for as multiple element revenue 
transactions and the fair value of the consideration received is allocated between the goods supplied and the points granted. The 
consideration allocated to the points is measured by reference to their fair value – the amount for which the points could theoretically 
be sold separately. The consideration allocated to the points is not recognised as revenue at the time of the initial sale transaction but 
is deferred and recognised as revenue when the points are redeemed and the Group’s obligations have been fulfilled.

Sale of goods

UK

EU

Total revenues

FY22
£000

FY21
£000

 260,087 

 4,543 

 264,630 

177,730

2,950

180,680

Seasonality of operations
The Group’s revenue is subject to seasonal fluctuations as a result of peaking during the approach to the Christmas period, from October 
to December. Therefore, the first half of the financial year, from April to October, typically produces lower revenue and profit results than 
the second half.

4. Other operating income
Accounting policy
The business was classified as a ‘non-essential retailer’ and was therefore required to close its shops during periods of lockdown in the 
prior financial year. Accordingly, the Group made full use of the support schemes available from the Government to partially mitigate the 
loss of profit caused by the various periods of closure of the retail stores. Support has been received through three mechanisms, described 
below, and as summarised in the table:

1. 

 the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS), the Government’s support measure relating to employment. This provided grants to 
cover wages of furloughed colleagues with payments available of up to 80% of colleagues’ wages, up to a maximum of £2,500 per 
month plus National Insurance and auto-enrolled pension contributions, to the extent these could be claimed; 

2.  business rates relief; and

3. 

local business support grants.

Amounts received relating to the CJRS scheme and local business support grants must be classified as a government grant and 
accounted for in accordance with IAS 20 Government Grants. Such grants are recognised in the income statement in the period in which 
the associated costs for which the grants are intended to compensate are incurred. The grant income is reported as ‘other operating 
income’ in the income statement. The £119k charge noted below is a correction of an immaterial overstatement of the CJRS income 
reported in respect of the prior period.

The total business rates relief received during the year was £5,828k (FY21: £14,165k). 

COVID-19 furlough scheme grants receivable 

COVID-19 business grants receivable

Rent receivable

FY22
£000

(119)

—

8

FY21 
£000

15,309

1,765

7

(111)

17,081

5. Alternative performance measures (APMs)
Accounting policy
The Group tracks a number of APMs in managing its business, which are not defined or specified under the requirements of IFRS because 
they exclude amounts that are included in, or include amounts that are excluded from, the most directly comparable measure calculated 
and presented in accordance with IFRS, or are calculated using financial measures that are not calculated in accordance with IFRS.

The Group believes that these APMs, which are not considered to be a substitute for or superior to IFRS measures, provide stakeholders 
with additional helpful information on the performance of the business. They are consistent with how the business performance is planned 
and reported internally, and are also consistent with how these measures have been reported historically. Some of the APMs are also used 
for the purpose of setting remuneration targets.

The APMs should be viewed as supplemental to, but not as a substitute for, measures presented in the consolidated financial statements 
prepared in accordance with IFRS. The Group believes that the APMs are useful indicators of its performance but they may not be comparable 
with similarly titled measures reported by other companies due to the possibility of differences in the way they are calculated.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

101
101

 
 
 
5. Alternative performance measures (APMs) continued
Like-for-like (LFL) sales
LFL sales are normally defined by the Group as the year-on-year growth in gross sales from stores which have been opened for a full 
63 weeks (but excluding sales from stores closed for all or part of the relevant period or prior year comparable period), and from the 
Company’s online store, calculated on a calendar week basis. The LFL sales increase has been calculated with reference to the FY20 
comparative sales figures, or two-year LFL, because the extended periods of enforced store closures during FY21 prevent that period from 
forming the basis of meaningful comparisons. For the last five weeks of the period, it has been necessary to calculate the LFL percentages 
with reference to the corresponding weeks in FY19, because the equivalent weeks during FY20 were also affected by the first period of 
enforced store closures. Similar comparison periods are also used for the total sales growth figures quoted. The measure is used widely 
in the retail industry as an indicator of sales performance. 

A reconciliation of IFRS revenue to sales on a LFL basis is set out below:

Sales from LFL stores

Online sales

Total LFL

Non-LFL store sales

Total gross sales

VAT

Loyalty points

Revenue per consolidated income statement

Memo: total store gross sales (LFL plus non-LFL)

FY22
£000

219,308

41,747

261,055

37,360

298,415

(33,511)

(274)

264,630

256,668

FY21
£000

128,901

62,084

190,985

15,176

206,161

(24,290)

(1,191)

180,680

144,077

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted profit after tax
EBITDA is defined by the Group as earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and profit/loss on the disposal of fixed assets. 
Adjusted EBITDA is calculated by adding back or deducting Adjusting items to EBITDA. See Note 6 for a description of Adjusting items.

The Group also reports another measure of Adjusted EBITDA, which removes the impact of IFRS 16, to provide a measure that is consistent 
with internal reporting and is as used by the Group in its investment appraisals. The table provides a reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to 
profit/(loss) after tax and the impact of IFRS 16:

Non-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA1

IAS 17 income statement charges not recognised under IFRS 16

Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Post-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA1

Loss on disposal of right-of-use assets recognised under IFRS 16

Profit on disposal of lease liability recognised under IFRS 16

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of intangible assets

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

Amortisation

Finance expenses

Finance income

Tax (charge)/credit

Adjusted profit/(loss) after tax

Adjusting items (including impairment charges and reversals)

Tax charge

Profit/(loss) after tax

FY22
£000

16,562

24,433

120

41,115

(2,066)

2,340

(244)

—

(5,005)

(20,029)

(806)

(5,192)

16

(1,436)

8,693

29

—

FY21
£000

4,285

27,454

59

31,798

(353)

464

(262)

(311)

(5,187)

(23,311)

(947)

(5,486)

18

502

(3,075)

776

—

8,722

(2,299)

1  Also adjusted for profit and loss on disposal of right-of-use assets and liabilities, property, plant and equipment and intangible assets.

102102

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

5. Alternative performance measures (APMs) continued
Profit before tax and IFRS 16
The table provides a reconciliation of profit/(loss) before tax and IFRS 16 adjustments to profit/(loss) before tax.

FY22

Adjusted
£000

Adjusting items
£000

Profit/(loss) before tax before IFRS 16 
adjustments

Remove IAS 17 rental charge

Remove hire costs from hire of equipment

Remove depreciation charged on the 
existing assets

Remove interest charged on the 
existing liability

9,525

24,306

126

276

31

Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets

(20,029)

Interest cost on lease liability

Loss on disposal of right-of-use assets

Profit on disposal of lease liability

Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Additional impairment charge under IAS 36

Net impact on profit/(loss)

Profit/(loss) before tax

(4,500)

(2,066)

2,340

120

—

604

10,129

(241)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

270

270

29

Total
£000

9,284

24,306

126

276

31

(20,029)

(4,500)

(2,066)

2,340

120

270

874

10,158

FY21 (Restated1)

Adjusted
£000

Adjusting items
£000

(3,395)

27,331

124

329

44

(23,311)

(4,869)

(353)

464

59

—

(182)

(3,577)

(94)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

870

870

776

Total
£000

(3,489)

27,331

124

329

44

(23,311)

(4,869)

(353)

464

59

870

688

(2,801)

1 

 In the prior year financial statements, the allocation of fixed asset impairment charges between the right-of-use asset and property, plant and equipment 
categories was incorrect. The prior year balances have therefore been restated, resulting in an increase in the right of use asset balance of £801k, and a 
decrease in the property plant and equipment balance of £801k. As such, this has increased the prior year loss before tax before IFRS 16 adjustments by £801k.

Adjusted profit metrics
Key profit measures including operating profit, profit before tax, profit for the period and earnings per share are calculated on an adjusted 
basis by adding back or deducting Adjusting items. These adjusted metrics are included within the consolidated income statement and 
consolidated statement of other comprehensive income, with further details of Adjusting items included in Note 6.

6. Adjusting items
Adjusting items are those items of income and expenditure that, by reference to the Group, are material in size and unusual in nature or incidence 
and that in the judgement of the Directors should be disclosed separately on the face of the financial statements to ensure both that the reader 
has a proper understanding of the Group’s financial performance and that there is comparability of financial performance between periods.

The Directors believe that the Adjusted profit and earnings per share measures included in this report provide additional useful information to 
shareholders. These measures are consistent with how business performance is measured internally. The profit before tax and Adjusting items 
measure is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with adjusted profit measures used by other companies. 

If a transaction or related series of transactions has been treated as an Adjusting item in one accounting period, the same treatment will be 
applied consistently year on year.

In relation to FY22, the items classified as ‘Adjusting’, as shown below, were related to transactions that had been treated as Adjusting in prior periods. 

Cost of sales

Impairment charges1

Impairment reversals1

HMRC duty provision2

Total cost of sales

Administrative expenses

Salary and other costs3

Packaging waste costs provision release4

Total administrative expenses

Total Adjusting items

FY22
£000

1,126

(1,155)

—

(29)

— 

— 

—

(29) 

FY21
£000

961

(1,873)

(63)

(975)

322

(123)

199

(776)

1  These relate to fixed asset impairment charges and reversals of prior year impairment charges.

2  This relates to a provision recognised regarding a HMRC review of the Group’s duty rates.

3  Salary and other costs relate to payments to past Directors, and other associated costs.

4  This related to the release of a provision recognised regarding packaging waste cost penalties from FY18.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

103
103

 
 
 
7. Operating profit
Operating profit (before Adjusting items) is stated after charging/(crediting) the following items:

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of intangible assets

Loss on disposal of right-of-use assets

Profit on disposal of lease liability

Depreciation

Amortisation

Adjusting items (see Note 6)

Operating lease payments:

– Hire of plant and machinery1

– Other operating leases1

Net foreign exchange losses

Cost of inventories recognised as an expense

Staff costs

FY22
£000

244

—

2,066

(2,340)

25,034

806

(29)

389

1,549

(128)

106,954

60,031

FY21
£000

262

310

353

(464)

28,498

947

(776)

392

439

135

69,364

49,989

1  These balances relate to non-IFRS 16 operating lease rentals during the year; please refer to Note 15 for further details of these balances.

Expenses reclassification
Certain online costs relating to fulfilment and website maintenance previously treated as distribution or administrative expenses have 
been reclassified to cost of sales in the FY22 accounts as this more accurately reflects their nature. The prior year balances have been 
reclassified to maintain consistency; the effect on gross profit, distribution expenses and administrative expenses is summarised in the 
table below:

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Other operating income

Distribution expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Auditor’s remuneration:

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts

Amounts payable in respect of other services to the Company and its subsidiaries

Audit of the accounts of subsidiaries

Audit related assurance services

Total services

Per FY21 
financial 
statements
£000

(159,758)

20,922

17,081

(15,075)

(20,261)

2,667

Adjustment
£000

(9,609)

(9,609)

—

8,635

974

—

FY22
£000

300

40

1

341

FY21 
restated 
balance
£000

(169,367)

11,313

17,081

(6,440)

(19,287)

2,667

FY21
£000

180

40

1

221

Please refer to the Audit Committee report for details regarding the safeguarding of auditor objectivity and independence. 

104104

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)8. Staff numbers and costs
The average number of people employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year, analysed by category, was as follows:

Store support centre colleagues 

Store colleagues

Warehouse and distribution colleagues

Number of employees

FY22

 216 

 3,468 

 140 

 3,824

FY21 1
(Restated)

 209 

 3,474 

 135 

 3,818 

1 

 The prior year number of store colleagues has been restated to include the seasonal staff employed during the peak trading months from October 
to December.

The corresponding aggregate payroll costs were as follows:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes

Total employee costs

Agency labour costs

Total staff costs

FY22
£000

 55,600

 3,654

 777 

 60,031 

 1,505 

 61,536 

FY21
£000

 46,479 

 2,867 

 643 

 49,989 

 1,022 

 51,011 

9. Finance income and expense
Accounting policy
Finance expense comprises interest charges. Borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production 
of an asset that takes a substantial time to be prepared for use are capitalised as part of the cost of that asset, and subsequently 
amortised to finance expenses over the appropriate life.

Finance income comprises interest income and is recognised when it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and 
the amount of revenue can be measured reliably. Interest is recognised in profit as it accrues, using the effective interest method.

Recognised in consolidated statement of comprehensive income

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

Finance income

Bank interest receivable

Total finance income

Finance expense

Bank interest payable

Other interest payable

Interest on lease liabilities

Total finance expense

FY22
£000

16

16

401 

291 

4,500 

5,192 

FY21
£000

18

18

322 

295 

4,869 

5,486 

10. Taxation
Accounting policy
The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

Current tax
The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the income statement 
because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never 
taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted 
by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the 
financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance 
sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are 
recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be 
utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the 
initial recognition (other than in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable 
profit nor the accounting profit.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

105
105

 
 
 
10. Taxation continued
Accounting policy continued
Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, and 
interests in joint ventures, except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that 
the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax assets arising from deductible temporary differences 
associated with such investments and interests are only recognised to the extent that it is probable that there will be sufficient taxable 
profits against which to utilise the benefits of the temporary differences and they are expected to reverse in the foreseeable future.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised 
based on tax laws and rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive income, in which case 
the deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income.

The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and assets reflects the tax consequences that would follow from the manner in which the 
Group expects, at the end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax 
liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax 
assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Current tax and deferred tax for the year
Current and deferred tax are recognised in profit or loss, except when they relate to items that are recognised in other comprehensive 
income or directly in equity, in which case the current and deferred tax are also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, respectively. Where current tax or deferred tax arises from the initial accounting for a business combination, the tax effect 
is included in the accounting for the business combination.

Recognised in consolidated income statement

Current tax expense 

Current year

Adjustments for prior years

Current tax expense

Deferred tax credit

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Increase in tax rate

Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax credit

Total tax expense/(credit)

FY22
£000

2,059

3

2,062

(17)

(825)

216

(626)

1,436

FY21
£000

—

22

22

(423)

—

(101)

(524)

(502)

The UK corporation tax rate for FY22 and FY21 was 19%. Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective 
jurisdictions.

As the deferred tax assets and liabilities should be recognised based on the corporation tax rate applicable when they are anticipated 
to unwind, the assets and liabilities on UK operations have been recognised at a rate of 25% (FY21: 19%). Assets and liabilities arising on 
foreign operations have been recognised at the applicable overseas tax rates.

An increase in the UK corporation rate from 19% to 25% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. As such the UK 
deferred tax liability as at 1 May 2022 was calculated at 25%.

106106

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

10. Taxation continued
Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit/(loss) for the year

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19%

Non-deductible expenses

Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions

Tax under/(over) provided in prior periods

Utilisation of unrecognised tax losses brought forward

Deferred tax not recognised

Change in tax rate

Total tax expense/(credit)

FY22
£000

10,158

1,930

182

(40)

219

(116)

86

(825)

FY21
£000

(2,801)

(532)

105

4

(79)

—

—

—

1,436

(502)

The Group’s total income tax expense in respect of the period was £1,436k (FY21: credit of £502k). The effective tax rate on the total profit 
before tax was 14.1% (FY21: 17.9% on the loss before tax) whilst the effective tax rate on the total profit before Adjusted items was 14.2% 
(FY21: 14.0% on the loss before Adjusted items). The difference between the total effective tax rate and the Adjusted tax rate relates 
to fixed asset impairment charges and reversals within Adjusting items being non-deductible for tax purposes.

11. Dividends
Accounting policy
At the balance sheet date, dividends are only recognised as a liability if they are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the 
discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

No dividends were paid to shareholders during FY21 or FY22.

Dividend equivalents totalling £175k (FY21: £74k) were accrued in the year in relation to share-based long-term incentive schemes.

The Board has recommended the payment of a 2.4 pence per share final dividend in respect of FY22 (FY21: £Nil). 

12. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss for the period, attributable to ordinary shareholders, by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.

Diluted earnings per share is based on the weighted average number of shares in issue for the period, Adjusted for the dilutive effect 
of potential ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares represent shares that may be issued in connection with employee share 
incentive awards.

The Group has chosen to present an Adjusted earnings per share measure, with profit adjusted for Adjusting items (see Note 6 for further 
details) to reflect the Group’s underlying profit for the year.

Number of shares in issue

Number of dilutive share options

Number of shares for diluted earnings per share

Profit/(loss) for the financial period

Adjusting items

Total Adjusted profit/(loss) for Adjusted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Adjusted basic earnings per share

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

FY22
Number

FY21
Number

 62,500,000 

62,500,000

 940,673 

–

 63,440,673 

62,500,000

£000

 8,722 

 (29)

8,693

Pence

14.0

13.7

13.9

13.7

£000

(2,299)

(776)

(3,075)

Pence

(3.7)

(3.7)

(4.9)

(4.9)

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

107
107

 
 
 
13. Intangible assets
Accounting policy 
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents any excess of the consideration paid and the amount of any non-controlling interest in 
the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities (including intangible assets) of the acquired entity at the date 
of the acquisition. Goodwill is recognised as an asset and assessed for impairment annually or as triggering events occur. Any impairment 
in value is recognised within the income statement.

Software
Where computer software is not an integral part of a related item of computer hardware, the software is treated as an intangible asset. 
Capitalised software costs include external direct costs of goods and services, as well as internal payroll related costs for employees who 
are directly associated with the project. Internal payroll related costs are capitalised if the recognition criteria of IAS 38 Intangible Assets 
are met or are expensed as incurred otherwise.

Capitalised software development costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over their expected economic lives, normally between 
three and seven years. Computer software under development is held at cost less any recognised impairment loss. Any impairment 
in value is recognised within the income statement.

Cost

Balance at 3 May 2021

Additions

Balance at 1 May 2022

Amortisation and impairment

Balance at 3 May 2021

Amortisation charge for the year

Balance at 1 May 2022

Net book value

At 3 May 2021

At 1 May 2022

Cost

Balance at 27 April 2020

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 2 May 2021

Amortisation and impairment

Balance at 27 April 2020

Amortisation charge for the year

Disposals

Balance at 2 May 2021

Net book value

At 27 April 2020

At 2 May 2021

Goodwill
£000

Software
£000

16,180

—

16,180

16,180

—

16,180

—

—

8,043

1,015

9,058

5,580

806

6,386

2,463

2,672

Goodwill
£000

Software
£000

16,180

—

—

16,180

16,180

—

—

16,180

—

—

8,415

526

(898)

8,043

5,221

947

(588)

5,580

3,194

2,463

Total
£000

24,223

1,015

25,238

21,760

806

22,566

2,463

2,672

Total
£000

24,595

526

(898)

24,223

21,401

947

(588)

21,760

3,194

2,463

Goodwill impairment testing
Goodwill of £16.2m was impaired to £Nil in FY20; therefore, no further impairment testing is necessary in relation to this.

108108

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

14. Property, plant and equipment
Accounting policy
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at their cost of acquisition or production, less accumulated depreciation and 
accumulated impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives as follows:

•  Leasehold property improvements: over the life of the lease.
•  Fixtures and fittings: 15% per annum straight line or depreciated on a straight-line basis over the remaining life of the lease, whichever 

is shorter.

•  Computer equipment: 25 to 50% per annum straight line.

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date, with the effect of any 
changes in estimate accounted for on a prospective basis. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable 
amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.

An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from 
the continued use of the asset. The gain or loss arising on the disposal or scrappage of an asset is determined as the difference between 
the sales proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in profit or loss.

Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets, which are assets that necessarily 
take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use or sale, are added to the cost of those assets, until such time as the 
assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. All other borrowing costs are recognised in the profit or loss in the period 
in which they are incurred.

IFRS 16
IFRS 16 creates the concept of right-of-use assets. The accounting policy and description of the accounting treatment in respect of IFRS 16 
is included within Note 15.

Impairment of tangible and intangible assets 
The carrying amounts of the Group’s tangible and intangible assets with a definite useful life are reviewed at each balance sheet date 
to determine whether there is any indication of impairment to their value. If such an indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is 
estimated and compared to its carrying value. Where the asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from other assets, 
the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the CGU to which the asset belongs. The Directors consider an individual retail store 
to be a cash generating unit (CGU).

The recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less disposal cost and its value in use (the present value of the future 
cash flows that the asset is expected to generate). In determining value in use, the present value of future cash flows is discounted using 
a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money in relation to the period of the investment 
and the risks specific to the asset concerned. Where the carrying value exceeds the recoverable amount a provision for the impairment 
loss is established with a charge being made to the income statement. When the reasons for a write down no longer exist, the write down 
is reversed in the income statement up to the net book value that the relevant asset would have had if it had not been written down and 
if it had been depreciated. For intangible assets that have an indefinite useful life the recoverable amount is estimated at each annual 
balance sheet date.

Measuring recoverable amounts 
The key assumptions for the value in use calculations are those regarding the growth rates of sales and gross margins, operating costs, 
long-term growth rates, maintenance capital expenditure and the pre-tax discount rate used to discount the assumed cash flows to 
present value. 

Impairment triggers
In FY21, due to COVID-19 and its impact on the UK economy and the Group, an impairment review was performed on all stores. As at 1 
May 2022 only stores with an indicator of impairment have been included within the impairment assessment, including 38 stores with a 
budgeted loss at EBITDA level and an additional 30 stores which have historically been loss making and management is considering the 
closure or relocation of the store at the lease break date. An additional 50 stores with a prior year impairment charge have also been 
included in the FY22 assessment.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

109
109

 
 
 
14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Key assumptions 
The key financial assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out below. The values assigned to the key 
assumptions represent management’s assessment of current market conditions and future trends and have been based on historical 
data from both external and internal sources. Management determined the values assigned to these financial assumptions as follows:

The pre-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, which has been estimated using the capital asset 
pricing model, the inputs of which include a country risk-free rate, equity risk premium, Group size premium, a forecasting risk premium 
and a risk adjustment (beta). The post-tax WACC is subsequently adjusted to reflect the specific amount and timing of the future tax 
cash flows. 

Pre-tax discount rate

Long-term growth rate

FY22

17.9%

2.0%

FY21

16.8%

2.0%

Cash flow forecasts are derived from the most recent Board-approved corporate plans that form the Base Case on which the value in use 
calculations are based, and which are described in Note 1(b)(i) (Going concern). 

The assumptions used in the estimation of future cash flows are: 

•  rates of growth in sales and gross margins, which have been determined on the basis of the factors described in Note 1(b)(i) 

(Going concern); 

•  operating cost estimates reflect expected changes in the variables that underpin them and, in particular, expected increases in the 

National Living Wage; and 

•  maintenance capital expenditure includes estimates of ongoing capital expenditure required to maintain the store network, 

but excludes any significant growth capital initiatives not committed.

Cash flows beyond the corporate plan period (2026 and beyond) have been determined using the long-term growth rate; this is based 
on management’s future expectations, reflecting, amongst other things, current market conditions and future trends and has been based 
on historical data from both external and internal sources. Severe weather has been considered when modelling forecasts and it is not 
deemed to have a material affect on the projected numbers in the impairment review.

Impairment charge
As at the end of FY21, an impairment charge of £2,588k was recorded against right-of-use assets, property, plant and equipment 
relating to 80 stores. Evidence is available from internal reporting that indicates that the economic performance of 48 of these stores 
has improved and is expected to continue to do so. As a result, an impairment reversal of £1,155k has been recognised relating to these 
stores. Conversely, during FY22 an impairment charge of £1,126k was recognised against a 39 stores, reflecting the underperformance of 
these stores for a variety of reasons. A net reversal of £29k has therefore been shown as an Adjusting item on the face of the consolidated 
income statement.

Sensitivity analysis
Whilst the Directors believe the assumptions adopted are realistic, reasonably possible changes in key assumptions could occur which 
would cause the recoverable amount of certain stores to be lower or higher than the carrying amount. The Directors consider that the only 
key assumption that could reasonably be different and cause a material change in the impairment charge is sales growth. A reduction 
in sales of 5% from the Base Case plan to reflect a potential Downside Scenario would result in an increase in the impairment charge of 
£422k relating to a total of 41 stores, and a decrease in the impairment reversal of £212k relating to 46 stores. An increase in sales of 5% 
from the Base Case plan would increase the impairment reversal by £189k relating to 53 stores and decrease the impairment charge by 
£321k relating to 33 stores.

Reasonably possible changes to other key assumptions, including a 200 basis point increase in the pre-tax discount rate across all 
stores or a 200 basis point reduction in the long-term growth rate, would not result in a significant change to the impairment charges or 
reversals, either individually or in combination.

Whilst the Directors consider their assumptions to be realistic, should actual results, including the rate of growth in sales, be different from 
expectations, then it is possible that the value of property, plant and equipment included in the balance sheet could become materially 
different to the estimates used.

110110

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

14. Property, plant and equipment continued

Cost

Balance at 3 May 2021

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 1 May 2022

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 3 May 2021

Depreciation charge for the year

Impairment charge

Impairment reversals

Disposals

Balance at 1 May 2022

Net book value

At 3 May 2021

At 1 May 2022

Cost

Balance at 27 April 2020

Additions

Disposals (Restated1)

Balance at 2 May 2021 (Restated1)

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 27 April 2020

Depreciation charge for the year

Impairment charge (Restated2)

Impairment reversals

Disposals (Restated1)

Balance at 2 May 2021 (Restated1)

Net book value

At 27 April 2020

At 2 May 2021 (Restated2)

RoUA –
plant and
equipment
£000

1,913

508

—

2,421

976

432

—

—

—

937

1,013

RoUA –
plant and
equipment
£000

1,724

189

—

1,913

459

517

—

—

—

RoUA –
property
£000

154,047

3,126

(5,768)

151,405

42,442

19,597

710

(980)

(3,702)

58,067

111,605

93,338

RoUA –
property
£000

140,992

18,404

(5,349)

154,047

25,494

22,794

4

(874)

(4,976)

42,442

Land and
buildings
£000

Plant and
equipment
£000

Fixtures and
fittings
£000

Total
£000

10,682

(38)

(229)

3,376

476

(34)

26,167

1,498

(407)

196,185

5,570

(6,438)

10,415

3,818

27,258

195,317

5,555

808

155

(54)

(147)

2,762

640

15

(8)

(21)

14,384

3,557

246

(113)

(258)

66,119

25,034

1,126

(1,155)

(4,128)

86,996

1,408

6,317

3,388

17,816

5,127

4,098

614

430

11,783

9,442

130,066

108,321

Land and
buildings
£000

Plant and
equipment
£000

Fixtures and
fittings
£000

Total
£000

10,591

151

(60)

10,682

4,586

975

150

(149)

(7)

2,539

859

(22)

3,376

2,185

594

49

(49)

(17)

25,738

181,584

859

(430)

20,462

(5,861)

26,167

196,185

11,036

3,618

758

(802)

(226)

43,760

28,498

961

(1,874)

(5,226)

66,119

976

5,555

2,762

14,384

115,498

111,605

1,265

937

6,005

5,127

354

614

14,702

11,783

137,824

130,066

1 

 In the prior year financial statements leases which had expired and had a nil net book value were not captured within the IFRS 16 disposals assessment. 
The carried forwards property right-of-use asset cost and depreciation figures were incorrectly grossed up by £4,725k; as such these prior year balances 
have been adjusted. Note that this adjustment has no impact on the FY21 closing net book value of the right-of-use assets or property, plant and equipment.

2   In the prior year financial statements, the allocation of fixed asset impairment charges between the right-of-use asset and property, plant and equipment 
categories was incorrect. The prior year balances have therefore been restated, resulting in an increase in the right-of-use asset balance of £801k, and a 
decrease in the property plant and equipment balances of £801k.

Right-of-use assets

Property, plant and equipment

Per FY21 
financial 
statements
£000

111,741

18,325

Adjustment
£000

801

(801)

FY21 
restated 
balance
£000

112,542

17,524

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

111
111

 
 
 
15. IFRS 16
Accounting policy
IFRS 16 establishes principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases. 

IFRS 16 requires the use of a single definition of leases, which recognises a right-of-use asset (RoUA) and a lease liability for all leases, 
with exceptions only permitted for short-term and low-value leases. Accordingly, the impact of IFRS 16 is to require recognition of a lease 
liability and a corresponding RoUA in relation to leases previously classified as operating leases, which were hitherto accounted for via 
a single charge to the profit and loss account.

The most significant impact is that the Group’s retail store operating leases are recognised on the balance sheet as right-of-use 
assets representing the economic benefits of the Group’s right to use the underlying leased assets, together with the associated 
future lease liabilities. 

Under IFRS 16, the Group recognises right-of-use assets and lease liabilities at the lease commencement date.

Identifying an IFRS 16 lease
At the inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether it is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if it conveys the 
right to control the use of an asset for a period of time, in exchange for consideration. Control is conveyed where the Group has both 
the right to direct the asset’s use and to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from that use. For each lease or lease component, 
the Group follows the lease accounting model as per IFRS 16, unless the permitted recognition exceptions can be used.

Recognition exceptions
The Group leases many assets, including properties, IT equipment and warehouse equipment. 

The Group has elected to account for lease payments as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term or another systematic 
basis for the following types of leases:

(i) 

leases with a term of twelve months or less; and

(ii) 

leases where the underlying asset has a low value.

For leases where the Group has taken the short-term lease recognition exemption and there are any changes to the lease term or the 
lease is modified, the Group accounts for the lease as a new lease.

For leases where the Group has taken a recognition exemption as detailed above, rentals payable under these leases are charged to 
income on a straight-line basis over the term of the relevant lease except, where another more systematic basis is more representative 
of the time pattern in which economic benefits from the lease asset are consumed.

Lessee accounting under IFRS 16
Upon lease commencement the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability.

Initial measurement
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease 
payments made at or before the commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and 
remove the underlying asset, or to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located at the end of the lease, less any lease 
incentives received.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments payable over the lease term, discounted at the 
rate implicit in the lease if that can be readily determined. If that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group uses the incremental 
borrowing rate.

Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the initial measurement of the lease liability and are initially 
measured using the index or rate as at the commencement date. Amounts expected to be payable by the Group under residual value 
guarantees are also included. Variable lease payments that are not included in the measurement of the lease liability are recognised 
in profit or loss in the period in which the event or condition that triggers payment occurs, unless the costs are included in the carrying 
amount of another asset under another accounting standard.

The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts that include renewal options. The assessment 
of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options impacts the lease term, which significantly affects the value of lease 
liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised.

The payments related to leases are presented under cash flows from financing activities and cash flows from operating activities in the 
cash flow statement.

Subsequent measurement
After lease commencement, the Group values right-of-use assets using a cost model. Under the cost model a right-of-use asset is 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment.

The lease liability is subsequently increased by the interest cost on the lease liability and decreased by lease payments made. It is 
re-measured to reflect changes in: the lease term (using a revised discount rate); the assessment of a purchase option (using a revised 
discount rate); the amounts expected to be payable under residual value guarantees (using an unchanged discount rate); and future 
lease payments resulting from a change in an index or a rate used to determine those payments (using an unchanged discount rate).

The re-measurements are matched by adjustments to the right-of-use asset. Lease modifications may also prompt re-measurement 
of the lease liability unless they are determined to be separate leases.

112112

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

15. IFRS 16 continued
Lessee accounting under IFRS 16 continued
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method, from the commencement date to the earlier of either 
the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The estimated useful lives of right-of-use assets are 
determined on the same basis as those of property, plant and equipment. In addition, the right-of-use asset is reduced by impairment 
losses, if any, and adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liability.

Extension and termination options
Extension and termination options are included in a number of property leases across the Group. These terms are used to maximise 
operational flexibility. The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts in which it is a lessee that 
includes renewal options and break clauses. The assessment of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options impacts 
the lease term, and therefore the amount of lease liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised.

Judgements in determining the lease term
In determining the lease term, management considers all facts and circumstances that create an economic incentive to exercise 
an extension option, or not to exercise a termination option. Extension options (or periods after termination options) are only included 
in the lease term if the lease is reasonably certain to be extended (or not terminated).

For property leases the following factors are the most relevant:

•  the profitability of the leased store and future plans for the business; and
• 

if there are any significant penalties to terminate (or not extend), the Group is typically reasonably certain to extend.

COVID-19 concessions
The Group has elected to account for qualifying COVID-19 related rent concessions as variable lease payments, recognising the 
concession in the period in which the event or condition that triggers the payments occurs. Rent concessions are qualifying if the following 
conditions are met:

(i) 

the concession is a direct consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic;

(ii) 

 the change in lease payments resulted in revised consideration for the lease that is substantially the same as, or less than, 
the consideration for the lease immediately preceding the change;

(iii)  the reduction in lease payments only affects payments due on or before 30 June 2022; and

(iv)  there is no substantive change to other terms and conditions of the lease.

The Group has applied this practical expedient consistently to all lease contracts with similar characteristics and in similar circumstances.

Amounts recognised in the balance sheet
Right-of-use assets

Land and buildings

Plant and equipment

Total right-of-use assets

Additions to the right-of-use assets during FY22 were £3,634k (FY21: £18,593k).

Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities included in the statement of financial position as at the financial year end:

Current

Non-current

Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cash flows:

Less than one year

Two to five years

More than five years

FY22
£000

 93,338

 1,013

 94,351

FY22
£000

 25,434 

 85,702 

111,136

FY22
£000

 31,592 

 83,017 

 21,862 

FY21 
(Restated 
 – Note 14)
£000

 111,605 

 937 

 112,542 

FY21
£000

 31,552 

104,362

135,914

FY21
£000

 35,978 

 86,601 

 30,158 

Total undiscounted lease liabilities

136,471

152,737

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

113
113

 
 
 
15. IFRS 16 continued
Amounts recognised in the statement of profit and loss

Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets (RoUA)

Interest cost on lease liability

Loss on disposal of RoUA

Profit on disposal of lease liability

Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Additional impairment charge under IAS 36

Operating lease rentals – hire of plant and equipment

– Low-value leases

Total plant and equipment operating lease rentals

Operating lease rentals – store leases

– Stores with variable lease rentals

– Concession leases (the landlord has substantial substitution rights)

– Low-value leases

– Lease is expiring within 12 months or has rolling break clauses

– Lease has expired

– Variable lease payments as a result of COVID-19 concessions

Total store operating lease rentals

Depreciation of right-of-use asset by class:

Land and buildings

Plant and equipment

Total right-of-use asset depreciation

FY22
£000

20,029

4,500

2,066

(2,340)

 120 

 (270)

 389 

 389 

 454 

 943 

 (11)

 87 

 484 

 (408)

1,549

FY22
£000

 19,597 

 432 

 20,029 

Other lease rental commitments
Non-cancellable operating lease rentals for leases excluded from the IFRS-16 assessment are as follows:

Less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

Total operating lease commitments

Motor vehicle
leases
£000

 386 

 200 

 — 

 586

FY22

Concession 
store leases
£000

 589 

 729 

 — 

Total
£000

 975 

 929 

 — 

 1,318 

 1,904

Motor vehicle
leases
£000

 247 

 230 

 — 

 477 

FY21

Concession 
store leases
£000

 326 

 51 

 — 

 377 

16. Deferred tax assets
Recognised deferred tax assets
Deferred tax assets are attributable to the following:

Property, plant and equipment

Leases

Temporary timing differences

Financial assets/liabilities

Tax assets

114114

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Assets

FY22
£000

1,637

1,645

195

—

3,477

FY21
£000

732

1,420

372

328

2,852

Liabilities

FY22
£000

—

—

—

—

—

FY21 
(Restated 
 – Note 14)
£000

 23,311 

 4,869 

 353 

 (464)

 59 

 (870)

 392 

 392 

 20 

 1,310 

 (23)

 98 

 149 

 (1,115)

 439 

FY21
£000

 22,794 

 517 

 23,311 

Total
£000

 573 

 281 

 — 

 854 

FY21
£000

—

—

—

—

—

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

16. Deferred tax assets continued
Recognised deferred tax assets continued
Movement in deferred tax during the year

At 3 May 2021

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Deferred tax credit/(charge) to profit and loss

Deferred tax credit/(charge) in equity profit and loss

Fixed assets
£000

732

—

905

—

Leases
£000

1,420

—

225

—

At 1 May 2022

1,637

1,645

Temporary
timing
differences 
£000

372

(216)

39

—

195

Financial
assets/
liabilities
£000

328

—

(328)

—

—

Total
£000

2,852

(216)

841

—

3,477

17. Inventories
Accounting policy
Inventories comprise stocks of finished goods for resale and are valued on a weighted average cost basis and carried at the lower of cost 
and net realisable value. ‘Cost’ includes all direct expenditure and other attributable costs incurred in bringing inventories to their present 
location and condition.

The process of purchasing inventories may include the use of cash flow hedges to manage foreign exchange risk. Where hedge 
accounting applies, an adjustment is applied such that the cost of stock reflects the hedged exchange rate.

Inventory summary

Gross stock value

Less: stock provisions for shrinkage and obsolescence

Goods for resale net of provisions

Stock in transit

Inventory

FY22
£000

29,817 

(3,252)

26,565 

2,822 

29,387

FY21
£000

31,045 

(4,391)

26,654 

2,478 

29,132 

The cost of inventories recognised as an expense during the period was £107.7m (FY21: £69.0m).

Stock provisions
The Group makes provisions in relation to stock quantities, due to stock losses not yet reflected in the accounting records, commonly 
referred to as shrinkage and, in relation to stock value, where the net realisable value of an item is expected to be lower than its cost, 
due to obsolescence. 

The calculation of stock provisions entails the use of estimates and judgements combined with mechanistic calculations and 
extrapolations. The shrinkage provision represents a key source of estimation uncertainty.

Shrinkage provision
As at the end of FY21 the unrecognised shrinkage provision was £2.6m, which was significantly higher than the amount usually required in 
a normal, non-COVID-19 impacted year. This was due to the closure of stores for extended periods of FY21, which significantly interrupted 
the stock counting process and the corresponding routine process of correcting the stock file.

During the course of FY22, the Group has carried out ‘tactical’ (perpetual inventory basis) stock counts in its retail stores on a regular basis, 
such that at the end of the financial year a significant proportion of stock in stores had been counted and stock file adjustments made 
to correct errors indicated by the counts. In addition, full four wall counts (i.e. a controlled count of all stock in a store) were performed 
in 71 stores during the last 6 weeks of the financial year, and an additional 53 four wall counts were performed in the month following 
the financial year end. Through these processes, the Group establishes that its accounting records are maintained to reflect the actual 
quantities of stock in stores. This process also provides the Group with an indication of the typical percentage of stock loss, which is used 
to calculate, by extrapolation, unrecognised shrinkage at the balance sheet date.

The stock records were updated to reflect the results of stock counts during the financial year, as a result of which the provision required 
for unrecognised shrinkage materially decreased compared with the value at the end of FY21, by £0.7m, to £1.9m.

The percentages used in calculating the unrecognised shrinkage provision were based on data obtained from the full four wall counts 
performed towards the end of the financial year and during the first month of FY23. The shrinkage provision was £1.9m at the period end 
(FY21: £2.6m), representing 8.6% of gross store stock (FY21: 12.3%). The provision relates to store stock with a value of £22.2m (FY21: £21.2m). 
This represents management’s best estimate of the likely level of stock losses experienced, but the actual level of stock loss will only be 
established once all products in all locations have been counted. A 20% increase/(decrease) in the shrinkage percentage used would 
result in an increase/(decrease) to the shrinkage provision of £334k to £2.3m/(£1.6m). This represents a reasonably possible range of 
estimation uncertainty with regard to the unrecognised shrinkage provision.

The shrinkage provision has been estimated based on the results the four wall counts which may not be representative of the store 
population as a whole. Due to the level of the provisions, combined with the risk that the sample on which it is based may not be 
representative of the populations as a whole, the calculation of the stock shrinkage provision is considered a key source of estimation 
uncertainty for the FY22 financial statements. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

115
115

 
 
 
17. Inventories continued
Stock provisions continued
Obsolescence provision
Generally, the Group’s inventory does not comprise a large proportion of stock with a ‘shelf life’. Stock lines which are slow selling because 
they have been less successful than planned or which have sold successfully and become fragmented as they reach the natural end 
of their planned selling period, are usually discounted and sold during ‘sale’ events, for example the January sale. This stock is referred 
to as terminal stock.

During the prior financial year, the closures of the stores due to the COVID-19 pandemic interrupted the orderly process of selling through 
terminal stock, particularly during the UK-wide lockdown implemented between January and April 2021, which coincided with the period 
when the January sale would normally have taken place. As a result, at the end of FY21, the Group carried a higher than normal level of 
terminal stock and the obsolescence provision was higher than normal, at £1.8m.

During FY22 a high degree of focus has been placed on clearing terminal stock and at the period end the Group held significantly 
less terminal stock than the prior year. Consequently, the obsolescence provision has reduced by £0.5m to £1.3m.

18. Trade and other receivables

Current

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Prepayments

Accrued income

Trade and other receivables

FY22
£000

2,606 

1,793

4,028 

— 

 8,427

FY21
£000

 2,214 

 423 

 3,362 

914 

 6,913 

Trade receivables are attributable to sales which are paid for by credit card and are classified as finance assets at amortised cost; they 
are all current. No credit is provided to customers. The value and nature of trade receivables is such that no material credit losses occur; 
therefore no loss allowance has been recorded at the period end (FY21: £Nil). 

Other receivables relate to stock on water deposits paid, and other accounts payable debit balances. Prepayments relate to prepaid 
property costs and other expenses. 

The accrued income balance in the prior year relates to the COVID-19 furlough scheme Government grants receivable as detailed 
in Note 4.

19. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents per balance sheet 

Net cash and cash equivalents

The Group’s cash and cash equivalents are denominated in the following currencies:

Sterling

Euro

US dollar

Net cash and cash equivalents

FY22
£000

16,280

16,280

FY22
£000

12,198

3,102

980

16,280

FY21
£000

8,315

8,315

FY21
£000

3,385

1,138

3,792

8,315

At 1 May 2022 the Group held net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £16.3m (FY21: net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £0.8m). 
This comprised cash of £16.3m (FY21: cash of £8.3m and a draw down of £7.5m against a term loan).

For the year ended 1 May 2022 the Group’s bank facilities comprised a revolving credit facility (RCF) of £22.5m, with an expiry date 
of 30 September 2022. The RCF limit reduced to £20.0m in January 2022 and remained at this level until its expiry. From 10 June 2022 
the Group’s bank facilities comprise an RCF of £30m expiring 30 November 2025. 

The facility includes financial covenants in relation to the level of net debt to LTM EBITDA and “Fixed Charge Cover” or ratio of LTM EBITDA 
prior to deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest. 

116116

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

20. Borrowings
Accounting policy
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts, loan notes and other loans are recognised in the balance sheet at amortised cost. Finance 
charges associated with arranging non-equity funding are recognised in the income statement over the life of the facility. All other 
borrowing costs are recognised in the income statement in accordance with the effective interest rate method. A summary of the Group’s 
objectives, policies, procedures and strategies with regard to financial instruments and capital management can be found in Note 25. 
At 1 May 2022 all borrowings were denominated in sterling (FY21: sterling).

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Secured bank loans

Lease liabilities

Unamortised debt issue costs

Current liabilities

Reconciliation of borrowings to cash flows arising from financing activities

Borrowings at start of year (excluding overdrafts)

Changes from financing cash flows

Payment of lease liabilities (capital)

Payment of lease liabilities (interest)

Proceeds from loans and borrowings

Repayment of bank borrowings

Payment of RCF fees

Total changes from financing cash flows

Other changes

Lease liability additions

Disposal of lease liabilities

The effect of changes in foreign exchange rates

Interest expense

Total other changes

Borrowings at end of year (excluding overdrafts)

Net debt reconciliation

Net debt (excluding unamortised debt costs)

RCF

Cash and cash equivalents

Net bank cash

Non-IFRS 16 lease liabilities

Non-IFRS 16 net cash

IFRS 16 lease liabilities

Net debt including IFRS 16 lease liabilities

FY22
£000

85,702

85,702

—

25,434

—

25,434

FY21
£000

104,362

104,362

7,500

31,552

(405)

38,647

FY22
£000

FY21
£000

 143,009 

 142,129 

 (25,969)

 (4,500)

 — 

 (14,327)

 (4,869)

 7,500 

 (7,500)

 (10,000)

 — 

 (619)

 (37,969)

 (22,315)

 3,634 

 (2,340)

 (120)

 4,922 

 6,096 

 18,593 

 (464)

 (59)

 5,125 

 23,195 

 111,136 

 143,009 

FY22
£000

—

(16,280)

(16,280)

485

(15,795)

110,651

94,856

FY21
£000

7,500

(8,315)

(815)

766

(49)

135,148

135,099

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

117
117

 
 
 
21. Trade and other payables

Current

Trade payables

Other tax and social security

Accrued expenses

Trade and other payables

FY22
£000

FY21
£000

20,091 

2,792 

13,075 

35,958 

15,309 

194 

10,685 

26,188 

Trade payables and accruals principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs. The Group has financial 
risk management policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within the pre-agreed credit terms. 

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value.

Accrued expenses comprise various accrued property costs, payroll costs and other expenses, including £453k (FY21: £677k) of deferred 
income in relation to the customer loyalty scheme. The increase in the balance from FY21 is due to an increase in the bonus accrual. 

The Group has net US dollar denominated trade and other payables of £4.9m (FY21: £2.9m).

22. Provisions
Accounting policy
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the Group will be 
required to settle that obligation. Provisions are the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the end of the 
reporting period, and are discounted to present value where the effect is material.

Balance as at 3 May 2021

Provisions made during the year

Provisions used during the year

Provisions released during the year

Balance as at 1 May 2022

Non-current

Current

Dilapidations
£000

718

399

—

—

Total
£000

718

399

—

—

1,117

1,117

913

204

913

204

Dilapidation provision
In accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, the Group recognises provisions for the cost of reinstating certain Group properties at the end 
of their lease term, based on the conditions set out in the terms of the individual leases. The timing of the outflows will match the ends 
of the relevant leases, which range from 1 to 14 years. The average remaining term of the estate is 3.7 years.

23. Defined contribution pension plans
Accounting policy
A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate 
entity and will have no obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are 
recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account in the periods during which services are rendered by employees.

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The pension cost charge for the period represents contributions payable 
by the Group to the scheme and amounted to £777k (FY21: £643k).

At the end of the year contributions of £155k (FY21: £65k) were outstanding.

118118

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

24. Share capital and share premium
Accounting policy
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

•  Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.
•  Hedging reserve: Cumulative gains and losses on hedging instruments deemed effective in cash flow hedges.
•  Merger reserve: Created in 2018 on the formation of TheWorks.co.uk plc, it represents the difference between the cost of the investment 
in The Works Investment Limited (and its subsidiaries, The Works Stores Limited and The Works Online Limited) of £51,499,891 and the 
nominal value of the ordinary shares issued in exchange of £109.

•  Share-based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 Share-based Payment on all share options 

and schemes granted, net of share option exercises.

•  Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p:

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share capital

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share premium

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

FY22
Number

FY21
Number

62,500

—

62,500

FY22
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

62,500

—

62,500

FY21
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

25. Financial instruments
Accounting policy 
Non-derivative financial assets
Non-derivative financial assets comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash equivalents. The Group classifies all its non-
derivative financial assets as financial assets at amortised cost. Financial assets at amortised cost are initially measured at fair value plus 
directly attributable transaction costs, except for trade and other receivables without a significant financing component that are initially 
measured at transaction price. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial assets are carried at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method, subject to impairment.

At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost are credit impaired. A financial asset is 
‘credit impaired’ when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset have 
occurred. The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit loss.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand, at bank and on short-term deposit for less than three months. Bank overdrafts, within 
borrowings, that are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management are included as a component 
of cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the cash flow statement.

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Non-derivative financial liabilities comprise bank borrowings and trade and other payables. Non-derivative financial liabilities are initially 
recognised at fair value, less any directly attributable transaction costs, and subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments are mandatorily categorised as fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), except to the extent they are 
part of a designated hedging relationship and classified as cash flow hedging instruments. The Group utilises foreign currency derivative 
contracts to manage the foreign exchange risk on future US dollar denominated purchases. 

Gains and losses in respect of foreign exchange derivative financial instruments that are not part of an effective hedging relationship 
are recognised within cost of sales and net finance expense.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

119
119

 
 
 
25. Financial instruments continued
Accounting policy continued
Cash flow hedges
When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedging instrument, the effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative 
is recognised in other comprehensive income (OCI) and accumulated in the hedging reserve. The effective portion of changes in the 
fair value of the derivative that is recognised in OCI is limited to the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item, determined on 
a present value basis, from inception of the hedge. Any ineffective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is recognised 
immediately in profit or loss.

The Group designates only the change in fair value of the spot element of forward exchange contracts as the hedging instrument in cash 
flow hedging relationships and applies a hedge ratio of 1:1. The change in fair value of the forward element of forward exchange contracts 
(‘forward points’) is separately accounted for as a cost of hedging and recognised in the hedging reserve separately as costs of hedging.

When foreign exchange hedged forecast transactions subsequently result in the recognition of inventory, the amount accumulated in the 
hedging reserve and the cost of hedging reserve is included directly in the initial cost of the inventory.

If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting or the hedging instrument is sold, expires, is terminated or is exercised, 
then hedge accounting is discontinued prospectively. When hedge accounting for cash flow hedges is discontinued, the amount that 
has been accumulated in the hedging reserve remains in equity until it is included in the cost of inventory on its initial recognition.

If the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur, then the amounts that have been accumulated in the hedging reserve 
and the cost of hedging reserve are immediately reclassified to profit or loss.

Fair value estimation
The techniques applied in determining the fair values of financial assets and liabilities are disclosed below.

Foreign currency
The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the functional currency of the Company.

Transactions in currencies other than the entity’s functional currency (foreign currencies) are recognised at the rates of exchange 
prevailing on the dates of the transactions. The majority of currency transactions that are not in the functional currency of the trading 
entity relate to inventory purchases. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the 
translation at year-end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income 
statement within cost of sales, except when deferred in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow hedges. Foreign currency 
gains and losses are reported on a net basis.

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk, most significantly to the US dollar as a result of sourcing certain products which are paid 
for predominantly in US dollars. The Group hedges these exposures using forward foreign exchange contracts and hedge accounting 
is applied when the requirements of IFRS 9 are met, which include that a forecast transaction must be ‘highly probable’. The Group has 
applied judgement in assessing whether the forecast purchases remain ‘highly probable’.

The Group’s policy is that approximately 50% of the forecast purchase requirements are initially hedged, approximately 12 months prior, 
with incremental hedges taken out over time, as the buying period approaches and therefore as certainty increases over the forecast 
purchases. As a result of this progressive strategy, reducing the supply pipeline of inventory, should this occur, does not immediately 
lead to over-hedging and the disqualification of ‘highly probable’. If the forecast transactions were no longer expected to occur, any 
accumulated gain or loss on the hedging instruments would be immediately reclassified to profit or loss.

Financial risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for managing risks and uncertainties and these are reviewed on an ongoing basis. The principal 
financial risks faced by the Group include market risk, currency risk, cash flow interest rate risk, credit risk and liquidity risk.

In order to manage the Group’s exposure to these risks, in particular the Group’s exposure to currency risk, the Group enters into forward 
foreign currency contracts. No transactions in derivatives are undertaken for speculative purposes.

Further details of the Group’s approach to managing risk are included in the ‘Principal Risks and Uncertainties’ section of the Strategic 
report and in the Corporate governance report.

(a) Market risk
The Group’s activities expose it to two types of market risk, being currency risk and cash flow interest rate risk. The Group’s policies for 
managing currency risk and interest rate risk are set out below.

(i) Currency risk
The Group is exposed to transactional foreign currency risk to the extent that there is a mismatch between the currencies in which sales, 
purchases, receivables and borrowings are denominated. A significant proportion of the Group’s retail products are procured from 
overseas suppliers in transactions denominated in US dollars.

The Group uses foreign currency derivative contracts and US dollar denominated cash balances to manage the foreign exchange risk 
on US dollar denominated inventory purchases.

As described above, the Group takes a prudent, but flexible, approach to hedging the risk of exchange rate fluctuations. At 1 May 2022, 
the Group held forward contracts with a nominal value of $30.0m (FY21: $43.2m), all with maturity dates of less than two years. These 
contracts have an average forward rate of $1.3964 (FY21: $1.3144).

120120

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

25. Financial instruments continued
Financial risk management continued
(a) Market risk continued
(i) Currency risk continued
Exposure to currency risk
The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date are 
as follows:

US dollar

Euro

Liabilities

Assets

FY22
£000

4,905 

454 

FY21
£000

 2,878 

 767 

FY22
£000

980 

3,092 

FY21
£000

3,793 

1,415 

Currency sensitivity analysis
The Group is exposed to the US dollar and, to a significantly lesser extent, the euro.

The following table details the Group’s sensitivity to a 10% increase or decrease in sterling against the relevant foreign currencies. 10% 
represents management’s assessment of the reasonably possible change in foreign exchange rates. The sensitivity analysis includes 
only outstanding foreign currency denominated monetary items and adjusts their translation at the year end for a 10% change in foreign 
currency rates. A positive number below indicates an increase in profit and other equity where sterling strengthens 10% against the 
relevant currency. For a 10% weakening of sterling against the relevant currency, there would be a comparable impact on the profit and 
other equity, and the balances below would be positive. 

Profit/(loss) for the period

USD impact

Euro impact

FY22
£000

357

FY21
£000

(83)

FY22
£000

(240)

FY21
£000

(59)

This is mainly attributable to the exposure outstanding on US dollar and euro cash, trade payables and other accruals in the Group at the 
reporting date.

The sensitivity analysis above represents the inherent foreign exchange risk as at the year end, but is not reflective of the exposure, and 
therefore the profit impact, to foreign currency exchange movements during the year.

(ii) Interest rate risk
The Group is also exposed to the effects of fluctuations in the interest rate on its banking facility. The sensitivity analysis below has been 
determined based on an increase in the interest rate of 1.0% on the average cash balances throughout the year.

Variable rate instruments (100 bp increase)

Variable rate instruments (100 bp decrease)

FY22
£000

123

(123)

FY21
£000

56

(56)

(b) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations. The Group does not offer any credit to customers; therefore, the credit risk with respect to exposure to customers is low.

The Group does not have any significant credit risk exposure to any single counterparty or any group of counterparties having similar 
characteristics. The Group defines counterparties as having similar characteristics if they are related entities.

The credit risk on liquid funds and derivative financial instruments is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit ratings 
assigned by international credit rating agencies.

The carrying amount of the financial assets recorded in the financial statements represents the Group’s and the Company’s exposure 
to credit risk.

(c) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting the obligations associated with its financial liabilities that 
are settled by delivering cash or another financial asset.

The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining adequate reserves, banking facilities and reserve borrowing facilities, by continuously 
monitoring forecast and actual cash flows, and by matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities.

The following tables detail the Group’s remaining contractual maturity for its financial assets and liabilities with agreed repayment 
periods. The tables have been drawn up based on the undiscounted cash flows, excluding interest, based on the earliest date on 
which the Group can be required to pay.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

121
121

 
 
 
25. Financial instruments continued
Contractual maturity of financial liabilities

1 May 2022

Interest bearing

Non-interest bearing

Finance lease liability (undiscounted cash flows)

Derivative

Forward currency contracts

2 May 2021

Interest bearing

Non-interest bearing

Finance lease liability (undiscounted cash flows)

Derivative

Forward currency contracts

Within 1 year
£000

1—5 years
£000

5+ years
£000

Total
£000

— 

32,917 

31,592 

— 

913 

— 

—

83,017 

21,862 

— 

33,830 

136,471 

— 

— 

— 

— 

64,509 

83,930 

21,862 

170,301 

7,500 

26,035 

35,978 

1,649 

71,162 

— 

— 

— 

— 

7,500 

26,035 

86,601 

30,158 

152,737 

53 

— 

1,702 

86,654 

30,158 

187,974 

Hedge accounting 
IFRS 9 requires the Group to ensure that hedge accounting relationships are aligned with the Group’s risk management objectives 
and strategy and to apply a qualitative and forward-looking approach to assessing hedge effectiveness.

The Group determines the existence of an economic relationship between the hedging instrument and the hedged item based 
on the currency, amount and timing of their respective cash flows. The Group assesses whether the derivative designated in each 
hedging relationship is expected to be, and has been, effective in offsetting cash flows of the hedged item using the hypothetical 
derivative method.

In these hedge relationships, the main sources of ineffectiveness are:

•  the effect of counterparties and the Group’s own credit risk on the fair value of the forward foreign exchange contracts, which 
is not reflected in the change in the fair value of the hedged cash flows attributable to the change in exchange rates; and

•  changes in the timing of the hedged transactions.

Fair value measurements
Financial instruments carried at fair value are measured by reference to the following fair value hierarchy, based on the degree to which 
the fair value is observable:

•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;
•  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable 

for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are 

not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value under a Level 2 valuation method. All other financial instruments carried 
at fair value are measured using the Level 1 valuation method.

There were no transfers between the levels during the current or prior year.

Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of derivative financial instruments at the balance sheet date is as follows:

Net derivative financial instruments

Foreign exchange contracts

FY22
£000

FY21
£000

2,393 

(1,702)

122122

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

25. Financial instruments continued
Classification of financial instruments
The table below shows the classification of financial assets and liabilities as at 1 May 2022.

The fair value of financial instruments has been assessed as approximating to their carrying value.

As at 1 May 2022

Financial assets measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Financial liabilities measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value

Unsecured bank loans

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

As at 1 May 2022

As at 2 May 2021

Financial assets measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Financial liabilities measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value

Unsecured bank loans

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

As at 2 May 2021

Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000

Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000

Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000

Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

2,393

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8,427

16,280

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(111,136)

(35,958)

2,393

24,707

(147,094)

Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000

Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000

Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000

Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(1,702)

—

—

—

—

6,913

8,315

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(7,500)

(135,914)

(26,188)

(1,702)

15,228

(169,602)

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

123
123

 
 
 
26. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements 
Accounting policy
The Group operates an equity-settled share-based compensation plan.

The cost of the awards to employees is expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on 
a straight-line basis over the vesting period of the award. The cost of awards to employees of subsidiary undertakings is recognised 
as an increase in the investment in the subsidiary. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number 
of share awards that will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. The awards granted during FY22 include market-based 
vesting conditions. At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimate of the number of awards that are expected to vest. 
Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

During FY22, the Group had two (FY21: two) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.

TheWorks.co.uk Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant 
of performance related and restricted awards. 

The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY22 the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date and the achievement of an EPS target and a share price target (FY21 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EPS target and a share price target).

Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.

Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option 
is that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.

LTIP

SAYE

 2,595,915

 1,376,686 

 1,085,105 

 1,209,189 

 (36,664)

 (521,872)

 601,693 

 — 

4,246,049 

 2,064,003 

LTIP

SAYE

 0.47 

 0.47 

 0.73 

0.59

 0.48 

 3.65 

FY22
£000

 584 

 67 

 651

 0.58 

 0.55 

 0.57 

—

 0.56 

 1.30 

FY21
£000

 25 

 56 

 81 

Number of share options

Outstanding at 3 May 2021

Granted

Forfeited

Restricted stock awards granted

Outstanding at 1 May 2022

Weighted average exercise price (£)

Outstanding at 3 May 2021

Granted

Forfeited

Restricted stock awards granted

Outstanding at 1 May 2022

Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

The exercise prices of outstanding share options as at 1 May 2022 range from £0.21 to £0.81.

Expense recognised in the Income statement

LTIP – share-based payment expense

SAYE – share-based payment expense

Total IFRS 2 charges

27. Capital commitments
At 1 May 2022 the Group had capital commitments of £139k (FY21: £46k).

124124

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)28. Related party transactions
Identity of related parties with which the Group has transacted
Balances and transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation 
and are not disclosed in this note. Transactions between the Group and its associates are disclosed below.

Transactions with key management personnel
The compensation of key management personnel (including the Directors) is as follows:

Key management remuneration – including social security costs

Pension contributions

Long Term Incentive Plan – including social security costs

Total transactions with key management personnel

FY22
£000

 2,077 

 134 

 621 

 2,832

FY21
£000

 1,965 

 124 

 29 

 2,118 

Further details on the compensation of key management personnel who are Directors are provided in the Group’s Directors’ 
remuneration report.

29. Subsidiary undertakings
The results of all subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated financial statements. The principal place of business and the 
registered office addresses for the subsidiaries are the same as for the Company.

Company

The Works Investments Limited

The Works Stores Limited

The Works Online Limited

Active/
dormant

Direct/
indirect control

Registered
number

Active

Active

Dormant

Direct

09073458

Indirect

Indirect

06557400

08040244

Class of
shares held

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ownership

100%

100%

100%

30. Post balance sheet events
On 10 June 2022, the Group renewed its bank facility, increasing the size of the committed facility to £30.0m, and extended the expiry 
date to the end of November 2025, providing significant additional liquidity headroom.

The Strategic report on pages 1 to 46 and this Directors’ report have been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance 
upon, applicable English company law and any liability of the Directors in connection with these reports shall be subject to the limitations 
and restrictions provided by such law.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

125
125

 
 
 
Company statement of financial position
As at 1 May 2022

Fixed assets

Investment

Current assets

Deferred tax assets

Trade and other receivables

Loan receivable 

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Share capital

Share premium

Share-based payment reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

Note

34

35

36

37

38

39

39

FY22
£000

 57,537 

 57,537 

 —

 20 

 —

 20 

 57,557 

 916 

 916 

 56,641 

 625 

 28,322 

 2,252 

 25,442 

 56,641 

FY21
£000

57,279

57,279

 341 

 10 

 13,847 

14,198 

71,477

455

455

71,022

625

28,322

1,546

40,529

71,022

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 23 September 2022 and were signed on its behalf by:

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 11325534

126

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Company statement of changes in equity

Balance at 26 April 2020

Total comprehensive income for the period

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive expense

Total comprehensive (expense)/income for the period

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charge

Transactions with owners of the Company

Balance at 2 May 2021

Total comprehensive income for the period

Loss for the period

Total comprehensive expense for the period

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charge

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share capital
£000

Share premium
£000

Share-based
payment reserve
£000

625

28,322

1,489

—

—

–

—

—

—

—

–

—

—

—

(24)

(24)

81

81

Retained 
earnings
£000

11,562

28,967

—

28,967

—

—

Total equity
£000

41,998

28,967

(24)

28,943

81

81

625

28,322

1,546

40,529

71,022

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 706 

 706 

 (15,087)

 (15,087)

 (15,087)

 (15,087)

 — 

 — 

 706 

 706 

Balance at 1 May 2022

 625 

 28,322 

 2,252 

 25,442 

 56,641 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

127

 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements

31. Accounting policies
(a) Basis of preparation
The Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (“FRS 101”). In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure 
requirements of UK-adopted international accounting standards (“Adopted IFRSs”), but makes amendments where necessary in order 
to comply with Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions has been taken. 
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for at least 
12 months from the date of issue of these financial statements. Accordingly, the financial statements have been prepared on a going 
concern basis. Refer to Note 1(b)(i) for further information regarding the basis of preparation.

Principal accounting policies
The principal accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these financial statements.

New accounting standards
The Company has applied the following new standards and interpretations for the first time for the annual reporting period commencing 
3 May 2021:

•  COVID-19 Related Rent Concessions (Amendments to IFRS 16)
• 

Interest Rate Benchmark Reform: Phase 2 (Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39, IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and IFRS 16)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above has not led to any changes to the Company’s accounting policies 
or had any other material impact on the financial position or performance of the Company.

(b) Income statement
The Company made a loss after tax of £15.1m for the period relating to the impairment of the investment balance following the waiver 
of an intercompany loan (FY21: profit of £29.0m). As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the income statement of the 
Company is not presented as part of the financial statements.

In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures:

•  cash flow statement and related notes;
•  comparative period reconciliations for share capital;
•  transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries;
•  capital management;
•  the effects of new but not yet effective IFRS; and
•  the compensation of key management personnel.

As the consolidated financial statements include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 
available in respect of the following disclosures:

• 

IFRS 2 share-based payments in respect of Group-settled share-based payments.

(c) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires the Company to make estimates and judgements that affect the application of policies 
and reported amounts.

Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Company accounting policies. Where a 
significant risk of materially different outcomes exists due to the requirement to make assumptions in arriving at a figure, this will represent 
a key source of estimation uncertainty.

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations 
of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates which have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next 
12 months are discussed below.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate, in the following note:

Description

Impairment of investments in subsidiaries

Note

34

Page

129

32. Employee costs
The Company has no employees other than the Board of Directors. Full details of Directors’ remuneration are set out in the Directors’ 
remuneration report.

128

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

33. Dividends
Accounting policy
At the balance sheet date, dividends are only recognised as a liability if they are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the 
discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

No dividends were paid to shareholders during FY21 or FY22.

Dividend equivalents totalling £175k (FY21: £74k) were accrued in the year in relation to share-based long-term incentive schemes.

The Board has recommended the payment of a 2.4 pence per share final dividend in respect of FY22 (FY21: £Nil).

34. Investments in subsidiaries
Key source of estimation uncertainty
The carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings is reviewed for impairment on an annual basis. The recoverable amount 
is determined based on value in use. The value in use method requires the Group to determine appropriate assumptions (which are key 
sources of estimation uncertainty) in relation to the growth rates of sales and gross margins, operating costs, future capital maintenance 
expenditure, long-term growth rates and the pre-tax discount rate used to discount the assumed cash flows to present value. Estimation 
uncertainty arises due to changing economic and market factors.

At 3 May 2021

Additions

Impairment charge

At 1 May 2022

FY22
£000

57,279

14,105

(13,847)

57,537

Investments in subsidiaries represent the Company’s investment in its subsidiary, The Works Investments Limited.

Loan waiver
The intercompany loan balance of £13.8m was waived in full in FY22, resulting in an addition to the investment balance of £13.8m during 
the period.

Impairment of investments in subsidiaries
The Company evaluates its investments in subsidiaries annually for any indicators of impairment. The Company considers the relationship 
between its market capitalisation and the carrying value of its investments, among other factors, when reviewing for indicators 
of impairment. 

As described above, key assumptions for the value in use calculation include those regarding the discount rate, long-term growth 
rates, and expected trading performance (sales, gross margin and operating costs). In FY20 the Company recognised an impairment 
charge of £32.7m in respect of its investment in The Works Investments Limited; £23.5m of this impairment was reversed in the prior year 
financial statements.

The recoverable amount of the investment in The Works Investments Limited has been re-evaluated based on the Group’s latest forecast 
post-tax cash flows included in its Base Case plan (see Note 1(b)(i)) covering the Projection Period, which have regard to historical 
performance and knowledge of the current market, together with the Group’s views on the future achievable growth and the impact 
of committed cash flows. The cash flows include estimates of ongoing capital expenditure required to maintain the store network, but 
exclude any significant growth capital initiatives. Severe weather has been considered when modelling forecasts and it is not deemed to 
have a material affect on the projected numbers in the impairment review.

Cash flows beyond the Projection Period are extrapolated using an estimated average long-term growth rate of 2.0%.

Management estimates discount rates that reflect the current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks specific to the 
Group. The pre-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s pre-tax weighted average cost of capital (WACC) which has been calculated 
using the capital asset pricing model, the inputs of which include a country risk-free rate, equity risk premium, Group size premium, 
forecasting risk premium and risk adjustment (beta). The rate used to discount the forecast cash flows is 17.88% (FY21: 16.78%). 

As a result of this analysis, an impairment charge of £13.8m has been recognised during FY22 relating to the investment addition in the 
year due to the intercompany loan waiver.

Sensitivity analysis
As disclosed in the accounting policies note, the cash flows used within the impairment model, the long-term growth rate and the discount 
rate are sources of estimation uncertainty and changes in these assumptions could lead to further impairment.

Management has performed sensitivity analysis on the assumptions in the impairment model using reasonably possible changes in these 
key assumptions. Reasonably possible changes to these key assumptions, including a 200 basis point increase in the pre-tax discount 
rate, a 200 basis point reduction in the long-term growth rate, or a 5% reduction in cash flows from the Base Case plan would not result 
in a material increase to the impairment charge. In the event that all three were to occur simultaneously, there would not be a material 
increase to the impairment charge.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

129

 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued

35. Deferred tax asset
Accounting policy
The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the period, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences 
are not provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill; the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor 
taxable profit other than in a business combination; and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will 
probably not reverse in the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or 
settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which temporary 
differences can be utilised.

Deferred tax asset

Deferred tax assets of £341k in FY21 related to temporary differences arising from trading.

36. Trade receivables

Prepayments and accrued income

FY22
£000

—

—

FY22
£000

20

20

FY21
£000

341

341

FY21
£000

10

10

37. Loans receivable
Accounting policy
Loans to subsidiaries are initially recorded at fair value. After initial recognition, they are measured at amortised cost, less any impairment 
losses. The loans are non-interest bearing and repayable on demand. The provision for impairment of loans receivable is based on lifetime 
expected credit losses. Lifetime expected credit losses are reassessed at each reporting date and any movement in the provision is 
recognised in the Company income statement.

At 26 April 2020

Loans waived

At 2 May 2021

Loans waived

At 1 May 2022

£000

28,500

(14,653)

13,847

(13,847)

—

The loan balance of £13,847k in FY21 related to a non-interest-bearing intercompany loan repayable on demand by subsidiary 
undertaking The Works Investments Limited. The full amount was waived during the year as part of a rationalisation of various 
intercompany balances. 

38. Trade payables

Non-trade payables and accrued expenses

Accruals

Amounts owed to Group undertakings

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are non-interest bearing and repayable on demand.

FY22
£000

208 

92 

616 

916 

FY21
£000

185

246

24

455

130

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

C
O
R
P
O
R
A
T
E
G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

F
I

I

N
A
N
C
A
L
S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

39. Share capital and share premium
Accounting policy
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

•  Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.
•  Share-based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 Share-based Payment on all share options 

and schemes granted, net of share option exercises.

•  Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.

Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p: 

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share capital

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share premium

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

FY22
Number

FY21
Number

62,500

—

62,500

FY22
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

62,500

—

62,500

FY21
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

40. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements
Accounting policy
The Group operates an equity-settled share-based compensation plan.

The cost of the awards to employees is expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on 
a straight-line basis over the vesting period of the award. The cost of awards to employees of subsidiary undertakings is recognised as 
an increase in the investment in the subsidiary. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number 
of share awards that will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. The awards granted during FY22 include market-based 
vesting conditions. At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimate of the number of awards that are expected to vest. 
Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

During the period, the Company had two (FY21: two) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.

TheWorks.co.uk Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant 
of performance related and restricted awards. 

The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY22 the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date and the achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target (FY21 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target).

Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

131

 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued

40. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements continued
Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option 
is that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.

For more information, refer to Note 26.

Expense recognised in the Company income statement

Share-based payment expenses

Expense/(credit) recognised in the Company income statement

Expense recognised in the subsidiary income statement

Total IFRS 2 charges recognised in the Group income statement

41. Related party transactions

Loans receivable from subsidiary undertaking The Works Investments Limited

FY22
£000

396

 310

706 

FY22
£000

—

FY21
£000

(5) 

 86 

 81 

FY21
£000

13,847

The Works Investments Limited is a 100% owned subsidiary, with a principal place of business and registered office address the same 
as that of the Company. The loan is non-interest bearing and repayable on demand.

132

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Advisers and contacts

Corporate Brokers
Investec Bank plc  
30 Gresham Street  
London 
EC2V 7QP 
Tel: 020 7597 4000

Legal Advisers 
Squire Patton Boggs (UK) LLP  
6 Wellington Place 
Leeds  
LS1 4AP 
Tel: 0113 284 7000

Auditor
KPMG LLP 
One Snowhill  
Snowhill Queensway  
Birmingham 
B4 6GH 
Tel: 0121 740 3516

Principal Bankers
HSBC Bank Plc 
Birmingham Corporate Centre 
6th Floor, 120 Edmund Street 
Birmingham 
B3 2QZ 
Tel: 03455 852 569

Registrars
Equiniti Limited 
Aspect House, Spencer Road  
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

Financial Public Relations and Investor Relations
Sanctuary Counsel  
5-8 The Sanctuary 
Westminster 
London 
SW1P 3JS 
Tel: 0207 340 0395

Registered Office
Boldmere House, Faraday Avenue 
Hams Hall Distribution Park  
Coleshill 
Birmingham 
B46 1AL 
Tel: 0121 313 6050

The Works commitment to environmental issues is reflected in this 
Annual Report, which has been printed on Symbol Freelife Satin, an 
FSC® certified material.

This document was printed by L&S using its environmental 
print technology, which minimises the impact of printing on the 
environment, with 99% of dry waste diverted from landfill. Both the 
printer and the paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

CBP014811

Boldmere House 
Faraday Avenue 
Hams Hall Distribution Park 
Coleshill 
Birmingham B46 1AL